The estates, empires, & principallities of the world Represented by ye description of countries, maners of inhabitants, riches of prouinces, forces, gouernment, religion; and the princes that haue gouerned in euery estate. With the begin[n]ing of all militarie and religious orders. Translated out of French by Edw: Grimstone, sargeant at armes.

❧ A DISCOVRSE OF THE KINGS OF PERSIA, ACCOR∣DING [ C] TO THE WRITINGS BOTH OF GREEKE AND LALINE AVTHORS.

The Contents.

1. A chronicle abridged of the kings of Persia according to the Bible, Philo, and other authors. 2. Another chronicle abridged according to Herodotus, Xenophon, Iu∣stin, [ D] and others, much more ample than the former. 3. Cyrus ruines the Monarchie of the Medians, and settles that of the Persians. 4. Histori•• of Daniell cast into the lyons denne, and why the Iewes had leaue to build their temple. Cyrus conquers Lydia, and takes Cre∣sus their king: he makes war against the Scythians, by whom he was defeated and slaine 5. His Eloge; he was first of all called King of Kings. He brought vnto the Persians the vse of long robe and Thyare, as some hold. 6. Cambises conquereth Egypt, kills his brother Smerdes; his sacriledges and cruelties, and finally his death. 7. Smerdes one of the Mages or wisemen cau∣seth himselfe to be acknowledged king, and how he was discouered. 8. How Darius Histaspes came vnto the crowne of Persia, his orders and conquests, he restored the soueraigne priesthood among the Iewes: the great armie he prepared against Greece if death had not preuented him. [ E] 9. Xerxes declared successor to his father, for that he was borne when his father was king, and his other brethren, before; he punisheth the Egyptians seuerely hauing reuolted; his power∣full armie both by sea and land to ruine Greece, his defeat and death. 10. Pretentions of Arta∣han, his wickednesse discouered, and his punishment. 11. Artaxerxes takes reuenge of the death of his father Xerxes, he sends an armie of three hundred thousand men against the Egyp∣tians; he sends backe Esdras to Ierusalem, and doth him many fauours; the Egyptians shake off the Persians yoake: Cyrus the sonne of Darius put in prison, and the reason, and when Darius the bastard died. 12. Cyrus escapes out of prison; the perfections of this prince, and his death: Artaxerxes Mnemon lo••es peac••, and seekes to reconcile the Grecians among themselues. 13. The Iewes being at discord, Darius Occhus sends Bagose against them, who imposeth a tribute: begin∣ning [ F] of the Iewes Abramis: reuolt of Artabasus, and his death, whereby the countries of Aegypt, Phenicia, and Cypres returne vnder the commaund of the Persians: Darius and his children poi∣soned by Bagoas. 14. Darius dispossest of his Empire by Alexander the Great, and at what time. 15. When and how the realme of Persia recouered her auncient beautie. Beginning of Artaxare,

[ A] and his greatnesse; he looseth a bartaile against the Emperor Alexander Mameus; he was well see••e in the knowledge of Mages. 16. Saporus conquereth a part of Mesopotamia, and many ••••••••es from the Romans; he looseth a battaile against the Emperor Gordian, and wins another against Valerian, where he tooke this Emperor prisoner. Odenall king of the Palmerenians de∣fe••ts Saporus in a great battaile, which staied the course of his conquests. 17. Vardanes makes a peace with the Emperor Probus, Carus recouers Mesopotamia from the Persians. 18. Nar∣seus a man of great attempts, vanquished by Maximilian in a famous battaile, which ruined the Persians affaires. 19. Misdates crowned from his mothers wombe. Saporus, a great enemie to C••••istians, obtaines eight victories against the Emperour Constance: but he was vanquished [ B] in Armenia by Arsaces: he defeats the armie of Iulian the Apostotat, and makes a peace with the Emperour Iouin••an. 20. Controuersie for the succession of the crowne of Persia, betwixt the sonnes of Saporus: cruelties of Artaxerxes. 21. Is digertes, tutor to the young Emperour Theodo∣siu••, and the good offices which he did to his people. In the beginning he persecuted the Christi∣ans, but in the end he was p••cified by the persuasion of Antiochus, Gouernour to the young Chri∣stian Emperour his sonne, who was possest with a deuill, recouered by the prayers of the good Bi∣shop Math••nte. 22. Warre betwixt Perosus and the Euthalites; the beginning of this people: ••••rosus doth homage, and sweares fealtie to the king of Euthalites, his falshood which cost him his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 23. Valens becomes tributarie to the Euhalites; Cauadus shakes off the yoke: the crueltie of this ••••••nce, & his strange ordinance to make women common. 24. The regents of Persia should be of the [ C] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 royall; the Councell of Gusanascade against Cauades, the deliuerie of this prince by the means of his wife, and of Se••sè; he retires to the Emperour Anastasius, he is relieued by the king of the ••••thalites, and recouers the possession of his realme, whereof he disposeth before his death: why he grew mild to Christians. 25. Cosroe giuen to learning, and honours learned men; he made ••••re against the Emperour Iustinian, with whom he was forced to make a peace, called a peace without end, but he brake it presently, and being often defeated by Belisarius, he died of griefe. 26. Warre of Hormisda against the Romans; the great defeat of Hormisda by the Emperour Ty∣••••riu••, and another giuen him by Philipicus a Roman Captaine: he looseth Nisibin, and a part of M••sopotamia, with the towne of Arsemene; he makes the Turkes his tributaries and d••sposeth 〈◊〉〈◊〉 realme: his execrable crueltie against his fathers wife and children, whom he beats to death [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a cudgell. 27. Conspiracie against Cosroe, who saues himselfe, hauing called vpon the God 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Christians, and is restored to his realme: Narses reuolts against the Emperour Phocus, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by Cosroe. 28. All Mesopotamia and Syria conquered by Cosroe, with Palestina, Armenia, ••••••docia, Galatia, and Paphlagonia, the townes of Edesse, Capesse, Cesarea, the towne of Dam••s, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the holie citie of Hierusalem, carrying the holie Crosse into Persia; he is in the end defeated 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Emperour Heraclius: his sonne caused to die in prison: Siroe deliuers all the Christians were captiues in Persia. 29. Of the kings of Persia; the Mah••metans expelled by the Tarta∣••••••: Tamerlan makes himselfe lord of the greatest part of the East: Vsun Chassan descended 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Tamerlan. 30. Vsun Chassan marries the daughter of the Emperour of Trebisonde, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his daughter to Secaidar; the holie life of the wife of Vsun Chassan, the warres of this prince [ E] ••••••inst Mahomet Emperour of the Turkes; he is defeated by them, and his sonne Zognel stayne: ••••••••uolt of Vguely Mehemec against his father, retiring himselfe to the Turkes; the policie of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Chassan to free himselfe of his sonne. 31. The tragicall Historie of the death of Iacub Patis∣•••••• his wife, and sonne: Secaidar takes armes against his prince. 32. Defeat and death of Sacaei∣•••••• the breeding vp of Ismael Sophi, his first enterprise, the bad order of Alumut king of Persie; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the battaile betwixt him and the Sophi, who wins the victorie, and takes Tauris: his great ••••••eltie against his owne mother. 33. Ismael weares a red Turban, whence comes the name of ••••••bas•• the victorie of Ismael against Marat Can; he conquers Diarbet, his policies to make 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the chiefe Lords of the countrie; he wins the best part of Sydulia, and kills the king with his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hand: another defeat of Murat Can: the Tartarians make warre against the Sophi, and [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Sumac••ia, with the citie of Darbanc: the loue of the souldiers to Ismael: what deuise he cau∣•••••• to be set upon his coyne: Selim Emperour of the Turkes makes warre against Ismael, and the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the hatred of these two princes, the battaile of Zaldarane lost by the Sophi, and Tauris 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by Selim. 34. The reuolt of Vlama a Persian against Tamas or Thamas: the conquests of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vpon the Persians, who makes himselfe maister of Assyria and Mesopotamia; he takes

Bagadet, and ••••oyles Tauris twice: his armie defeated by Deliment a Persian Captaine. 35. The [ A] poli•••• of Ism••el causeth him to lo••se both realme and life. The conquest of Amurath, Emperour of the Turkes vpon Mahamet called the blind. Defeat of the Turkes by Abas king of Persia, who 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Embassadours to the Emperour Rad••lph••s.

¶ A CHRONICLE OF THE KINGS OF PERSIA, ACCORDING TO THE HOLIE BIBLE, PHILO, [ B] AND OTHER AVTHORS.

SEing that treating of other nations we haue hitherto obserued this or∣der, not only to describe the scituation of prouinces, manners, and reli∣gion of people; their forces, wealth, and whatsoeuer was rare; but also to treat summarily of the princes which haue commaunded there, of their warres and conquests, of their increase, changes, and downefalls: It seemes I should wrong the Persian nation, who haue sometimes h••ld the monarchie of the world, and commaund at this present such warlike and power∣full nations; to passe ouer with silence their worthiest actions, and the names of the prin∣ces [ C] which haue gouerned there as farre (although their Seigneurie haue often changed from familie to familie) as obscure antiquitie, and the diuersitie of opinions of the most ancient and moderne Authors vpon that subiect will permit.

Among the Modernes, there is a Portugal, called Teixiere, who hauing read a Persian Historie, written by one called Turik Mirkond, a Persian borne, hath made an abridge∣ment, by the which he seemes to haue plainely set downe the succession of these great princes, from the beginning of this monarchie vnto this day: but it is with such discor∣dance from all that which other Authors that haue gone before them haue written, as it is a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 thing to reconcile them; and ••e•• it may be it is not vnprobable to beleeue that he hath come neerer vnto the truth▪ and if he doth contradict in some things, as wel [ D] that which is written in the holie Bible, as elswhere, it is rather by reason of the change of names which euerie nation would turne into his owne language, than of persons, or of the actions which haue past during the time, at the least contained in holie writ; for as for others they doe often differ. Yet to content the minds of such as giue more credit to the Chronologie and Genealogie of these princes, written by antiquitie: I haue held it more conuenient first to make a succinct description, as it hath beene hitherto obserued; and then to add the relations of Teixiere, to the end that euerie man may the better judge what credit is to be giuen to the one or the other, yet reseruing to my selfe to add there∣unto according to occurents, not to contradict Teixieres Author, but for some no∣table actions which happily haue beene omitted, especially against the Turkes. [ E]

And for that Philo and Metastbenes (ancient Authors) differ in opinion from the Gre∣cians, [ I] and yet agree with that which is found in the ho••••e Bible; it shall be verie conueni∣e••t to set downe here what they say, which is, That Cyrus hauing conquered the realme of Media from Astiages, he left the said kingdome vnto his vnkle Darius, with whose aid he tooke Babylon▪ and transported the Assyrian monarchie to the Persians. Two yeares af∣ter, the said Darius returned into Media, and Cyrus raigned alone in Babylon, who after∣wards hauing attempted to make warre against the Scythians, he left his sonne Cambises king in his absence, according to the custome of the Persians, which was, to appoint a king that was neerest in bloud to him that was king, whenas he went to make war against any forraine nation; which might be the reason why these Authors doe not put Cambi∣ses [ F] in the successiue order of the Monarchs; neither doe they speake of the two brethren 〈◊〉〈◊〉 who vsurped the empire fraudule••••ly▪ as shall be elswhere spoken, and continued 〈◊〉〈◊〉 moneths, Darius sonne to Hystasp••s, hauing bin chosen king. Xerxes sonne to Da∣r••••s ••••••eeded him, but they put him not in the number of the monarchs, for that going

[ A] presently to make warre against the Grecians, he left the realme to Darius Longuemain 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sonne: but the Greeke histories haue not omitted to place Xerxes and Cambises in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 successiue order of the said Monarches: the which is the cause that they number 〈◊〉〈◊〉 yeares in the said Monarchie, that is to say, two hundred twentie and six; and these, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hundred ninetie and one, after this manner.

Cyrus with Darius his vnckle raigned two yeares.

Cyrus alone raigned two and twentie yeares.

Darius sonne to Histaspes being chosen king, surnamed Artaxerxes Assuerus, raigned twentie yeares.

Darius Artaxerxes Longuemain seuen and thirtie yeares,

[ B] Darius Nothus nineteene yeares.

••••taxerxes Mnemon fiue and fiftie yeares.

••••rius-O••hus six and twentie yeares.

••••••se••es foure yeares.

Darius the last Monarch (defeated by Alexander the Great who transported the Mo∣narchie to the Grecians) six yeares.

¶ Another abridgement of a Chronicle, according to the Greeke [ C] and Latin authors.

••O set downe the opinions of Herodotus, Xenophon, Iustine, Agathie, Procepius, and ma∣ny [ II] others which haue written of this nation, some in passing, & others of set purpose; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 be fit to heare Ioseph speake of their beginning. Sem, saith he, the sonne of Noah 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sonnes who enioied Asia, from the riuer of Euphrates to the Indian Ocean: for ••••••left of his blood the Elyacaites, from whom the Persians are descended. But as for ••••rsian appellation, it is not of so long continuance; for they were afterwards called ••••••ie••s, of a king bearing that name; then Cepheniens, and Arteens, and in the end 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Perseus the Ionne of Iupiter and Andromeda, as Herodotus doth witnesse; but [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the succession of Perseus, it is not found written: for presently the countrie of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 was made subiect to the Monarchie of Assyria, vnder the which it continued vn∣••••••t. Sardanapalus was expelled his seat, and slaine by Arbaces the first prince of the ••••••••ans, and by Belochphul king of Babylon: the Monarchie of the Medians comprehen∣•••• the Persians, Bactrians, and Hyrcanians, the last whereof that gouerned was Astia∣•••••• who lost his kingdome by the persuasion of Harpagus, who was incensed against the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 that he had slain his son, & made him to eat his flesh. This Harpagus seeking some [ III] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of reuenge, sent to Cyrus, grandchild to Astiages (who was then in Persia with his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••iuing a priuat life) that if he would reuenge his iniurie and his owne (his grand∣•••••• hauing sought to kill him) he had means to giue him such an entrie into the realme 〈◊〉〈◊〉 as he might easily make himselfe Monarch, and free the Persians from serui∣••••••. The which Cyrus vnderstanding, he wrought so with his countriemen as they re∣••••••, and shaked off the Medians yoke, refusing them tribute and obedience. 〈…〉〈…〉 of these news, sent for Cyrus to come and giue an account of his rebellion; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the prince aunswered, that he would come sooner than Astiages should desire 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the which put the king into armes, and not regarding the wrong which he had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••to Harpagus, he gaue him the charge of the whole armie, to his owne ruine; for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to fight, all the greatest men of the kingdome hauing intelligence with 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••nto Cyrus partie, and the rest who knew nothing sled, being abandoned by their 〈◊〉〈◊〉, whereupon followed the rout of Astiages armie, who was forced to flie; ••••••atning to put Cyrus to death. And going afterwards to his wise men and diuines [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the euent of his affaires, all aduised him not to prosecut his nephew any further, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 suffer him to enioy the good fortune which the Destinies had put into his hands: ••••••nking that they which gaue him this councell, had beene partisans to his enemie, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 them to be hanged, and then gathered together what forces he could, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 himselfe to battaile, as he had done the other time, but not at so easie a rate, for his

troupes being defeated, he was taken prisoner by Cyrus, who stript him of his Monarchie, [ A] ye•• he put him not to death, but would haue him commaund ouer the Hyrcanians: for the Empire of Astiages extended thither •• and towards the West, it came (except the Assyrians, Syrians, and Iew 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the riuer Halys, and to Capadocia, the rest belonging to the king of Lidia.

¶ The raigne of Cyrus and Ciaxare, or Darius.

[ IIII] Cyrus hauing thus vanquished his grandfather, began to raigne with his vncle Ciax∣••re, otherwise called Darius, sonne to Astiages, as some write, but he should rather [ B] haue beene his brother, for Zonares makes him very old, and yet Astiages when he was defeated by Cyrus which was the same yeare, was himselfe at the battaile which he lost. It was this Ciaxare which caused Daniell to be cast into the lyons denne; for as there was ••••reatielousie betwixt these two princes, by reason of the great honour which euery man 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Cyrus for his valour: Darius Courtiers tooke occasion hereupon to be reuenged of Daniell, persuading him to make an Edict, by the which during thirtie daies not any one of the realme should present any petition to any prince, lord, or king whatsoeuer, no not vnto any god, but to him alone; for by this meanes, say they, they should stay the subiects from hauing recourse vnto Cyrus, as they had in all their affaires, presenting their petitions vnto him as to their soueraigne king, who notwithstanding should haue no cause of ielousie or discontent by this Edict; for that, faith Zonares, they should not ex∣cept [ C] the high gods. These two princes hauing raigned two yeares together, Cyrus be∣gan to raigne alone by the death of Ciaxares, who had before spoiled Assyria, and defea∣ted the Assyrian Monarch: but he being allied to many great princes of Arabia, Syria, and Lydia, they committed infinit spoiles in Media, which made Cyrus resolue to abate this Babylonian glorie; so as after many routs and defeats which he gaue them, he came and laid siege to the proud and auncient citie of Babylon, the which he tooke by assault: after which conquest he receiued the Iewes into grace, giuing them leaue to reedifie the temple, to serue God after their law, and to pray for him and his realme: so as then they began to build the temple, and to inclose the citie of Ierusalem, the which happened in [ D] yere of the world 3427, and in the sixtieth Olympiade: Serui••s Tullius raigned at Rome.

¶ The raigne of Cyrus alone.

[ V] THe Medians being thus subdued, and the Assyrians ruined, Cyrus to be reuenged of the Lydian, who was the mightiest prince of Asia, passed the mountaine of Taur, or Corthestan, or Aman, or the blacke mountaine, and sending his great friend Harpagus into the lesser Asia to subdue it, he ioined with him against Cresus, vanquished him in bat∣taile, tooke him prisoner, and was readie to haue him burnt, had he not remembered the saying of Solon to this Lydian king: That no man should hold himselfe happie before his [ E] death; the historie whereof is common. In the ruine of the realme of Lydia was com∣prehended all Asia, from Hellespont vnto Corthestan, the which obeyed Cresus, yet the Grecian Ionians of Asia liued in libertie, and were onely allied vnto the Lydian, yet they were forced to come vnder the Persians yoake, and to acknowledge him for their soueraigne; so as Cyrus commaunded at that time from the Egean sea, and the Propon∣tides, vnto the East Indies: but as ambition is insatiable; and not content with any great∣nesse, he resolued to subiect the Scythians, who had committed great spoiles in Asia; so as he marched with his armie towards that part of Scythia, which lies beyond the riuer of Araxis, and also beyond the Bactrians and Hyrcanians, into the countrie of the Mas∣••agets and Issedons, who are now called Tartarians, or the countrie of Samureund. Cyrus [ F] hauing encountered no prince able to make head against him, knowing there was none but a woman that commaunded these Scythians and Massagets, whom they called To∣•••••• he sent to demaund her in marriage, not that he cared for her, but to haue meanes 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vpon her realme. But she vnderstanding the Persians desseignes, forbad him the

[ A] entrie into her countrie, arming what forces she could to make head against Cyrus, ma∣••ing her onely sonne Generall of her armie, who not acquainted with the stratagems of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 was surprised; for Cyrus making shew to flie, left his campe full of wine & victuals, where these poore Massageres entring, (not accustomed to such dainties) feas••ed and drunke in such sort, as they fel a sleepe in their drunkennesse: but this was their last sleepe, for Cyrus lying in ambush, came and cut some of them in peeces, and tooke the rest prito∣••••ners. Spagarpise, sonne to Tomyris, and Generall of the armie, was among the capriues. The queene aduertised of her sonnes disaster, sent a Harold to Cyrus for his deliuerie, ad∣monishing him to go out of her countrie, or else she would giue him his fill of warre. In [ B] the meane time, Spagarpise besought Cyrus to let him be vnbound; the which he did in courtesie, and then this prince seeing himselfe at libertie, and hauing a sword by his side ••etesting his misfortune to be a captiue, slew himselfe before the king. Tomyris being refused by Cyrus, came to fight with him, with the rest of her forces, and although the P••rsians and Medians did fight valiantly, yet they were in the end vanquished, and most 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of them cut in peeces, and among the dead was also the great Cyrus, for that he had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 too much in his good fortune, and not taken example by the calimities of kings 〈◊〉〈◊〉 mightie than himselfe, whom he had ruined and depriued of their Estates. Tomyris ••••ing of his death, caused his bodie to be presently sought for, which being found, she [ C] ••••••ff his head, and put it into a vessell ful of bloud, saying vnto it in mockerie, Glut thy 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with bloud in thy death, whereof thou wert so insatiable in thy life time: such was 〈◊〉〈◊〉 end of great Cyrus. The Persians carried his bodie to Pasagarde, where his tombe was 〈◊〉〈◊〉. This Pasagarde was in old time the seat of the kings of Persia: Alexander the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 was also there, after he had burnt Persepolis: and it was there whereas the Priests ••••••nnoint their kings.

As for Cyrus, he was a courteous, bountifull, vertuous, and gentle prince, louing that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 was worthie to be respected, reasonably just, and vpright, valiant in combats, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the greatest vndertakers of the earth: his ordinarie aboad when he was not with∣••••••ne by warre, was in the cities of Suze, and Ecbarane, or Babylon: It was he (as it [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉) that was first called the King of Kings, for they found it in the inscription of his 〈◊〉〈◊〉, by the report of Strabo, which title was continued vnto his successours, as we 〈◊〉〈◊〉 see in Esdras, the first Booke, the seuenth Chapter, and in the mixt Epistles of Hypo∣••••••, in that which Artaxerxes did write to Poetus. It was Cyrus also that brought in vse ••••ong robe of the kings of Persia, which was a garment (according to Procopius of gold purple diuersified with many figures of beasts and fowles. Moreouer, they had a 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and sometimes a cloake of purple: yet they said that this cloake was rather a kind 〈◊〉〈◊〉, hauing sleeues hanging vnto the hand. It is not certaine whether he or Artax∣•••••• began to weare a Tyare, but whosoeuer it was it is verie auncient. Cyrus in the end 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sonne for successour, whom he had by his wife Cassandana, daughter to Pharnaspes [ E] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 he loued in such sort, as he did not onely weare a mourning weed himselfe, but ••••ould haue his subiects doe the like) after he had raigned nine and twentie yeares, the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 happened about the yeare of the World 1435.

¶ Cambises, second Monarch of the Persians.

CAmbises was more cruell than valiant, and as insolent, proud, and an enemie to ver∣••••••tue, [ VI] as his father had beene mild and affable, and indowed with goodly parts 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of a great king: he was also without pietie, and contemned all religion, hindred the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from building their Temple in Hierusalem, forbidding to furnish them with any ••••••erialls, as they had done before by the commaundement of Cyrus. The first expedi∣•••••• [] this king made was against Amasis king of Aegypt, whose daughter he demaunded in ••••••riage, being persuaded thereunto by his physitian, who was an Aegyptian, and ene∣••••to king Amasis, for he knew wel that Amasis wold be much afflicted to giue his daugh∣ter and refusing her, it would be impossible for him to escape the Persians han is. Ama∣•••••• ••ho dreamed not of this intended treason, neither yet considered whom he sent, was

so ill aduised, as in stead of sending his daughter to Cyrus, he put in her place a goodly [ A] princesse called Niretis, daughter to Apires an Aegyptian king, whom Amasis had put to death: This ladie being in Persia, whenas the king saluted her, he called her the daughter of Amasis: You are deceiued sir (quoth she) I am the daughter of a more honest man than Amasis, that is, of king Apyres, whom Amasis had caused to be treacherously slaine, and hath seised vpon this realme. This did helpe much to incense Cambises, seeing himselfe mocked by Amasis: so as hauing just occasion to reuenge his father in laws death, and to recouer his wiues inheritance, he past into Aegypt by the meanes of king Arabe, and de∣feated Amasis, and his sonne Phammeneus: Being come to Memphis, he caused king Ama∣sis, being dead, to be taken out of his tombe, and to be whipt, as if he had had some fee∣ling, [ B] and not content therewith, he cast him into the fire, although it were contrarie to the Persians religion, who at that time did worship the fire: then he resolued to go against the king of Aethiopia, but he was forced to giue ouer his enterprise, & to returne into Aegypt, where he ruined the Temples of Apis, and flew the sacred Oxe which the Aegyptians did worship, hurting it on the thigh: he had also sent a great troupe of soul∣diers to ruine the Temple of Amon in Lybia, but they were driuen backe by raine, stormes, lighting, and tempests, so as they returned without doing any thing. But al∣though these were but false gods, yet was he rigorously punished, for first of all he be∣came in a manner furious, putting to death his neerest kinsmen and decrest friends, and among others his brother Smerdis, hauing dreampt that Smerdis was set in the royall [ C] throne, and that he toucht the stars of heauen. This moued him to send Prexaspes (one of the Mages, and his most confident freind) into Persia, to kill Smerdis, the which he ef∣fected. Then he made the licentious law of marrying his owne sister, a matter neuer before practised among the Persians: whereupon hauing consulted with his Iudges, they told him that there was no law which allowed of that acquaintance, yet there was ano∣ther law which dispenced with the kings to doe what they thought good, preseruing thereby their heads if they had spoken any thing contrarie to this tyrans will, who ha∣uing married two of his owne sisters, slew the youngest for that she had wept for her bro∣ther Smerdis, lately slaine. He was much giuen to wine, and was in a maner daily drunke, and yet wine was hurtfull vnto him, for that he was subiect to the falling-sicknesse: du∣ring [ D] his drunkennesse, he demaunded of Prexaspes, who had slaine Smerdis? what opini∣on the Persians had of him? whereto the other answered, That it was verie good, onely they found it strange that he distempered himselfe with excessiue drinking; wherewith Cambises growing into coller, caused the sonne of Prexaspes to be brought, and shoo∣ting at him, he hit him full vpon the stomach, saying, That if he had not toucht his heart, they might justly call him drunkard, and the child being opened, they found that the ar∣row had past through the middest of his heart: the father seeing it, was forced to com∣mend him that had depriued him of his heire: from which time, he caused the brauest of his traine to be murthered vpon the least conceit, whom afterwards he called for, not re∣membring that he had put them to death. But Cambises did sodainely receiue the reward [ E] of all his villanies; for going into Aegypt, he had news that the Mages had reuolted, and seised vpon the realme of Persia; especially Pazisite, in whom he relied most; and Smer∣dis, brother to Pazisite: This did trouble him much, as well for the treason of this Mage, as to remember that he had put his brother wrongfully to death: but being readie to march against the rebels, going to horsebacke, his sword slipt out, and run in his thigh, in the same place where he had stroke Apis, wherewith the boane being perished, it grew to a gangrene, whereof he died neere to Ecbatane, according to the oracle which had beene giuen him; hauing beene monarch of the Persians seuen yeres, and fiue moneths, leauing no children that could succeed him, for the women are not admitted to the succession in Persia. [ F]

¶ The raigne of Smerdis the Mage.

[ VII] NO man did beleeue that Cambises had caused his brother to be slaine, although be∣fore his death he had declared it, for they had a conceit that he spake it, to the end

[ A] 〈…〉〈…〉 should take reuenge for that he had vsurped the crowne, and withall, Prex∣•••••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 had slaine him ••urst•• or confesse it: so as all the noblemen by a generall 〈…〉〈…〉 Smerdis for king, beleeuing him to be the sonne of Cyrus. The Mage being 〈…〉〈…〉 vnto the Empire, to settle himselfe there, and to winne the hearts of all men, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 throughout all the prouinces an abatement of the taxes and impositions which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to beleuied among the people, whereby he purchased their loues, so as all 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••iects were a•• his commaundement, except the Persians: for Smerdis, assuring him∣•••••• if he came forth in view he should be knowne, neuer shewed himselfe in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 as they began to suspect that this was the Mage; to be fully satisfied whereof 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••cceeded after this manner: Otan sonne to Pharnaspes one of the greatest lords of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 came vnto a daughter of his called Phedyna, who had attended vpon Cambises, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 did then serue the Mage as his concubine: Otan demaunded of her with whom she 〈◊〉〈◊〉, but she could not resolue him, for that she had neuer seene Smerdis the sonne of, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 afterwards she sent him word that none of his women did speake together in her∣••••••panie, for the king had seperated them one from another; this did the more con-•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Persians opinion that it was the Mage, and to make it more manifest, he willed daughter to feele if he had any eares, for that he knew the Mage Smerdis had his cut. ••y the commaundement of Cyrus: the daughter hauing obeied, and finding the king 〈◊〉〈◊〉 without eares, aduertised her father, who discouered the whole businesse to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and Gobria the chiefe among the Persians: these three woone three others vnto 〈◊〉〈◊〉, which were Intaphernes, Megabyses, and Hidarnes, Darius being come from his go∣••••ent of Susa, was also associated in this conspiracie, saying that he was certaine 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Smerdis the sonne of Cambises was dead; so as these seuen noblemen managed their 〈◊〉〈◊〉 rises so happily, as the Mages were cut in peeces, and Prexaspes the murtherer of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the sonne of Cyrus, cast himselfe headlong from the top of the royall pallace, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 first declared the truth, and incensed all the world against the Mages, who raigned 〈◊〉〈◊〉 eight moneths: so as the race of Cyrus continued not long among the Persians, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 third heire did not enioie his conquests.

[ A] ¶ Darius sonne to Histaspes, the fourth Monarch of the Persians.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 the death of the Mages they were forced to go to an election, and for that the [ VIII] ••••••en noblemen abouenamed were equall in greatnesse, they resolued at the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 go all forth into the field, and that his horse which should first neigh should giue 〈◊〉〈◊〉 owne vnto his maister: the which happening to Darius by the pollicie of the mai∣•••••• his horse, he was held worthie to command the Monarchie of the Persians. He ••oone to Histaspes one of the greatest of Persia whom Cyrus would haue put to death 〈◊〉〈◊〉 dreampt that he had taken the crowne away for his children. Hauing the reputa∣•••••• be one of the most valiant men of the realm, all the people of Asia did yeeld him [] ••••arie obedience, except the Arabians, who althought they had bin subdued by Cy∣•••••• Cambyses, yet could they neuer draw them to be tributaries. This Darius maried the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 daughters of Cyrus, as wel to honour his house, as to make the Persians more affected 〈◊〉〈◊〉 then hauing pacified all matters in his Empire in the fourth yere of his raigne; he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••aue to the Iewes to reedifie the temple, & to build the walls of Ierusalem, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 them with gold, siluer, mettalls, and victualls, commaunding them to pray vnto 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his health, & for the establishment of his crowne. This prince is called Assuerus 〈◊〉〈◊〉 holie scripture, and for him is written the Historie of Hester or Hadassa, by whose 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Iewes were preserued from the conspiracie of Hamon, and aduanced to honor 〈◊〉〈◊〉 princes house. The first order which this prince did set down throughout his whole [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉, was to diuide it into 19 gouernments or prouinces, which he called Satrapies, on 〈◊〉〈◊〉 he imposed taxes and imposts for the entertainment of his house, and charges of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 war: and he appointed a gouernor ouer euery Satrapie, which made the Persians to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it ana••ice, and not forefight, saying, That Cyrus had been a father to the people, ••••••ses a lord and tyrant, & that Darius was a merchant. Matters being thus ordered, he

wont to make war against the Babylonians who had reuolted, being resolued to endure [ A] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 rather than to yeeld, but Zopirus the some of Megabyses one of the seuen p••inces which had slaine the Mage••, hauing caused his nose and eares to be slit, and his ha••re to be ignominiously out, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and yeelded himselfe to the Babylonians, faining that Darius had done him that indignitie, who not being ignorant of the qualitie and greatnesse of 〈…〉〈…〉 did easily belee••ve what he said: and hauing brought him into their citie, 〈…〉〈…〉, where in the beginning he did wonders against 〈…〉〈…〉 of the inhabitants, who by this are admiring his valour, did so 〈…〉〈…〉, as they deliuered the keyes of the citie into his hands. Zoprius 〈…〉〈…〉 he desired, wrought so as he brought in his prince, who hauing punished the [ B] 〈…〉〈…〉 for their reuolt, he gaue the citie with the dependances to Zopi∣••••••, and would that for his sake it should be free from all subsidies. This warre being 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ended, Darius meaning to take reuenge as well of the death of Cyrus, as of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the Persians by the Scythians, resolued to make warre against this nation; but 〈◊〉〈◊〉 not the way which Cyrus had done towards the East, but by the Hellespont, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 passing into Thrace by a bridge, he ioined the Bosphorus and strait of Bizantium 〈◊〉〈◊〉 called Constantinople, and entring into Europe, he marched towards the Mus∣••••uites and other Scythians, keeping along the Euxine Sea, and the riuers of Bory∣••••••e••es and Dunowe: but seeing that the Scythians did but vex his armie, and would neuer come vnto a generall combate; and had slaine many of his men by diuers sur∣prises; [ C] ••earing also least they should breake the bridges which were on the riuer of Da∣now, and stop him from returning home, he gaue ouer his enterprise, hauing lost foure score and ten thousand 〈◊〉〈◊〉, the which seemed nothing, for they held that there were nor lesse in this armie than seuen hundred thousand fighting men: at this time he subdu∣ed Macedonie, Thrace, and other prouinces, vnder the conduct of Megabises the sonne of Zopirus, who was head of a part of his forces, inuading these prouinces, chiefely, for that Amintas king of Macedonie had put to death the Embassadours which he had sent vnto him; and at the same time he sent Amasis against the Africans, for that they had surprised certaine of his ships, and slaine Arcesilaus the Generall, who was king of Cyrenea a countrie which is neere vnto Aegypt, but his death was reuenged by this [ D] Amasis in the taking of this towne of Barce, the which is in the West of Africke. Soone after Otan (whom Darius had left Gouernour of Thrace) tooke the townes of B••••ntium and Chalcedon, with the Islands of Lesbos, Andros, and Imbros: and for that the Ionians were reuolted against Darius, being persuaded by Aristagoras their lord, who had beene moued thereunto by Histices the Milesien; he caused his forces to march against them, and then the Athenians making themselues a partie went to be∣siege the citie of Sardis in Lydia, the which they tooke and burnt. This bred a long and cruell warre betwixt them, for Darius hauing sent Artaphernes against them, he came to battaile with the Grecians, Ionians, and Milesiens, vanquished them, and tooke the citie of Miletum, and many others of Asia, which he made tributaries; and in like [ E] maner, most of the Islands were subdued by Mardonius Generall of his armie at sea, who vanquished Macedonia agine; and although he had lost 20000 men in a great tempest at sea, yet he entred Thrace, beat the Thracians, tooke their towns, & made them subiect 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Persian Empire; so as Darius was at that time the mightiest prince of all them that had swaied the Monarchie before him.

Darius did at that time restore the soueraigne priesthood among the Iewes, doing them all the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 he could, in regard of his wife Heste••: and as the Cariens a people of the ••esser Asia, neere to Cilicia, now called Caramania, would haue interrupted the course of his prospe••••ties, he armed against them, and vanquished them, as he did the Eretriens: but in requital, the Athenians more fauored by heauen than assisted by their forces, vnder [ F] conduct of their captain Mil••iades defeated his armie in the fields of Marathon, M••rdonius 〈◊〉〈◊〉 General of the Persian troups: this made Darius resolue to raise so great an armie, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ould be able to ruine all Greece, in the preparation whereof he spent three yeares: 〈…〉〈…〉 to march, he had intelligence of the reuolt of Aegypt; yet hauing

[ A] a greater desire to be reuenged of the affront which he had receiued, he held on his way against the Grecians, onely death stayed the course of his dessignes, for falling sicke in his journey, he died in the 36 yeare of his raigne, of the World 3498, & in the 73 Olympiad.

¶ Xerxes, fift Monarch of the Persians.

DArius hauing ended his dayes, he left a great contention among his children for the [ IX] succession of the realme: for Ariamenes, or (according vnto others) Artabazanes, be∣•••••• the eldest of all his sonnes, said, That according vnto the custome of the Persians, which giues the right to the elder to be presumptiue heire, the crowne did belong ••nto him; he was sonne to Gabrias daughter. On the other side, Xerxes (the sonne of ••••ssa, the daughter of Cyrus) although he were the youngest of them all, said, That the ••••••ers were not sonnes to the king, but of a priuat man: the controuersie was decided by 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sentence of the Estates of the countrie; That all the rest were sonnes to Darius, but ••••••xes was borne the sonne of a king: this right of eldership hath alwaies beene prefer∣••••d in the royall races of the kings of Persia; onely Cosroe was preferred before his bro∣••••••r Cabada, being the elder, for that he was deformed.

As soone as Xerxes was in quiet possession of the realme, he went against the Aegypt∣••••, whom hauing subdued, he entreated them with more rigour than Darius had done, [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 gaue them for Gouernour Achmenes, his brother by the father, who was afterwards 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by Inares the African, and king of Lybia. Aegypt being pacified, he continued his ••••hers dessigne against Greece, hauing beene foure yeares to make his preparation, be∣••••••s that which Darius had done, so as he exceeded the forces of all the kings that had ••••ene before him, his armie amounting to the number of a million of men; and the place 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Randezuous was in the towne of Sardis. But as he persuaded himselfe not onely 〈◊〉〈◊〉 subdue men, but also to stay the violent waues of the Sea, causing Helespont to be ••••••ipt, for that it gaue not a free passage to his armie; he saw himselfe defeated by a hand∣•••••• of men, first at Salamina, by the Athenians, vnder the conduct of Themistocles, and ••••wards at Platea, vnder that of Aristides, so as he did nothing of note in this expedi∣•••••• [ D] but spoyle the countrie where he past, make a bridge vpon the Sea, and burne the cl∣•••••• of Athens. Afterwards, hauing gathered together as great forces as the former, with 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of six hundred saile, or three hundred and fiftie, as others write, vnder the conduct 〈◊〉〈◊〉 thraustes, and a mightie armie at land, vnder that of Phearandates, both the one and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 other armie were defeated neere to the riuer of Eurymedon, by the valour and good ••••••rnement of Cymon the Athenien. This did so abate the pride and presumption of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, as he was forced to retire home into his countrie, and to make that mo••able ••rea∣•••••• peace with the Grecians, by the which he did promise & sweare, That from thence∣•••••• his armie should not approach neere vnto Greece, than the carrere of a horse; and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his galleys, and ships of warre, should not saile beyond the Islands of Chelidonia, and [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Soone after he was slaine, being a sleepe, by Artabanus, contemning him by ••ea∣•••••• of his misfortunes, hauing a certaine hope to make himselfe king; but he fel•• into the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hich he had prepared. Thus died Xerxes, who had made all the nations of the earth ••••••emble by his powerfull armies, the which wrought no effects worthie of so great pro∣••••••ions, hauing raigned one and twentie yeares.

••••••t••banus, hauing thus treacherously murthered this prince, addresseth himselfe to [ X] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••oungest of the kings sonnes called Artaxerxes, telling him that Darius, his eldest 〈◊〉〈◊〉, had slaine the king his father, entreating him to joyne with him, before that Da∣•••••• should get possession of the realme, and preuent him in reuenging so cruell a mur∣••••. The which Artaxerxes vnderstanding, moued with a just disdaine, armes, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 followed, [] he surpriseth his poore brother, who had no such thought, and slew him. ••••••banus hauing dispatched him whom he most of all feared, fortified himselfe, toge∣•••••••• with his children, and entring into the Palace, fell vpon Artaxerxes, whom he woun∣•••••• but not mortally, so as the prince escaping at that time by flight, gathered together 〈◊〉〈◊〉 forces, and, with the greatest speed he could, came against the traytor, whom

he cut in peeces, remayning by this meanes in quiet poss ession of his realme: Artabanus [ A] hauing held the royall throne but seuen moneths onely, which end the last yeare of the Persians.

¶ Artaxerxes, sixt Monarch of the Persians.

[ XI] As soone as Artaxerxes was set in the royaltie, he pursued all them cruellie that had consented, •••• ••••ich had any hand in the conspiracie made against his father Xerxes, changing or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the gouernours of the Satrapies, in whom he did not trust, and orde∣ring his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in such sort, as all the world commended the wisdome of this young 〈…〉〈…〉 v••••o whom Themistocles the Athenian fled, being expelled by the enuie of his 〈…〉〈…〉 citisens, and was honourably entertayned by this great Monarch. In the meane [ B] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Aegyptians seeing (in their opinions) the Persians affaires wel shaken, reuolted, and made a king, chasing away the Gouernors, Iudges, Treasurers, Receiuors, and other ••••••cers that were in Aegypt for the Persian, and they allied themselues to the Athenians, the more to terrifie the king of Persia who sending Acamenes, sonne to Darius, with three hund••ed thousand fighting men, had news sodenly that the Atheniens had defeated his whole armie: He sought to incense the Lacedemonians against the Athenians, but not able to effect it, he sent three hundred thousand men more against the Aegyptians, vn∣der the commaund of two excellent Captaines, Megabizes, and Artabazes, who after ma∣•••• incounters, assaults, and sieges of townes, forced the Aegyptians to renounce the alli∣ance of the Athenians, and in the end agreed with the Athenians, that they should suffer [ C] them to depart quietly out of the prouince, so as they meddled not with the affaires of the king of Persia in Aegypt, and then he died, hauing raigned foure and fortie yeares. He was a good prince, and embraced peace, vsing great courtesie to the Iewes, sending Esdras to Hierusalem for the se••ling of their policie, aduancement of the Temple, and the reuenues appointed for the entertainement and sacrifices thereof.

¶ Xerxes, the second of that name.

ARtaxerxes left at his death two sonnes, the eldest was called Xerxes, the second of that name, who raigned but two moneths. [ D]

¶ Sogdian.

THe othe•• was called Sogdian, who raigned eight moneths, neither of which did any thing worthie of memorie, wherefore they are not commonly put in the ranke of kings, but I haue herein followed E••sebi••••, who hath comprehended them in this number in his Chronicle.

¶ Darius, surnamed the Bastard, the s••uenth, or (according vnto others) the ninth Monarch of Persia.

[ XII] AFter the death of the abouenamed princes, Darius (called the Bastard) came vnto the [ E] •••• empire, vnder whom the Aegyptians freed themselues, and there raigned one ouer them called Sait. The Lacedemonians allied themselues to Darius, and the Medians reuol∣••••••g were subdued by him, and forced to come and acknowledge him for their lord. This king had two sonnes by Parisatides his wife, the eldest called Artaxerxes, and the younger 〈◊〉〈◊〉 this 〈…〉〈…〉, vali•••••• courteous, and welbeloued of all men, whom the king made Sat••pe of Lydia and ••o••••ia, commaunding him to aid the Lacedemonians against their ••nemies: but h•••• insol••n••ie against some noblemen of the bloud (who had not saluted 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••fter •• royall manner, that is to say, with their hands close in their gowne sleeues, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 them to death vpon this occas••on) was the cause that his father, being sicke, sent 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him to come and giue ••n account of this offence, and to be punished according to the [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉t of the Sages, whereunto Cyrus ob••ying, he left Lysa••der the Lacedemonian 〈…〉〈…〉, who, with other Gr••ci••ns, did serue him afterwards against his brother: 〈…〉〈…〉 he was aduertised of his father•• death, yet notwithstanding he was 〈…〉〈…〉, who kept him prisoner; and Darius the Bastard died in the yeare 3562,

the same yeare that Athens was taken and burnt by the Lacedemonians, and Dennis the ••••••tant expelled out of Sicilie, which yeare was held remarkeable for three things: the death of a great king, the deposing of another, and the ruine of the most famous citie of ••••••••ce. And Darius raigned nineteene yeares.

¶ Artaxerxes, the second of that name, the eight Monarch of Persia.

Artaxerxes, the second of that name, succeeded his father, and was surnamed Mnemon: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 he kept his brother Cyrus in prison, and sought his ruine; the young prince who 〈◊〉〈◊〉 [ XIII] no lesse, wrought so, as he forced the prison, and fled into Greece, where he ga∣••••••••ed forces together, and was followed by the Grecians and Ionians, for that he had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 bred vp among them: without doubt if he had not beene vnfortunat in the be∣••••••ing, and that his great courage and valour had not drawne him on so far in the 〈◊〉〈◊〉, he had chased his brother from his seat: for he had the fauour of his mother, was 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the Persians, and beloued of all the world. But being wounded in the head in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 fight, this poore prince died in the floure of his age, hauing reduced his brother to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Estate, as he knew not well what course to take.

This king did loue peace and rest, and hauing pacified the troubles which were raised 〈◊〉〈◊〉 brother, he had no other care but to reconcile the Grecians, the which he effected, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to his predecessors, who sought all meanes to diuide them: whereupon the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sent a great and solemne Embassage vnto them, of the which Pelopidas was 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••s Plutarch reports, being honoured aboue all the rest. This prince hauing raigned▪ 〈◊〉〈◊〉 thirtie yeares died, leauing for heire and successor Darius Artaxerxes.

¶ Darius Artaxerxes surnamed Occhus, the ninth Monarch of the Persians.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 beginning of this Monarches raigne was against the Iewes, who being growne 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••o factions for the high priesthood, there was one among them called Iohn, which ••••••••sus his brother, being high priest, in the temple: but God would not suffer this 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vnpunished; for the people lost their libertie, and the temple was polluted by the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Bagosus who punished the offendor, and imposed the tax of seuen yeares vpon ••••••••wes. Not long after, Occhus taking a certaine towne from them, he banished the in∣••••••••ts, and transported them neere vnto the Caspian sea, Eusebius calls them 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 obserue at this day something of their Iewish religion. Against this Darius 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••uolted one of his chiefe captaines and satrapes called Artabasus, who made head 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••gainst the kings lieutenants, being supported by the forces of the neighbour 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the end he lost his life, and the king recouered the countries of Aegypt, Cy∣••••••••d Phenicia, and tooke the citie of Sydon by treason; causing him to be slaine that ••••••yed it. In the end hauing raigned six and twentie yeares, he was poisoned (with∣〈…〉〈…〉 one excepted) by Bagoas the eunuch, and Arsames hauing escaped this poi∣••••••ned in his fathers place: but his raigne was not long; for in the fourth yeare the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 as poisoned him with all the blood royall, and yet he could not seise vpon the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which fell to Coloman a great nobleman of Persia, who caused himself to be 〈…〉〈…〉 the fourth of that name. This Bagoas thinking to poison him as he had done 〈◊〉〈◊〉 king forced him to drinke the poyson himself, and so he was punished for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••eries.

¶ Darius the fourth of that name, and last Monarch of Persia.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 being thus reuenged of Bagoas came vnto the Empire, where he continued not 〈◊〉〈◊〉, for hauing raigned six yeares, Alexander the Great made war against him, [ XIIII] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him of Empire and life, and ruined the Monarchie of the Persians, in the yeare 〈…〉〈…〉 3635, in the one hundred and twentieth Olympiad, and two hundred twen∣tie

and eight yeares after that Cyrus had taken it from the Medians, the which is no great [ A] thing if we shall looke into that of the Assyrians, who continued so many ages; but it was not so powerfull as that of the Persians.

¶ The realme of Persia returning to her first beautie, when, and how.

[ XV] THe Monarchie of the Persians being thus ouerthrowne remained subiect, and as it were buried in that of the Macedonians, the which continued for the space of two hundred ninetie and three yeres: but yet they commaunded not long in Persia: for after [ B] the death of Alexander the Great, the Macedonian lords making war one against another, who should be soueraigne amongst them, one Arsaces a gentleman of Parthia (others say a Bactrian, for whose sake all the kings of Parthia called themselues Arsacides) making vse of this diuision, fel on Andiagorus the Persian, to whom Alexander gaue the gouern∣ment of Parthia, whom he dispossest of that countrie, and made himselfe soueraigne, re∣fusing to be subiect to any Macedonian prince, the which happened in yeare of the world 3717, the one hundred three & thirtieth Olimpiad. So as the Grecians power de∣caying in the East, the Parthians before vnknowne and without force made themselues Monarchs of the East, the which continued two hundred yeares, vnto the time of Arta∣banus the last king of the Parthians, who was depriued both of Monarchie and life by [ C] Artaxare, or Artaxerxes a Persian borne, but yssued from base parentage, whose begin∣ning is reported after this manner: That his mother was married to one called Pauec, a man of base and vild condition, as being a currier by trade, who notwithstanding being skilfull in diuinations, and foreseeing as it is said by his knowlegde what should befall, it happened on a time that a gentleman called Sanna, passing through the territorie of the Cadusiens, came and lodged at this Pauecs house which was very meane; who seeing by his art that his guest should be the head of a great and noble familie, he was at the first very sorrowfull that he had neither sister, daughter, nor any other woman of his blood in his house to haue the companie of Sanna, and to haue children by him, which might be allied vnto him: in the end seeing there was no other meanes to attaine vnto this hap∣pinesse, [ D] laying a side all other considerations, at length he exposed his wife to lye with him, hoping by this meanes to change his state and fortune. Of this vnlawfull coniuncti∣on came Artaxare, of whom we speake, who was bred vp in his supposed fathers house: but the young man hauing purchased great honours by his valour; both of them con∣tended whose he should be, Pavec saying that he was his sonne, and Sanna that he had be∣got him: but in the end it was concluded that he should be called the sonne of Pauec, and yssued from the seed of Sanna. Such was the beginning of this king (As Agathius writes) who sodenly made himselfe king of all Asia, the which happened in the yeare of our Lord 228, Vrhin the first being then Bishop of Rome, and Alexander the sonne of Ma∣mea holding the Empire, against whom the Persian had war, forcing the Romans to retire, [ E] who had past vnto the Medians countrie; yet there is great likelyhood that he did onely defeat some running Captaine of the Emperours, and that Alexander hauing giuen bat∣taile to the Persian with all his forces, defeated him, for that he alwaies remained in Sy∣ri•• and Mesopotamia, attending the cure of his armie, the Persian not daring to assault him, the which he would haue done, if he had beene victor in the first encounter, the which doth proue sufficiently that the Persians had not the better; and so we may accord Lampridus with Herodian.

This Artaxerxes dyed hauing raigned fifteene yeres, he was very skilful in the know∣ledge and ceremonies of the Mages, and Philosophers among the Persians; so as this kind of people grew to be in greater credit, and more insolent than euer: for they had neuer [ F] ••••••••ined to such an vnrestrained libertie, as when as this man their companion raigned, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 was nothing well done without their authoritie.

[ A] ¶ S••porus, the first of that name, second king of Persia.

S••dporus, first of that name, and second in ranke of this new race of the kings in Persia, [ XVI] who came vnto the crowne, in the yeare of Grace 243, Antherus holding the See at ••••ome, and Gordian the empire, which had great warres against this king, who making his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the discord that was betwixt the Senat, and the two Maximins, seised vpon the ••••••test part of Mesopotamia, and Syria; so as the young Emperour Gordian was forced ••••••arme against him, wherein he was so fortunat, as he vanquished him, taking from him 〈◊〉〈◊〉 townes which he had vsurped of the empire, the which Gordian himselfe declared 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Epistle which he did write vnto the Senat. But Gordian hauing beene slayne by the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Philip, whom they say to bee the first of the empire that made warre against 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Christian faith, Saporus continued his course (for Philip remained not long in the em∣•••••••• being a tyran and persecutor of the name of Christians) and fell vpon Syria, Cilicia, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••apadocia, against whom Valerian going, thinking to terrifie him by his presence, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 woon so glorious a victorie, as hauing defeated the Roman legions, he tooke the ••••••erour Valerian, and led him prisoner into Persia, where he died a miserable seruitude; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which had neuer yet happened to the Roman empire, to see their soueraigne, cap∣•••••• yet Odenat, king of the Palmireniens, holding the empire of the East, opposed him∣•••••••• [ C] against the attempts of Saporus, and comming to battaile, the Persian was vanqui∣•••••• and pursued into Assyria; Odenat tooke the Persians baggage, and his concubines; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 if this Palmirenien had not opposed himselfe against the Persian, the empire of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 had beene ruined. From that time he kept himselfe quiet in his countrie, and ha∣•••••••• raigned one and thirtie yeares, he left this world, and had for successor Ormisdates.

¶ Ormisdates, the third king of Persia.

••••misdates raigned but one yeare; and we doe not read of any remarkable matter that [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 atchiued by him.

¶ Vardanes, the fourth king of Persia.

••••••danes was successour to Ormisdates, but there is no more found by him than by 〈◊〉〈◊〉 other, for the Persians continued for a long time quiet; yet, as Vopiseus saith, they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••assadours and presents to the Roman Emperour.

¶ Vardanes, second of that name, fift king of the Persians.

[ E] ••••rdanes the first, succeeded Vardanes the second, and the fift in ranke of the kings [ XVII] ••••••sia, whom some call Narseus: he had warres against the emperour Probus; but ••••••dea peace, the Persian enioying some of those townes which he had conquered; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Probus did, for that he could not containe his souldiers in their duties, but he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 afterwards slaine, and Vardanes had good opportunitie to conquer in the East, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••borne at Narbonna, with his sonnes Carinus and Numerianus, hauing made him∣〈…〉〈…〉, had not withstood him, who recouered Mesopotamia from Vardanes, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 into Assyria, and had done more if death had not preuented him. Vardanes 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••teene yeares.

[ F] ¶ Vardanes, the third of that name, sixt king of the Persians.

〈◊〉〈◊〉, third of that name, who liued but foure moneths, after whom Narseus 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vnto the crowne.

¶ Narseus, the seuenth king of the Persians. [ A]

THis was a man of great enterprises, who grieuing that the Romans should hold cer∣taine land in Asia, which he thought to be of the auncient patrimonie of the Persi∣ans, meant to haue his reuenge, and therefore he went against Armenia and Mesopota∣mia, which he made to wauer by his armes: but he was repulsed by Galerius Maximian the first time that he came to battaile: but at the second incounter, which was betwixt Carra & Callinicus, going rashly with smal forces to charge a mightie armie, he was cha∣sed and beaten, retiring himselfe towards Dioclesian, by whom he was so ill entertayned, [ B] as they say he followed him farre on foot, being attired in purple, and yet the emperour would not suffer them to stay his chariot to speake with him: this made him sodenly to leuie great forces in Illyria, and Misia, and marching towards the East, he incountred Nar∣seus, Aseub, Dormisde, and Saporus, in Armenia the Lesse, with whom he did fight with most fortunat successe, and with no lesse councell than force and valour, for that he him∣selfe being followed by two or three horsemen, performed the part of a spie, and went to visit the enemies campe, which hauing vanquished, he chased Narseus, tooke his bag∣gage, made spoyle of his treasure, and had for prisoners his wiues, sisters, and children, car∣rying away an infinit number of the nobilitie of Persia, with vnualuable wealth, forcing king Narseus to retire himselfe, flying into the most solitarie defarts of his realme, for [ C] which so great a victorie (returning into Mesopotamia, whereas Dioclesian was with for∣ces to second him) he was louingly receiued, and with the honour that is due to them that triumph, carrying the wiues, sisters, and children of Narseus, into Italie, who were led before his chariot whenas he entred triumphing into Rome. Thus Narseus, who aspi∣red to the empire of all Asia, lost both that which he had conquered, and fiue of his owne prouinces beyond Tygris, the which fell into the Romans power. After this great disaster, the Persians affaires declined much, and Narseus liued not long after, but died the same yeare after his defeat, and the seuenth yeare of his raigne.

¶ Misdates, the eight king of Persia. [ D]

[ XIX] Misdates, his sonne, succeeded him, who was the eight king of Persia, and liued in the time of Constantine the Great, he was (by the commaundement of his father) crowned in his mothers wombe, a thing neuer read of in any other, that the fruit not yet come to light, should carrie the crowne of a realme. He died, hauing raigned seuen yeares, and nine moneths, in the yeare of our Lord God 310, Marcel sitting at Rome, and Maximian Galerins, and Constantine the Great, holding the empire, hauing done no∣thing that was memorable.

¶ Sapor••s the second, and the ninth king of Persia. [ E]

SAporus, the sonne of Misdates, being come to age fit to commaund, he recouered all that which his predecessours had lost beyond the riuer of Tygris, in Assyria, and Meso∣potamia, and in the yeare of our Redemption 336, whenas the Christians began to ap∣peare in his countrie, being solicited by the Mages and sacrificing priests, of whose will all that familie of Artaxexes depended much, being come from a man of the same vocati∣on, he began to persecute the Christian faith furiously, putting to death the holie Bi∣shop Symeon, with one hundred good and faithfull men in one day, and his owne gouer∣nour: He began first by exactions and subsidies, and in the end by banishments, and pu∣nishments, vntill that Constantin the Great entreated him by his letters not to vse the [ F] friends of the Emperour of Rome after that 〈◊〉〈◊〉. After the death of Constantin, Sa∣•••••••••• began to persecute the Christians more than before, as you may read in the Ecclesi∣•••••••• Historie; so as the pooresolitarie people which liued in the woods and desarts of A••y•••••• ••nd Mesopotamia, felt the furie of this tyran, who made himselfe Lord of the

[ A] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 countries, and therefore the war was reuiued betwixt him, and the children •••• Constantin, in the which the Romans got nothing but blowes, as Eutropius the Roman 〈◊〉〈◊〉 writes, saying, Constance was very vnfortunat, for he suffered great afflctions by 〈◊〉〈◊〉, who tooke diuers townes from him, and besieged others; they cut many 〈…〉〈…〉 armies in peeces: and finally, he neuer had any battaile against Saporus, wherein 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Barbarian had not the victorie, vnlesse it were neere vnto the citie of Syngare, where 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the better, the furious rage of the souldiers depriuing him of that felicitie, but 〈◊〉〈◊〉 abate the pride of his aduersarie at that time. Pomponius Letus writes more 〈◊〉〈◊〉, saying, Constance did neuer any thing in the East that succeeded happily; for that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 enemie had alwaies the better: in the eleuenth yeare of his raigne he had the victorie, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it was lost againe by the rashnesse of his souldiers neere to Syngare: so Constance ha∣•••••• beene eight times vanquished, in this battaile the victory being for him, it remained 〈◊〉〈◊〉 enemie, not without great losse; for that Syngare was lost with Bizabde and 〈◊〉〈◊〉. After this battaile, Saporus fel vpon the Armenians, and went to besiege the citie 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••isibis, but the Massagetes assailed him, and he went to encounter them, yet did not 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the siege; and in the meane time Constance sent vnto him for a peace, the which he 〈◊〉〈◊〉. After this Saporus made war against the Armenians, but he found that fortune 〈◊〉〈◊〉 alwaies follow him, for Arsates vanquished him, and made him retire into Per∣•••••••• this Armenian war was of no great charge; yet it caused great ruine to the Ro∣•••••••• ••••pire: for Iulian the Apostat thinking to speed better against Saporus than his ••••••••cessor, went thither with his forces; but he was slaine there, and his armie put to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for that he fought against him that had God for his protector, although an Infidel: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vsed him to punish this Apostat, the most disloyall and wicked man vpon the earth, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 was slaine the second yeare of his Empire, and of Grace 267, and in the eight and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 care of the raigne of Saporus king of Persia. The death of this Emperor, and the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the Romans did not puffe vp Saporus, hauing considered the infinit number of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and the multitude of elephants which had beene slaine, a thing which had neuer 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and seeing the Romans also readie to renew the war, hauing so valiant a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••nder as Iouinian, he staied and yeelded to a peace; the which although it were 〈◊〉〈◊〉 beneficiall to the Romans, yet was it necessarie, considering the losse they had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from the Persian; and that hauing Sapor••s in Front, and others reuolting, it had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••sie to shake the greatnesse of the Empire: yet Amianus doth much condemne 〈◊〉〈◊〉, as proceeding from a saint and effeminat heart, and accusing Iouinian as a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and of no resolution: but we must pardon him, for that he transports himselfe 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ctions, and doth hardly commend any one but his Iulian the Apostat, whom he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••owed to the wars.

¶ Artaxerxes, the tenth king of Persia.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 being seuentie yeares old, and hauing raigned as much as he had liued, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 [ XX] yeare of Grace 379, leauing his sonne Artaxerxes heire and successor to the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 but not of his good fortune: for Saporus hauing had many wiues, had by the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 thie three sonnes, Ormisda, Adarnasse, and Narses: and by another which was 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••rentage, yet excellent in beautie, he had Artaxerxes. As for Ormisda he held 〈◊〉〈◊〉 partie, which transferred the right of eldership to Adarnasse, who ought to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••ed to the crowne: but his father finding his disposition to be too cruell, he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 yeeld to make him his successor. For as the Mesopotamians had presented 〈…〉〈…〉 of cammells skins, inricht with gold and other imbroiderie, he gaue it to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••••misse, asking him if this present were not very pleasing; whereunto he an∣•••••••• if he were king he should take more delight to see a pauillion made of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉; so as this aunswere (with many cruell actions of this prince) made him to 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••ccession; for his father hauing assembled the councell, it was concluded by a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 consent that Artaxerxes should commaund and succeed after his father, but 〈◊〉〈◊〉 no more happie in him, for his father being dead he presently put his brother

Adarnasse to death; he put out the eyes of Narses, and committed Ormisda to prison, be∣ginning [ A] his raigne with infinit cruelties and tyrannies; so as it is not strange, if he carried himselfe so rigorously with the Christians, seeing he spared not his owne blood. Ormis∣•••• being a prisoner, his mother wife and sister went to see him, with the kings permission, who gaue him a file, with the which he brake his fetters and fled, retiring himselfe to the Emperor Constantin the Great to whom he did worthie seruices.

Artaxerxes then inioyed the peace which his father had sworne with the Romans, and held the prouinces which he had left him, hauing no war with any man, and hauing raig∣ned eleuen yeres, he died, leauing Saporus his sonne for his successor.

¶ Saporus, the second of that name, the eleuenth king of Persia. [ B]

SAporus, the second of that name, sonne to Artaxerxes, raigned fiue yeares, but he did not anything worthie of memorie.

¶ Varanes, the twelfth king of Persia.

VAranes succeeded Saporus: he kept the peace with the Romans faithfully, seeing the good fortune which did accompanie them: he held the realme of Persia after that Theodosius the Great came vnto the Empire, and vnder the raigne of his sonnes Honorius [ C] and Arcadius: hauing gouerned ten yeres he died.

¶ Isdigertes, the thirteenth king of Persia.

[ XIX] ISdigertes came vnto the crowne in the yeare of Grace 406, Innocent the first holding the See at Rome: this was he in whom Arcadius had such confidence, as he made him tutor to his young sonne Theodosius as well to bridle them that were mutinous, as to keepe his sonne from troubles in the East: and whenas they brought him this will made by Arcadius, he receiued it with great ioy maintaining the peace with the Romans which his father and grandfather had sworne with great equitie and fidelitie: and moreuer he [ D] sent a gouernor for the young prince, called Antiochus, an excellent man, wise, vertuous, and worthie of such a charge, whom he made protector of the Empire, and defendor of his pupiles rights; the which he sent to the Sena•• in this mannner, as Paulus Diaconus re∣ports: Arcadius being dead, and hauing chosen me tutor to his sonne, I send a man fit to bold my place: let no man then presume to attempt against the infant, least an intollerable war be the ru∣ine of the Romans And to the end there should be no doubt of his intentions, he renewed the league betwixt the Persians and Grecians, and Antiochus did write often to Isdi∣gertes, for the good and support of the Christians; so as the Christian faith was much propagated in Persia, wherein good Marunthe Bishop of Mesopotamia laboured much: for before the king did persecute them cruelly, being thrust on rather by the Mages, and [ E] sacrificing priests of their gods, than by his owne natural instinct and malice. It was in this persecution that Auda a Bishop of a holie life did indiscreetly beat downe the temple of fire worshipped by the Persians, and the king commaunding him to reedifie it, he chose rather to die, than to do it: wherein he was more to be commended than in pulling i•• downe, for that in seeking to do well he had beene the cause of so much ill: yet, as hath beene said, this persecution ceased during the raigne of this king, who would not onely satisfie the Emperour, but also the good Bishop Marunthes: for that as Paulus Diaconus writes, he had cured ••••r••nes the kings sonne, being possest with a deuill. But Socrates in his ecclesiasticall historie reports, that the reason was, for that Isdigertes being subiect to a great paine in his head, which the Mages could not cure, Marunthes with the signe of a [ F] crosse onely eased him, and he was neuer more troubled with it, for which cause the king gaue libertie to this good Bishop to build as many churches as he pleased in his Estates: 〈…〉〈…〉 it is likely he had become a Christian, if the Mages who had great power in the countrie, had not opposed themselues. He died in the yere of Grace 427, hauing raigned

〈…〉〈…〉 twentie yeares, leauing his sonne Var••nes heire of the crowne.

¶ 〈◊〉〈◊〉, the second if that name, the fourteenth king of Persia.

〈◊〉〈◊〉, the second of that name, being come to the crowne of Persia, shewed him 〈◊〉〈◊〉 as seuerie a persecuter of the Christians as his father had beene fauourable. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 whose decease, he proclaimed warre against the Emperour Theodosius the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 surnamed the Young; with whom joyning i•• battaile, he•• was vanquished, and had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him with more violence, but that he had a care of the Christians which were in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 fearing least the tyran should persecute them more? He had begun his persecuti∣•••• the princes and noblemen which had receiued the faith, whom he dispossest of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 estates, and reduced them to such extremitie, as they were forced to keepe camels, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 exercise some base trade; then seeing them so constant in the faith, he put them to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••••ellest death, that the Mages (who were his ordinarie Councellors) could in••ent? 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his last defeat which he receiued by Theodosias, made the persecution to cease: for the ••••••etor hauing more regard to the good of the Christians, than to his owne aduantage, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Helyon Patricius, and Antolius (Pretor of the East) into Persia, to demand a peace of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, who accepted of the condition, promising to performe the Emperours will, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 that time the persecution ceased. He raigned twentie yeares, and died in the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of our Redemption 447, Leo the first being Bishop of Rome; and then Theodo∣••••••ade warre against the Vandales.

¶ Varanes, the third of that name, the fifteenth king of Persia.

••••ranes, the third of that name, being prest with the same necessitie that had made 〈◊〉〈◊〉 father to account of a peace, contayned himselfe in quiet, and alwayes conti∣•••• ••he peace which his father had obtayned: He died, hauing raigned seuenteene 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and foure moneths.

¶ Peros••s, the sixteenth king of Persia.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 succeeded in the realme, he was a great warrier, hardie, and of a great courage, [ XXII] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 more through rashnesse than any good counsell, perished in an enterprise against 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••alites, not so much by his enemies force, as by his owne indiscretion and follie: ••••••••reas he should haue stood vpon his guard, marching through his enemies coun∣•••••• presumption was such, relying vpon his owne forces, as they had meanes to 〈◊〉〈◊〉, when he least expected them, perishing thus with his whole armie, hauing won 〈◊〉〈◊〉 nor reputation; thus much Agathias writes: but Procopius calls these Nepta∣••••••alites, and saith thus: Perosus king of Persia fell into controuersie for the limits 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••untrie with the Huns Euthalites, whom they call Albes, against whom he went ••••••ghtie armie.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••Euthalites are of the race of the Huns, and yet they are no neighbours vnto 〈◊〉〈◊〉 joyne vnto the Persians towards the North: their chiefe citie is called Gonza, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 frontiers of Persia: they haue often contended with their neighbours for the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the countrie, and they are not Nomades (that is to say, shepheards) like vnto 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the Huns; neither did they euer enter into the territorie of the Romans to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 against them, vnlesse it were in the companie of the Persians. They are (saith 〈◊〉〈◊〉 faire complexion, neat, and haue no furious aspect, like vnto the rest, neither do 〈◊〉〈◊〉 their brutishnesse, hauing some policie among them: for the Euthalites obey 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and sole monarch, and they liue ciuilely and politiquely, vsing reason and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 their neighbours, like vnto all ciuile nations. They are esteemed most happie, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, that haue twentie friends or more, with whom they doe vsually eat, hauing 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and seigneurie common together, and they haue a custome, when any one 〈◊〉〈◊〉 dies, to carrie him to the ground. Then he adds, that Perosus seeing himselfe

coopt vp in such sort, as it was impossible to ••scape, the king of the Euthalites sent him [ A] word, that there was no other meanes to free himselfe from the danger, but to come and doe him homage, and to sweare 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to the custome of his countrie) that the Persi∣ans should neuer make warre against the Euthalites. Perosus hauing asked councell of his Mages, they answered him, That as for the oath he might doe at his discretion, but touch∣ing the adoration, reuerence, and homage, which the king of the Euthalites demaunded, that it was impossible, for that the Persians might not worship any other thing than the Sun. But they gaue him this councell; that in the morning; at the breake of day, he should go vnto the Euthalite, and that turning, towards the Sun rising, ••e should do him reu••••ence, and worship the Sun; by which meanes, he should escape the danger, preserue [ B] ••his honour, and in no sort violat the customes of Persia.

Thus Perosus escaped a•• that time, but he was as disloyal in the keeping of his promise, as he had beene inconsiderat and rashy in his carriage: for he was no sooner returned in∣to his countrie, but he gathered an armie together to march against the Euthalites, ha∣uing left Cavades his sonne to gouerne in his absence: It was at this time that he was slayne, with his other sonnes, all his nobilitie, and the most valiant men among the Per∣sians, hauing raigned twentie yeares, in the yeare of Grace 484, Simplicius being Bi∣shop at Rome, and Leo holding the empire of the Grecians, carrying also the title of Emperour of Rome.

¶ Valent, the seventeenth king of Persia. [ C]

[ XXIII] THis man was brother to the deceased king, who gouerned the realme after the death of his brother, for that Cavades was verie yong, but he was but the shadow of a king, and did nothing worthie of memorie: for to speake the truth, the Euthalites gouerned rather than he, to whom he made himselfe tributarie, by reason of his quiet disposition, and nothing fit to mannage affaires so confused as the Persians: but this continued not long, for he died, hauing raigned foure yeares, and payed two yeares tribute.

¶ Cauades, the eighteenth king of Persia. [ D]

VAlent being dead, Cauades, sonne to Perosus, came vnto the crowne: at his entrance he found the Persians much tyrannized by the Euthalites, but as he was a warlike prince, and could not liue in quiet, no though he had peace with all men; he presently tooke armes against his enemies, beginning with the Euthalites, and vanquished them, shaking off the yoke of their commaund: He also made warre against the Romans, and other people his neighbours, of whom he woon many victories. He was naturally cruel, and so cholericke, as it was impossible to pacifie him being moued: he was of such a troublesome disposition, as he could not settle himselfe, but cause some disorders either with others, or with his subiects, and in his owne Estates: so as he tooke delight to change [ E] the auncient lawes and ordinances of the Persians, and to make new: whereof one was vnworthie of a great king, and had in a manner ruined his Estate, by the which he would that all women should be common: for all the Estates of his countrie found it so vnfit∣ting, and against reason, as both nobilitie and people reuolted generally against him, took him, and put him in prison, hauing raigned eleuen yeares.

¶ Blase, or Lamase, nineteenth king of Persia.

[ XXIIII] CAuades, being a prisoner, and hauing no heires male to hold his place, the Persians as∣sembled together for the election of a king, and did chuse Blase, brother to the decea∣sed [ F] king Perosus; for (according to their custome) it was not lawfull to make any regent of the realme, vnlesse he were of the bloud royall. Being chosen king, he presently pro∣pounded, in Councell, what should be done with Cauades: the people would by no meanes he should be put to death, although they were of diuers opinions and councell:

[ A] For Gusanescades who was Chanarange, that is to say, Gouernor of the countrie, see∣ing the Councell so irresolute, drew forth a little knife a finger long, and proportiona∣bly bigge, the which the Persians doe vsually carrie to pare their nailes, and shewing it to the rest, he spake vnto them, saying, this little knife is sufficient to doe that which twentie thousand men could not afterwards effect, declaring thereby the mischiefes that Cauades would doe if he once escaped out of their hands; but all his persuasions could not winne the Persians to put their king to death: yet they consented that this prince who was cruell and vndiscreete should be kept in perpetuall prison, and Blase, Lamase, or Zambase (for they giue him all these names) began then to raigne, a iust man, courteous, and very affable, vnder whom the Persians did hope to liue happily: but Caua∣des [ B] made them to change their opinion, by the meanes of a friend of his called Seoses, who dwelt neere the prison.

This man deuising day and night by what meanes he might free his prince, sought all opportunities to speake vnto them; and for that Cauades wife was suffered to visit him, and to supplie him with all things that were necessarie: Seoses let him vnderstand by her that if he could find meanes to get forth, he had horses, and all other things readie to conduct him where he would, appointing him a place where all things should be in readinesse. This was sodenly put in execution; for the lady being in the prison, disroa∣bed herselfe, and tooke her husbands, and he being attired like vnto a woman went [ C] easily forth, and with Seoses and the troupes the which he had gathered together, fled vnto the king of the Euthalites, who gaue him his daughter in marriage. Others say that he went to the Emperour Anastasius: but there is small probabilitie that this Christian Emperour would giue his daughter to this Infidell who had many wiues: being more likely, as some others say, that it was the daughter of the king of the Euthalites, whom he married then; for that the Persians had put her to death that preferred her husbands libertie before her owne content, and had put her life in hazard to draw him out of fernitude. Wherein the Persians did shew their splene against this prince, seeing they did not pardon conjugall loue, which they should rather haue reue••enced, than reuenged in this princesse.

[ D] Cauades then with the forces of the king of the Euthalites marched against the Persi∣ans, who comming against him, he put them sodenly to flight, and then went into the countrie and satrapie of this Gusanascades, who had giuen councell to put him to death, disappointing him of his charge of Charanange or Gouernour, and puitting in his place Adergunibade: then comming to the royall pallace he seised thereon without any great difficultie, putting Blase and Gusanascades to death: after which he made his great friend Scoses who had freed him from prison, Adrastadaram Selane which was an officer hauing the commaund ouer all his forces, like in a manner to the Constable in France. This Soe∣ses was the first and last which euer had any such office conferred vpon him in Persia.

[ E] ¶ Cauades escaping out of prison, recouered his realme of Persia.

CAuades hauing thus recouered his realme, and growen wise by the frowns of fortune, he gouerned afterwards more modestly than he had done before. He ought great summes of mony to the kings of the Euthalites, which made him send to the Emperour Anastasius to borrow; but being refused, it serued him for a pretext to make warre against him: so as the Persians fell vpon Armenia, and committed an infinit number of spoiles, taking the citie of Amida, and meaning to passe further, they were stayed by the Euthalites who made warre aginst them. This was the cause that Amida was recouered by the Romans, who as Procopius writes, corrupted the Gouernour which [ F] Cau••des had left in the citie. In the meane time Cauades seeing himselfe old, and fearing ••ome change in the State of Persia after his death, he resolued to dispose of his suc∣cessour: and hauing three sonnes, he sought to giue the realme to the youngest which was called Cosroè, for that the eldest whose name was Cauades was not pleasing vnto ••im; and the second, who was called Bazè, hauing but one eye might not come vnto

the crowne, for that the lawe of Persia excluded all them that were lame or wanted any [ A] member: but the third was more acceptable vnto him, and the rather, for that he had him by his owne sister which was called Abenedes; and this in the end he obtained by his practises. From that time he began to persecut the Christians, causing the hamstrings of some to be cut, who notwithstanding were able to walke: but besieging a certaine Castle of the Indians, which was called Azubdabar, and not able to force it, in the end he tooke it by the prayers of the Christians, in the which he found an inestimable trea∣sure. For this cause he did not onely forbeare to be cruell vnto them, but did also suffer any one that would to be baptised, causing all persecutions to cease. He had warre against the Emperour Iustine, the which continued not long, for there was a peace pre∣sently [ B] made, and Cauades put to death all the Manicheens he could find in his realme, for that they had sought to make his sonne king, he being yet healthfull, and full of life, he hauing raigned after his deliuerie out of prison thirtie yeares, and eleuen before, he left it peaceably to Cosroè, for that the eldest of his sonnes had beene slaine with the Manicheens, hauing conspired against his father. Cauades died in the yeare of Grace fiue hundred thirtie and two, Boniface the second sitting at Rome, and Iustinian holding the Empire.

¶ Cofroè, the twentieth king of Persia.

[ XXV] COsroè came to the Monarchie of the Persians after his father, of whose prayses Aga∣thius [ C] speakes in this sort. This king saith he, was not onely praysed, and admired of the Persians, who extoll him beyond reason, but also many among the Romans make him studious, and a friend to learning, and that he attained to the perfect knowledge of our Philosophie, turning many Greeke bookes into the Persian tongue; and there are some which make him so good a Platonist, as Thimeus did not exceed him: but Agathi∣us hauing propounded this, saith freely, that this was impossible in a barbarous man being borne and bred vp among courtiers that were soft, effeminat, ignorant, and flatterers; so as learned men could not haue leisure so to instruct this prince. But the reason of this opinion was the multitude of learned men that did frequent this court, euery man [ D] wondering that a great king, powerfull, and very barbarous, should so loue the sciences, and esteeme them that made profession thereof: yet Agathius commends him aboue Cyrus and Xerxes.

As for actions of warre, hauing had some quarrell against the Emperour Iustinian, who had surmounted the Gothes, the most fierce, proud, and powerfull nation of the earth; and made head against the Vandals, and other people comming out of the North, with whom notwithstanding he was forced to make a peace for a hundred and ten yeres, the which was called the peace without end. But Cosroè could not keepe it, for within three yeares he brake it, and inuaded Calicia and Syria, taking the great citie of Antioch: but Belisarius going against him, made him retire, and vanquished him, as he had done in [ E] the first war.

After this defeat he retired into Persia: but he continued not long before he came into the territories of the Empire, as one that aspired to more than the Persian Dia∣dem, and he fell vpon Comagena, sometimes called Eufratisia: but Belisarius disappoin∣ted his desseignes, and defeated him. This warre was very long, for it continued foure and thirtie yeares, during the time of the Emperours Iustinian, and Iustine, vntill that Martin, cousin to the Emperour Iustine, came against the Barbarians, and gaue them bat∣taile in a place which was called Sagarthe, where he vanquished them. This yeare Cosroè dyed, hauing raigned two and fortie yeres, hauing alwaies beene in action against the Romans. Agathius saieth that he died of griefe in the royall citie of Seleucia, for [ F] that Maurice who being Generall of the Emperour Iustins armie in the East, had by chance made an incursion vpon the confines of the Arpians, who were neighbours to a village whereas Cosroè was at the same time remaining, and passing the riuer of Z••r∣ma, put all to fire and sword: which he (who had not beene accustomed to be so braued

[ A] in his presence) tooke so g••ieuously, as they were forced to carrie him from ••henc•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••e∣leucia, where he died. This happened in the yeare of our Lord, 74, Iohn the third b••ing Bishop of Rome, Iustine the Young holding the empire, and Clothaire, of the bloud of Clouis, raigning in France.

¶ Hormisda, the one and twentieth king of Persia.

HOrmisda, the sonne of Cosroè, being come vnto the crowne after his fathers death, ho∣ping [ XXVI] to speed better against the Romans, he inuaded the lands of the empire, sen∣ding [ B] Armiardanes his Generall, who hauing made some incursions, returned to his house rich in spoyles, carrying with him an infinit number of prisoners; but he was r••pulst the second time that he came to field, for Tyberius being come vnto the empire after Iustine the Young, he sent his embassadours to Hormisda to offer him peace. But the Persian growne proud by his happie successe, would not heare of any composition: the which did much incense Tyberius, and was the cause that he leuied a mightie armie, with many fly∣ing campes to assaile the Persian of all sides. Hormisda was gone in the mean time to ••poyle Armenia, where, in the end, the two armies mee••ing, there was a bloudie battaile, but at last the Babylonians turning their backs, they were the cause that the Persian was wholly defeated, where he lost his pauillion, baggage, elephants, and whatsoeuer was rich. And [ C] in regard of the confusion which was in this battaile, Hormisda made a law, by the which the kings of Persia were forbidden to hazard their persons in any fight, least they should miscarrie. After this defeat, Hormisda armed againe, but Tyberius hauing sent two valorous commaunders against him, Maurice, and Narsetes, the Persians were so wel beaten, as they tooke from them that which before they held, and what they had conquered in the times of Iustinian, and Iustine: yet Hormisda seeking to deface this blemish by some generous action, laboured to pursue a reuenge of the wrongs which he had receiued, but all was in vaine; for he did but increase his losse, for that Philippicus, lieutenant to the emperor, took from him Nisibin a citie of Mesopotamia, and entred far into the realme of Persia, from whence he carried a great prey which he brought safely into Media. And two yeres a••ter, [ D] Mauricius holding the empire, the same Philippicus inuaded Persia, & spoyling it as he ••ast, he stroke a great terrour into the whole countrie, hauing taken the city of Arcemenes, and vanquished the Persians in battaile, wherein they were confident to haue the victorie, for that the Mages had to assured them: but the euent did belie their false predictions, for they receiued a great checke. To conclude, all the time of Hormisdas raigne, he was but once fortunat in battaile against the Romans; for which defeat, the emperour Mauricius deposed Philippicus from his charge of Generall of the armie, and put Commentiel, who was Gouernour of the East in his place. At the same time, Hormisda made the Turkes his tributaries, receiuing them into pay to march against the Romans: but this could not preuent the defeat and flight of Bara Gener••ll of the Persian armie, whereas most of [ E] his souldiers were cut in peeces. This was the cause that Hormisda deposed him from his charge, but he not able to endure that ind••gnitie, reuolted against the king, making such a conspiracie, as in the end Hormisda was d••priued of his seat, imprisoned and affronted by Bin••oes, whom this ••••ng ••ad kep•• in prison, and that Besta his brother had deliuered by the conspiracie of the ••••••d Bara: ••o as Cosroè, sonne to Hormisda, was set in his fathers place, notwithstanding all the protes••ations or persuasions that this poore captiue king could make, who laid before them the good which he had done vnto the Persians, to haue defended them against the power of the Romans; that he had often exposed his life for their preseruation, & that he had newly made the Turkes their tributaries: but all this could not alter the resolution of his mutinous subiects. He in••reated them moreouer, that [ F] seeing they had so wilfully resolued to depose him from the crowne, not to giue him Cosroè for successour; that he had another sonne fitter to raigne, a mild man, and of a quiet disposition, whereas this was naturally cruell and ambitious. But this did aduance his totall ruine: for Cosroè seeing his father opposit vnto him, embraced the present for∣tune that was offered him, causing himselfe to be crowned king of Persia, in the yeare

of Christ 589, and the factious taking poore Hormisda, his wife, and other sonne, shewed a [ A] most horrible crueltie vpon the mother and infant, causing them to be sawne asunder like a peece of wood, in the sight of Hormisda, who was forced to behold this pittifull spectacle, and to see his wife and best beloued sonne butchered after so strange and cruel a manner; then they put out his eyes, and condemned him to a perpetuall prison, whereas Cosroè entreated him mildly for a time: but the father not able to forbeare to accuse his ambition, treason, and felonie, in the end, this detestable sonne caused his father to be so beaten with a cudgell, as the poore prince died.

¶ Cosroè, the second of that name, the two and twentieth king of Persia.

[ XXVII] THis execrable paricide being thus setled in the throne of the kings of Persia, by the [ B] bloud and life of his owne father, the Persians found the fact so strange, as there was not any one among them but resolued to take reuenge, finding by experience that this king was such a one, as his father had described him, that is to say, ambitious, cruell, and without pittie: so as they who had before reuolted against the deceased, and had bin the cause of his ruine, were the same that conspired against him whom they themselues had aduanced, reuenging after this manner the bloud of Hormisda, of whose death they had bin the cause. For the same Bara, or Varame, not able to endure such impietie and wicked∣••••esse, made a new conspiracie against Cosroè, who hearing that Bara marched against him with the forces of his realme, he went to encounter him with another armie, which was [ C] not to be contemned, and they met in a plaine neere vnto the riuer of Zabe: but Cosroè seeing that his souldiers fled daily to the enemies campe, and that they laid ambushes to kill him; he first of all slew many of his armie whom he distrusted: wherea•• the whole campe being moued, and taking armes, he fled sodenly to Corcese, with his wiues, three sonnes, and some of the nobilitie of Persia that would accompanie him, and (as he him∣selfe confessed afterwards) he came vnto that place miraculously, hauing prayed in his heart, and called vpon the God of the Christians, as his Sauiour, and surest guide. In the end, he came and cast himselfe into the hands of the Emperour Mauricius, in whom he found what he could expect: for he assisted him with such great forces, as he put his ene∣mie ••o rout, in which, besides the infinit numbers that were slaine, Narses General of the [ D] Roman armie, tooke 6000 naturall Persians, which he gaue to Cosroè: and as for the Turkes, he sent them to Constantinople to the emperour. The Historie of these Turkes is remarkable, who being sent to the Christian Emperour, were all marked in the forehead with an yron and blacke inke, in which marke there was a crosse: the emperour enquired of them why they vsed this figure, seeing they did not honour it, nor him that had suffered death thereon: they answered, That some time before there had bin a strange plague in the Persians countrie, so as few escaped, but there being certain Christians among them, they taught them to carrie the signe of the crosse after that manner, and that without doubt they should see the plague to cease, the which they did, and presently they felt the ••ffects of their deliuerie, and this was the reason why they did carrie the markes of their [ E] health and preseruation. After this victorie, Cosroè being restored to his throne, he did no more trust the Persians, but retained 1000 Christians about his person, whom Narses gaue him, of the most resolute souldiers of his troupes. And thus the nec••ssitie of Cosr•••• ended the wars betwixt the Romans and Persians, the which had continued 16 yeres, vntil that Phocas (hauing slaine Mauricius) seised tyrannously vpon the empire, in the yere 604. Gregorie, surnamed the Great, being Bishop of Rome, for then Narses, who had serued Mauricius, and done worthy seruices vnto the empire, seeing it now in the hands of this ty∣rant, reuolted, and seised vpon the citie of Edessa in Mesopotamia. The which Ph•••••• vn∣derstanding, he commanded Germain, Gouernour of the East, to besiege it: but Narses had recourse vnto Cosroè, whom he had setled in his throne, entreating h••m to succour [ F] him in this distresse, and to gather what forces he could together to inuade the territorie of the Romans. Cosroè finding himself beholding vnto Narses, sent presently all his forces, which gaue battaile to Germain, who was defeated, and hurt in the shoulder, of w••ich wound he died within few daies. Cosroè had also another victorie against the Romans,

[ A] in the which he caused as many Christians heads to be cut off, as ••ell into his hands: the which Phocas hearing, he found meanes to drawes Narses vnto him, promising by oath not to do him any harme: but being come, he caused him to be burnt aliue.

In the meane time Cosroe made himselfe maister of all Mesopotamia and Syria, car∣rying [ XXVIII] away a great number of Prisoners, there being not any one to make resistance, the affaires of the Empire were in such bad termes. The yeare after, Cosroe inuaded the Ro∣mans territories againe, and seised vpon Palestina, Phenicia, and the prouinces of Ar∣menia, Capadocia, Galatia, and Paphlagonia, and in the end he came to Calcedonia, spoiling, burning, and carrying away men, women, children, and cattell. The tyrannie [ B] of Phocas, and the despight of Narses, was the cause of this great losse to Christendome, he desiring rather to see a Barbarian to ruine all, than his enemie to enioy the Empire at libertie.

After the death of Phocas, Heraclius holding the Empire, and Boniface the fourth sit∣ting at Rome. Cosroe allured with the conquest of the Christians lands went againe to field, in the yeare of our Lord 613, and came into Syria, where he tooke the cities of Edessa, and Capessa, and marcht as far as Antioche, whereas the Romans comming to make head against him, were broken, and put to flight, and the slaugher was so great, as few Romans escaped their enemies sword: then Cosroe continuing his conquests, tooke the citie of Caesaria in Capadocia, and at the same time the Sarrazins began to make in∣cursions [ C] into the countrie of Syria, in which prouince Cosroe tooke the citie of Damas, and carried an infinite number of people into captiuitie. This made the Emperor Hera∣clius to write vnto him, entreating him to forbeare the effusion of so much blood, and re∣ceiuing a tribute from the prouinces which he held, to yeeld vnto a peace. But the Per∣sian who aspired to the Monarchie would not yeeld vnto it, but came vnto the holie citie of Ierusalem in the yeare 615, the which he tooke, and Zacharie the Patriarch was led prisoner into Persia, and the ornaments of the temple, iewells, and riches of holie places carried away, especially the holie Crosse whereon Iesus Christ our Sauiour suffered death for the redemption of mankind. After this Cosroe became so feared, as Aegypt, Alex∣andria, and Lybia, euen to Aethyopia obeyed him: he conquered also many townes in Asia; so as many began to doubt that he would carrie the Monarchie of the world.

[ D] This did so moue Heraclius, as making a peace with the Hanares or Henares, and with the Huns, he went against the Persians being succoured by the Sarrazins, and comming to battaile, he defeated them, taking fiftie thousand prisoners, the which he afterwards let go without ransome: but Sarbora Generall of the Persian armie, vsing the naturall infidelitie of Barbarians, sent vpon the Christians againe: vpon this occasion Heraclius went to armes, & recouered all the countries vsurped by the Persians, euen to Media: he got the holie Crosse againe, and carried it backe to Ierusalem. In the end Cosroe hauing raigned thirtie and nine yeares, dyed miserably, being slaine by his owne sonne, who cast him into prison with an yron chaine about his necke, feeding him with bread and water, [ E] and reproaching him that he had put many to death by that kind of punishment, recei∣uing thus by his owne sonne the punishment of the crueltie which he had practised against his father.

¶ Syroe, the three and twentieth king of Persia.

SYroe hauing thus miserably slaine his father, came vnto the crowne of Persia: but his raigne was not long, for it continued but one yeare, during the which he set at libertie all the Christians that were then captiues in Persia, and sent backe the Patriarch of Ierusa∣lem, with the ornaments and iewells of the Church safe into the countrie of Palestina.

[ F] ¶ Adhesir, the foure and twentieth king of Persia.

AFter the death of Syroe, Adhesir his sonne raigned, but he held the Dyadem but seuen moneths, for that Sarbara slew him and seised vpon the realme, which he had long affected.

¶ Sarbara, the fiue and twentieth king of Persia. [ A]

SArbara did not long enioy the thing which he had so much desired: for hauing raig∣ned six moneths, his subiects slew him, for that he was not of the blood royall.

¶ Bornan, the six and twentieth king of Persia.

THe Persians being thus rid of Sarbara, they did chuse in his place Bornan the sonne of Cosroe, who enioied the crowne but seuen moneths. [ B]

¶ Hormisda, the second of that name, seuen and twentieth king of Persia.

HOrmisda, the second of that name succeeded him, and was the last of the Persian kings of the race of Artaxare, from whom the Sarrazins and Mahometans conque∣red the countrie of Persia, in the yeare of Grace 634, and 413, after that Artaxare tooke the Monarchie from the Parthians, hauing slaine Artaban their soueraigne.

¶ Of the kings of Persia that were Mahometans.

TO write the genealogie, and succession of the Arabians, which haue held Persia when∣as [ C] the Mahometan religion was planted in those parts, it is so confused, & set downe so disorderly, as the reader shall hardly gather any instruction, those ages hauing not en∣countred such diligent writers, as haue obserued a particular order like vnto Agathius. Leauing matters then in their obscuritie, this abridgement not suffering me to dilate vp∣on this subiect, as it were fit, it shall suffice to say that the Arabians hauing held this pro∣uince long, the Turkes came and dispossest them vpon their first inuasion: who passing on, entred into the lesser Asia, where afterwards they erected the Monarchie which we see at this day, from whom came those Noradins, & Saladins, who afterwards annoied the Christians so much in the holy land: but these were expelled both out of their coun∣trie [ D] of Turquestan, and out of Persia by the Tartarians. With the change of races came also that of State, and the names of prouinces: for Zacatay brother to the great Cham of Tartaria, hauing taken the countries called in old time Margiana, Sogdia, and Ba∣ctria, they were termed the realme of Zacatay, as it is at this present. After this Ocatacham vsurping the realmes of Media, Parthia, and Persia, he would haue all this called Azamie, whence it comes that the Persians are called Azemiens.

This race of Tartarians raigned in Persia since the yeare 1260, vntill that Tamerlan made himselfe maister of the greatest part of the East, hauing vanquished Baiazet Empe∣ror of the Turkes. For from the children of Tamerlan, are issued the kings of Persia, which haue raigned vnto the Sophi, whose raigne was of no long continuance: for Tam∣berlan [ E] died in the yeare of Grace 1403, and the Sophi seased vpon the realme of Persia about the yeare 1478. So as that great Vsunchassan who maintained warre so long against the Turkes, was sonne to Tamerlan, or to one of his sonnes: but howsoeuer the countries of Zacatay haue continued without wars, vnder the commaund of the kings of Persia, after that Vsunchassan, had expelled one called Iausa, who they said was of the auncient race of the Sarrazins.

¶ Vsunchassan, or Assambey king of Persia.

[ XXX] VSunchassan being in quiet possession of his realme, allied himselfe with the emperour [ F] of Trebisond, marrying Despinacaton, whom this Christian Emperour gaue him in marriage to haue support against Mahomet, the second of that name, Emperour of the Turkes, who made warre against him. This ladie had leaue from Vsunchassan to liue with libertie of conscience, and to haue the exercise of her religion, hauing commonly with

[ A] her certaine Priests which did celebrat diuine seruice. She had by Vsunchassan one sonne, and three daughters, the first whereof was married to Sechaidar, father to Sophie, and the other two liued with their mother, whenas she retired her selfe with her husbands leaue, to liue solitarily in a towne of Assyria, called Iscartibiert, where she continued long, with her daughters, at the kings charge, who caused her to be richly furnished with all things necessarie vntill her death, and being dead, she was interred in the citie of Amida, in S. Georges Church, whereas her tombe is yet to be seeene. Vsunchassan had warre against the Turke, both for the Emperour of Trebisonde his father in law, and for that the Per∣sian pretended a right to the countrie of Sylicia, now called Caramania, which the Turke said was his. As he lost Caramania, the Turke making himselfe maister thereof, so could [ B] he not rel••eue the poore Emperour of Trebisonde, whom Mahomet vanquished, and made himselfe lord of his countries, as he had done of those of Caraman, not but that the Persians are as valiant as the Turkes, but for that the vse of artillerie was not knowne to them, and the Turke hauing aboundance, he amazed them, and disordered them with the storme thereof. This made Assambey intreat the Venetians to make war against the Turke, and that for his part he would assaile him; and whereas the Turkes had put him to rou•• with their artillerie, they should doe well to succour him, to the end that with equall for∣ces they might affront their enemie.

[ C] The Turke, in the meane time, leuied great forces to inuade the Persian, and to make warre against him, for that he had releeued Pirohomat king of Caramania, and hauing past Palestina, and Syria, he crost the riuer of Fraat, and came to the lake of Argis, or Geluca∣lat, and tooke the citie of Arsingan, for that it was not strong nor desensible. Into those quarters came Vsunchassan, with his forces, to encounter him, hauing his three sonnes with him, the first being called Calul, the second Vgurlimehemeht, and the third Zainel; and his armie consisted of diuers nations, as Persians, Parthians, Albanois, Georgiens, and Tar∣tarians; yet Vsunchassan seeing the order which the Turkes held in camping, he was much amazed, and hauing beene long silent, in the end he spake these words, Baycabexem Nede∣ri••dir, which signifies, O sonne of a whore, what a Sea is this? for he said that the Turkes [ D] hoast was like vnto a Sea: then seeing the Turkes begin to passe, he sent a squadron of his souldiers to stop the passage, and there began a furious skirmish, whereas many were slaine of either side: but the Turkes losse was greates••, by reason that the Persians might easily releeue one another, the which the Turkes could not doe, of whom many were drowned, not knowing the Foard. In the end, they were put to rout, and Vs••nchassan made a pittifull slaughter; but night approaching, they sounded a retreat, yet Usunchas∣s••n had the victorie, for that he lost few of his men, either by the sword, or by the violence of the water, neither was there any one taken prisoner, whereas the Turkes lost twelue thousand, among the which there were many men of marke: for this cause, Mahom••t durst not passe any farther into the countries of the king of Persia, seeing the difficultie so [ E] great to vanquish, by reason of the riuers, desarts, and mountaines, which he must passe. The Turkes retiring, the Persians tooke courage, and, passing the riuer, went indiscreetly to charge the Turkes: but this furie lasted not long, for Vsunchassan flying vpon an Ara∣bian horse, gaue an occasion to the rest to doe the like; and in this disorder, Zainel his sonne was slaine. It is true, that the Persians did fight seuen or eight houres, and had made head longer if Vsunchassen, fearing that Mustapha, Mahomets sonne, would haue compast him in with his troupes, had not fled (as hath beene said;) which was the cause of the death of his sonne, and of ten thousand of his souldiers, and the losse of the citie of Caratsar, which was the chiefe of the countrie, subiect to the gouernement of Zainel the sonne of Vsanchassan, who was slaine in the foresaid battaile. After the which, in the yere of our Redemption 474, whenas the Persian king was resolued to change the aire (accor∣ding [ F] to the custome of those countries) whereas, in regard of the heat, they are forced to change their pasture twice or thrice a yeare, being neere to the citie of Soltania, he had news that Vgurlimehemet had reuolted against him, and had taken the citie of Syras: whereupon the father leuying his armie, went presently to punish his sonnes follie: bu•• Ugurlimehemet hearing that his father came against him, would not attend him, but ••a∣king

his wife, children, moueables, and jewells, he fled towards the Turke, sending some [ A] of his people to Baiazet, second of that name, for a safe conduct; but he presently aduer∣tised Mahomet his father, who commaunded that a pasport should be giuen him, but he forbad his sonne to go out of the citie of Amasia to meet with the Persian, whom he desired should bee honoured, yet would hee haue him haue a care to preuent all fraud and deceit. Vgurlimehemet doubted of this distrust, and therefore he sent his wife and children before as hostages: then he arriued with some three hundred horse, and B••∣iazet receiued him verie courteously, and feasted him with great magnificence. After this, the Persians sonne went to Mahomet the Turke, who gaue him better reception than his sonne had done, and promised to make him king of Persia, and to ruine Vsunchassan, [ B] who was his mortall enemie. He then gaue him forces, and Vgurlemehemet marching to∣wards his countrie with his Turkish troupes, he was no sooner come to Syras, but he made incursions vpon his fathers territories: Vsunchassan sent certaine troupes of souldi∣ers to make head against him, but not in such numbers, as he seemed to regard much what his sonne had attempted, but these were policies, the sooner to entrap him, for he caused a bruit to be dispersed, that he was much troubled for the reuolt of this his sonne, and that he had lost him in that manner, and they did also faine that he was verie sicke, and the better to settle a beliefe, he kept his Chamber for a time, and no man came vnto him but such as he trusted much: so as the news came to Constantinople, that Vsunchassan was verie sicke of melancholie, for that his sonne had so abandoned him. This bruit of [ C] his sicknesse encreasing daily, some of his most confident seruants gaue it out that he was dead, sending letters to Vgurlimehemet, that he should come and take possession of the crown, before that some one of his brethren did preuent him, & to the end he should not doubt of the fraud, they did celebrat the kings obsequies throughout the countrie, the which gaue more assurance to Vgurlimehemet, who had receiued threescore m••ssag••s which had beene sent him to go vnto Tauris, where he was receiued and conducted to the Palace, in which he found his father healthie, and without any in••••rmitie, who caused him to be taken and put to death without any regard that he was his sonne, and he whom of right he should haue appointed his successour to the crowne.

After the death of this poore rebellious prince, Vsunchassan raised a great armie, in the [ D] yeare of our Redemption 1477, making shew to go against the Turke, but it was to as∣saile the king of the Georgians, sometimes called Iberia, for that the Georgians had refu∣sed to succour him, whenas he went against the Turke. But that king, and a neighbour of his, laboured to make an accord, by the meanes of a summe of money which they gaue him, and so retaining a fort which is vpon the passages, called Tiffis, he retired to Tauris, where he died, in the yeare of our Lord God 1478, leauing foure sonnes, whereof three were by one mother, and the fourth by Despinacaton, Princesse of Trebizonde, who, be∣ing about the age of one and twentie yeares, was strangled by the conspiracie of his bre∣thren, who would not endure that the sonne of a Christian, and it may be he himselfe sa∣uouring of his mothers profession, should haue any commaund in Persia. [ E]

¶ Iacub Patischa, second king of Persia, of the race of Vsun Chassan.

[ XXXI] THe second sonne of Vsun Chassan, whose name was Iacub Patischa, made an accord, with his third brother called Mango, whereupon the eldest was forced to flie, so as Ia∣cub made himselfe king, in the yeare of our Saluation 1479. He had warre against the Souldan of Aegypt, who sent his Mammeluchs into Assyria, in the yeare 1482, where, af∣ter long warres, diuers battailes, skirmishes, and surprises, the Persians had the victorie, and repulsed the Aegyptians, chasing them out of Assyria, and Mesopotamia, into which they were entred: this happened in the yeare of Grace 1487. This Iacub Pat••scha, who [ F] vsurped the seigneurie of Persia, tooke to wife the daughter of the Lord of S••mmut••a, who was the cause of his ruine, for she being exceedingly licentious, fell in loue with a gentleman of her husbands traine, and for that her friend was no small companion, she sought all meanes to kill her husband, and to bring him to bring him to the crowne, whom she saw to

[ A] be one of the neerest to succeed him. Thus hauing intelligence with her adulterer, they did mix a s••btile and daungerous poison: then making an odoriferous bath after the ma∣ner of the Persians. Iacub came thither with his sonne, being seuen or eight yeares old, and entring into the bath continued long there; then comming to the pallace of ladies, she who knew that her husbands custome was to drinke comming out of the bath, met him, and presented him this deadly potion in a cup of gold, with a more cheerefull coun∣tenance than of custome: yet the trai••eresse had not so good a colour, which made the miserable prince to suspect something, and therefore he would haue his wife to take the essay, the which she durst not refuse, but drunke of it, then the king tooke it, and gaue al∣so [ B] to the poore infant: this mixture was so violent in operation, as by midnight they were all three dead; the which caused a great amasement and confusion in the whole court, seeing their princes so sodenly dead; so as it bred great troubles throughout all the realm of Persia, the which was made a prey, and diuided among the strongest: for they that were of the blood of Vsun Cassan vsurped the seigneuries that lay fittest for them.

¶ Iulauer, the third king of Persia of this line.

IVlauer, kinsman to the deceased king succeeded, for the other brother was dead without heires: he raigned three yeares, and did nothing worthie of of memorie.

[ C] ¶ Baysingir, the fourth king of Persia of this line.

TO Iulauer succeeded Basingir, he who had conspired the death of Iacub with his adul∣terous wife: he raigned but two yeares.

¶ Rustan, fift king of Persia, of this line.

AFter him came one called Rustan, a young nobleman about twentie yeares old, and he raigned seuen yeares: it was against him that the Sophies father made war. He [ D] wa•• called Secaidar, and had (as hath beene said) married the eldest daughter of Vsun Cassan, being head of the sect, which they haue since called Sophies, that is to say, of those which did not receiue the Alcoran, but according to the interpretation of Haly, Mahomets sonne in law, who had made a new sect in Mahomets doctrine.

Vnder this Secaidar there were many dispersed here and there, which followed his opi∣nion, and did reuerence him as a holie man; who liuing at Ardeuil, a citie seared not far from the lake of Vasthan, preacht his doctrine vnto the people, and drew an infinit num∣ber to follow him. He had six children, three sonnes, and as many daughters, and was a deadly enemie to the Christians: the Mahometans thinking to make their perfection appeare, the more they hated the Christians. He made many incursions vpon the Circas∣siens, [ E] who seeing themselues thus prest by the great power of the Sophians, had recourse to the king of Persia, which was then called Alam••t.

¶ Alamut, the sixt king of Persia, of this line.

THis Alamut had succeeded Rustan, and was then at Tauris, whenas they brought him [ XXXII] newes that Secaidar had seised vpon the towne of Derbent, standing vpon the Caspi∣an sea, and seruing as a passage and defence to go from one countrie to another, b••ing but a strait. This made Alamut send an armie against the Sophians, who prepared them∣selues to battaile, and ioining, (notwitstanding all the resistance they could make, hauing [ F] slaine aboue foure thousand Persians) yet in the end they lost the battaile: S••••••idar being s••aine, his head was cut off, and cast vnto the dogs; the rest of the Sophians were put to rout, and most of them cut in peeces, and the hatred they bare them was so great, as wheresoeuer they found any one, it was impossible to saue his life.

The children of Seca••dar being aduertised of this newes fled, the one into Natolia, an∣other

to Alep, and the third into an Island called Armining, lying vpon the lake of Va••t∣ham, [ A] or Gelucalat. This was called Ismaell being thirteene or fourteene yeares old, excee∣ding faire, graue, and yet courteous, whose face promised some great matters to come. The Armenian priest who tooke this infant into his custodie, was a great Astrologian, and skilfull in judgements, who was the more carefull to bring him vp, for that he knew by his art that this infant should one day attaine to some great, commaund: he t••erefore kept him secret, for that they sought for him in all places to kill him. This priest laboured to instruct him in the Christian law, wherein it may be he had preuailed something, if ambition had not beene of more force in this young princes heart, than pietie: but he who had other intentions demaunded leaue of his maister and gouernor, whom he h••ld [ B] as a father, respecting also the Island of Armining during his life, and shewing himselfe fauourable to Christians. Departing from Armining he went to Chilan, where he remai∣ned with a goldsmith, a great friend of the Sophian sect, and an affectionat seruant to the house of Secaidar: from thence he did often write to his friends at Ardeuil, with whom practising thus by letters and secret messages, in the end thinking they had disposed well of their affaires, they resolued to reuenge both the death of their prophet Secaidar, & the defeat and slaughter of the Sophians at Derbent by the souldiers of Alamut.

The first enterprise which Ismaell vndertooke, was against the castle Maumutaga stan∣ding vpon the Caspian Sea, the which he tooke by surprise, for that they dreampt not of him, neither were there any forces in the place, nor the guards careful to keepe the gates. [ C] This castle did serue them as a retreat, hauing made their incursions, as being in a place impregnable, and hauing good meanes to be furnisht with victualls by sea, for that all ships toucht there which past along the Caspian sea. Ismaells good fortune was such, as in a borrough standing vnder the castle, he found an inestimable treasure with the which he began to win the hearts of men, to make leuies of souldiers, to send presents to great men, and to vse all the pollicie that they are accustomed to doe which aspire to the vsurpation of Empires, forgetting nothing that might serue for the aduancement of his cause: so as he who before at the taking of the castle had but two hundred men, was in an instant followed by fiue or six thousand Sophians, with the which he began boldly to in∣uade the territories of Alamut and to win part of his countrie, pretending the crowne to [ D] be due vnto him, as issued from the daughter of Assambey, and that he which raigned was not as he said of the blood royall of Persia.

Alamut seeing the impossibilitie to force Maumutaga, would not send any armie to besiege it: moreouer he had a conceit that the Sophi would proceed no further, but content himselfe with that peece; and in the meane time holding him in suspence, and making no shew to assaile him, he would not stand vpon his guard, & so in time he should haue meanes to intrap him, and to punish him once for all. But he made his reckoning without his hoast; for Ismaell hauing gathered together a mightie armie, went to besiege the citie of Sumachia, which was great and rich, lying betwixt Armenia, and Media. nor far from the Caspian sea. Sermanglogli king therof seeing himselfe too weake to make [ E] head against the Sophians, left the cit••e, and fled to the castle of Calistan, which place was impregnable: and Ismaell tooke Sumachia, and made a pittifull sla••ghter of the in∣habitants, where he inricht himselfe, and the souldiers of his armie; so as he drew them to him by his bountie and courtesie: and it was bruited ouer all Asia, that Ismaell was the most wise, valiant, courteous, and bountifull prince in the world; which made many be∣come Sophians, only to be partakers of the spoiles and conquests of this prince.

In the meane time Alamut seeing the happie successe of his enemie, gathered his for∣ces together, and the Sophi for his part did not omit any thing, but sent vnto the kings of Iberia or Georgiana, who were three; the first was called Scenderbey, the second Gar∣garambey, and the third Mirzambey, to demand succours, making great promises to free [ F] the Christians throughout all Persia (for the Georgians make profession of the Christi∣an religion) propounding also to inrich all such as should serue him.

Either of these princes sent him three thousand Knights, and six thousand Iberians▪ all valiant and hardie warriors, and the best souldiers that are in all the East, who comming

[ A] to Ismael at Sumachia were courteously receiued ••y him, giuing them great presents of the riches which he had gotten at Sumachia. Alamut, who was then about sixteene yeares old, and Ismael nineteene, hea••ing of the great preparation of his enemie, came to Tauris, and from thence marcht towards Sumachia, with a resolution to fight with him; and Ismael in like manner went to meet with him, hauing onely, as they say, sixteene or twentie thousand men: but all choyce men and good souldiers. These two young and couragious princes met betwixt Tauris and Sumachia, where there being a great riue•• ser••ing as a barre to either of them, the Sophie found out a foord the which he past in the night vnknowne to his enemie, and at the breake of day came and charged Alamuts [ B] armie with such furie, as before his men were scarce awake, Ismael had cut the greatest part in peeces; so as Alamut saued himselfe with difficultie in Tauris, with some small troupe that followed him: for all the rest were put to the sword by Ismael, who hauing rested his armie foure dayes, he marcht towards Tauris, where he entred without any resistance, for that the citie is not able to make head against an armie, hauing no walls, neither were the people verie fit for the warres. Ismael vsed great crueltie against all the race of Iacub, of the which he left not any one aliue, but caused the wombes of women with child to be opened, and the fruit to be drawne forth and muthered; and not content to flesh himselfe vpon the liuing, he made war against the dead▪ for hauing caused the bodie of Iacub, and other noblemen to be sought out, but especially of those which had beene at the battaile [ C] of Derbent, whereas Secaider his father was slaine, he made their bodies to be publiquely burnt on the Market place: and to shew how much he was pleased with the effusion of blo••d, he commaunded that three hundred common strumpets should be brought be∣fore him, causing their heads to be cut off. The like he did to foure hundred men that were of king Alamuts traine: neither is it knowne for what reason he caused all the doggs that were found in Tauris, to be slaine. And to heape vp the measure of his wickednesse and crueltie, he put to death his owne mother, who (as it hath beene said) was of the fa∣milie of Vsunchassan: but the Sophie detested her, for that, being yong, after the death of Secaidar, she ••••d married againe to a great lord of Persia, one of those which had been in the battaile of Derbent: for thereby he conceiued that she hated her first husband, and [ D] all that were issued from him, and therefore she had married this man, to the end that his children might come vnto the crowne, and depriue them of the first bed: but what rea∣son soeuer moued him to commit this paricide, he alwaies shewed himselfe to be one of the most cruell Princes that euer bare crowne; and thus ended the royall Line of the de∣scendants of Vsunchassan.

THE LINE OF THE SOPHIANS.

[ E] ¶ Ismael Sophi, first king of Persia of this Line.

ISmael being thus setled in the possession of this realme, continued his victories and ri∣gour [ XXXIII] against them that would resist him, making many of the chiefe of the nobilitie come to doe him homage, and to kisse his hand, taking the Caselbas or Turban with a red tippet, which is the proper marke of the Sophians, as making profession of his sect; yet in their hearts they were of a contrarie opinion: so as there were few in Persia that re∣fused the Caselbas, fearing his force and furie. Whilest that Ismael remained at Tauris, feasting with his captaines, behold Muratchan Sultan of Bagadeth, issued from the bloud of Assambey, came to make warre against him, the which did much trouble Ismael, yet he [ F] fainted not, but gathered his forces together, animating and incouraging his souldiers: M••ratchan did the like, and all the duties of a good and valiant commaunder, so as the combat continued a whole day, with such animositie, & so great slaughter of either part, as they hold that since Darius, there hath not beene the like battaile giuen in Persia, yet Ismael had the victorie and honour, the other being forced to flie to Babylon. This victo∣rie

happened about the yeare of our Redemption 1499, Ismael being not yet full nine∣teene [ A] yeares old.

After this, Ismael resolued to reduce the prouince of Diarbek, or Mesopotamia, the which he knew had alwaies beene vnder the soueraigntie of the kings of Persia, and was then vnder the commaund of many priuat men, among others, of Sultan Cal••b lord of Azanchise, who being aduertised of Ismaels dessignes, came of his owne motion, without any Summons, there by to bind him to intreat him the better; he kist his hand, tooke the Gaselbas, and promised to be his faithfull subiect and seruant: the which Ismael tooke in so part, a••he confirmed him in his Estate, & gaue him his sister in marriage. He shewed great courtesie to certaine Turkes come out of Natolia, who offered him their seruice, and [ B] tooke the Caselbas▪ hie••e of which was called Vstagial•• Momutbeg, to whom the So∣phi gaue the gouernement of Diarbek, except the cities of Aranchef and Amida, which he left to his brother Sultan Calib, who hauing exceeded the bounds which were prescri∣bed him by the Sophi, as the bruit went, he had commaundement giuen him to leaue those cities to Vstagialu, who had notice giuen him, that although Calib were brother in law to the king, yet his maiesties meaning was, that he should haue the superintendancie of the prouince; whereupon Calib refusing to obey this commaundement, for that the Curdes (of whose nation he was) submitted themselues verie vnwillingly to the Sophi∣ans, was pursued by Vstagialu (whom the Sophi had also honoured with the marriage of another of his sisters) taking from him the greatest part of his seigneurie, and all by the practises of the Sophi, who did it of purpose to ruine all the naturall princes of the coun∣trie, [ C] which might make head against him, being assured that strangers aduaunced by him should haue no meanes to resist him long. The countrie of Diarbek being thus reduced vnder his obedience, he presently aspired to that of the Aliduliens (a people of the lesser Armenia, who had vsurped certaine lands during the life of Iacub) leuying great forces in the yeare of our Saluation 1510, Vstagialu, whom he had sent before, being not able to preuaile, he came himselfe in person, hauing raised a greater power than of custome, or was needfull to ruine them with whom he had to doe; but he only feared least the Turke or the Aegyptian should vndertake the defence of them whom he meant to punish: he therefore sent to either of them, intreating them not to meddle with the affaires of the [ D] Aliduliens, and protesting that he would not attempt any thing against these two prin∣ces: Hauing this assurance, he inuaded the countrie of the Aliduliens, the which he con∣quered for the most part, killing some of the kings children, and making a great slaughter of the people; but in the end he was forced to retire by reason of the great and vehement cold of this countrie: in his retreat, he tooke the towne of Casiria, or Coesaria, which was defended by Carbey sonne to the Alidulien king, notwithstanding that this Prince was well accompanied, and the place well furnished with all things necessarie, in the which hauing taken this young prince, he tooke a delight to cut off his head with his own hand; as he did presently after to his predecessour Alamut, who being betrayed by Amubey, in whom he did wholly trust, being brought before Ismael, he slew him presently with his [ E] owne hand.

He was of a disposition so impatient of all rest, as hauing ended the Alidulien warre, and seeing that Muratchan Sultan of Babylon (of whom we haue formerly spoken) might quarrell with him for his crowne; he resolued to ruine him, and tooke for a sub∣iect, that after the death of Alamut he had got possession of the great citie of Syras, the chiefe and Metropolitan of Persia, terming himselfe to be the neerest of the bloud royall descended from Vsunchassan: both these princes had great numbers of men; but Ismael had the most valiant; and Muratchan made his subiects to follow him rather by force, than for any good will they had to march vnder his commaund, remembring that in for∣mer times Muratchan had fought against the Sophi neere vnto Tauris with thirtie thou∣sand [ F] men, whereof scarce any one escaped. This constraint of his men gaue him small hope of victorie, wherefore he sent to Ismael, intreating him to receiue him for his vas∣fall; but Ismael caused the heads of his messengers to be cut off, saying, That if Mu∣ratchan had any desire to acknowledge him for Lord, he would haue come hinse••fe in

[ A] person to present his seruice, and not haue sent others; the which being vnderstood by Mur••tchan, and fearing least he should be intreated like vnto king Alamut, he stole out of his campe, and taking three thousand choice men, whom he held most faith∣full, he fled to Alep, but being come vnto the riuer of Euphrates, he caused the bridges to be broken downe, which fell out well for him: for the Sophi causing him to be pur∣s••ed with twice as great a troupe; he had no sooner past the riuer but he saw the So∣phians at his backe, who by this meanes returned without any effect, and Muratchen sa∣ued himselfe in Alep, where with king Aliduli, he was entertained at the charge of the Souldan of Aegypt.

[ B] The Sophies affaires prospering after this manner, he began to be feared of his neigh∣boures, so as the Cham of Tartaria who was called Ieselbas, for that they weare a greene Turban, desiring to diuert the course of his prosperitie, came and inuaded the countrie of Corasan, and tooke many faire townes vpon the Caspian Sea, as Eyè Straui (where∣as they make excellent silkes) Amixandaran, and Sare, the which drew the Sophi vnto the frontires to stop the Tartarians passage as he did: but the Tartarian sought to sur∣prise him, fayning to go visit the Sepulcher of his Prophet Mahomet, and to go the pil∣grimage of Mecque: but the Persian would not heare of it. After this Sermandali king of Seruan, which is the countrie of Media, hauing broken the accord made betwixt him [ C] and Ismaell; the Sophi assailed him, ruined his countrie, and tooke from him his Seigneu∣rie: from thence he past into Carabac, where he made choyce of two captaines, the one called Dalabey, the other Beyrabey, to whom he gaue the charge of the conquest of Suma∣chia, the which they tooke without any resistance, and the Castle of Calastan was also ta∣ken, with all the forces, which are from Mount Taurus vnto the remotest part of the Cas∣pian sea, and to the citie of Derbe••t; so as all the lords of this countrie tooke the Casel∣b•••• and did homage to the Sophi.

Moreouer he was in such reputation amongst his owne people, as his souldiers did in a manner adore him, hauing such confidence in him, as they went vnto the warre for his seruice without any defensiue armes, and fighting bare brested, they cried Schiac Schi∣••••▪ [ D] which signifies in the Persian tong••e, God, God: as it were calling him to witnesse of their loues and affections. The name of Sch••ach was first giuen vnto the Sophi: for in his titles at this day they call him Sch••ach Ismaell, and on his coines, he had caused these words to be grauen on the one side, Illahe Illallaha Muhammeduis sesul allahe, that is, there are no Gods but one only God, and Mahomet is the messenger of God; and on the other side were these words, Ismaell halife, hillahe, that is to say, Ismaell is the Vicar of God. If any one would pray well, he vsed no other termes, saieth Leonclauius, but Schiach ac∣complish thy desire, and be fauourable to thy enterprises. He also changed the forme of p••ayers which Mahomet had instituted, and made others very different: and thus for the lo••e of him the Persians fell in hatred with the followers of Mahomet, so as he who had [ E] committed such cruelties, and put his owne mother to death, who was an Heretike in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 owne law, and had filled his countrie with fire and blood, was yet held as a God of his subiects, and he suffered himselfe to be so called; so easilie is the mind of man trans∣po••ted with presumption, and so grosse is our apprehension of diuinitie, to attribute it ••o ••uch base and imperfect things. Behold briefely the beginning of the Sophians, and how they attained to the greatnesse which they enioy at this day.

But hauing ended this warre, he fell presently into another: for the house of the Ott••mans hauing beene long an enemie, not onely to the Sophians, but also to the fa∣••••llies of Vsun Cassan, and their predecessours, who onely repre••ent at this day the partie of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 whose descendants did in former times retire themselues into Persia, they h••••ing beene alwaies mortall enemies to the Turkish Monarches, whose hatred increa∣sed [ F] the more, for that these had seised vpon their seigneurie: to this old quarrell there 〈◊〉〈◊〉 two new occasions offered to draw these two young princes into armes, the one 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Selim which was Emperour of the Turkes, and the other Ismaell new king of Per∣••••••, both of them being ambitious, valiant, vndertakers, cruell, and very fortunate in

their enterprises. That which should entertaine their wills, and purchase mo••e loue, was [ A] the cause of their warre, for Ismaell hauing sent Embassadours to Sel••m to congratulate his ioyfull comming to the crowne, he sent him no other present, but a great Lyon. Selim who conceiued that this Hieroglyphick would tax him of crueltie, grew into great chol∣ler against the Embassadour, so as, notwithstanding any excuse, that which his king had done, was onely to present to a great and royall courage the beast that was more coura∣gious and royall than all others: he could not satisfie him, so as he sent backe againe the Embassadour without any honour, to whom (being in his lodging) he sent certaine great dogges which had bloodie mouthes to carrie with him into Persia, commaun∣ding that without any delay this Embassadour should retire home vnto his maister, [ B] and that he should be accompanied vntill that he were out of the Ottomans terri∣tories.

The Embassadour being returned to his maister, he put Ismaell into so great a furie, as he sware to be reuenged, the which he did hope to worke by the meanes of Amurath Ze∣lebi, nephew to Selim, who after the death of his father Achmet, had beene forced to fl••e into Persia: this was he whom the Sophi armed against the Turkes; so as he first of all inuaded his vnckles countrie, who being then forced to defend himselfe, he presently led a great armie into Persia, whenas Ismaell least dreamt of him, not thinking his ene∣mie could haue vsed such expedition; so as being ill informed of their disseignes, he was gone to make warre against the Coraxeans, a people which inhabited vpon the [ C] sea of Hytcania: whenas they assured him that the Turkes were entred into his coun∣trie, it made him to poast backe againe, for his enemies were come neere vnto Tauris. In the end was giuen that famous battaile of Zalderana, whereas the Turkes had the victo∣rie, after it had beene long disputed, and Ismaell was forced to saue himselfe in a moorish fen, loosing the greatest part of his armie, and all his baggage: this battaile was giuen in the yeare 1513. After which Selim tooke the citie of Tauris, the which hauing preserued for a time, he afterwards spoiled, and carried away a great number of the inhabitants to Constantinople. In his retreat, Ismaell fell vpon the rereward, and defeated many of his men, hauing the spoile of all the baggage. In the end Ismaell hauing raigned twentie yeres, past to an other life, in the yere 1525, hauing left foure sonnes with an ample seigneurie, [ D] to the which he had giuen a very happie beginning.

¶ Schah or Xa Thamas, or Tachmas, the second king of Persia, of the familie of the Sophians.

[ XXXIIII] X A Thamas eldest sonne to Ismaell, came vnto the crowne of Persia af••er his fathers death: hauing had in a manner during all the time of his raigne some warres with the Turkes, a nobleman of the countrie called Vlama, had beene one of the chiefe causes of the warre, being reuolted against his king and fallen vnto the Turkes partie; so as Soli∣man [ E] who raigned then ouer them, entred with a mightie armie into Persia, tooke and spoiled the citie of Tauris, and built a fort there, which the Persians tooke afterwards with great slaughter of the Turkes: yet this did not stay the course of Solimans victo∣ries, but he made himselfe maister of all Assyria and Mesopotamia, and particularly of Bagadet which was the chiefe of the countrie, where he was crowned king of Persia by the Calife of that place, where hauing staied some time, he returned backe the second time to Tauris, forcing Thamas to flie: at this time the Turkes made a wonderfull spoile, carrying away all that was rare and good, and setting fire vpon all the neighbour places: but Del••ment a Persian captaine had his reuenge, who taking his aduantage cut them in peeces, and put Vlama to flight: this defeat happened the thirteenth of October in the [ F] yere 1536, Delyment returning full of glorie and honour to his king. Although the Turks had spoiled all these prouinces, yet some haue written, that of neere 500 thousand so••les which past the riuer of Euphrates, there returned not aboue eightie thousand able men.

[ A] Afterwards Baiazet, the sonne of Solyman, fled vnto the Persians, who for a time made vse of this occasion with aduantage, but in the end Solyman fearing that this warre might grow teadious, and that in his old age he might receiue some disgrace, practised so with T••chmas, as he persuaded him to kill him, who had fled vnto him for refuge, betraying in this manner his guest for money. He raigned 53 yeares, and died in the yeare 1576, lea∣••ing two sonnes, Schaeh Ismael, and Mehemet the Blind.

¶ Schaeh Ismael, the third king of Persia of the Sophians Line.

[ B] Ismael, eldest son to Tachmas, succeeded his father in the crown of Persia, but his raigne [ XXXV] was not long, for he died within a yeare and ten moneths after, hauing done nothing worthie of memorie. This historie is reported by some after another manner: That the yongest of Tachmas children, called Cardar, seised vpon the realme, who hauing put his brethren in prison, seeing himselfe assured of the realme, be shewed himselfe so faint hear∣ted, as the great men of the realme began to contemne him, and in the end to hate him; so as they mu••thered him, and drew his brother Ismael out of prison, setting him in the roy••ll throne, who finding himselfe not verie safe, by the late example of his brothers death, seeking to make an exact triall of the loue of his subiects, he hid himselfe in his pa∣lace, and did manage his dessigne so secretly, as hauing caused his death to be published, it [ C] was easily beleeued, especially by his enemies, who thereupon were bold to discouer their most secret thoughts, being assured (as they thought) that they should receiue no disg••ace, he being dead; but the spies which had beene set to discouer the words and acti∣ons of all men, aduertised Ismael faithfully, who comming out of his graue like a bodie newly risen, appeared to his enemies, not like a ghost, but like a prince justly incensed; but he carried himselfe therein so cruelly, as he filled all with murthers, which bred new troubles, and vnexpected confusions among his subiects, the which increased by the pub∣lication of his new law, which he would haue imbraced at Casbin, putting them to death that would not follow it. His cruelties were the cause of a great conspira••ie which was made by the Sultans, that is to say, by the greatest men of the country, which came to that [ D] passe, as his owne sister (called Perca) who had intelligence with the Sultans, slew him: the which did wholly confound this empire, so as in shew Persia did run to ruine, there being nothing able to resist the least attempts of her enemies. This weakenesse and confu∣sion of State encreasing daily, they aduanced Codabande to the royall throne, being a man ignorant of the affaires of State and warre, and diseased in his eyes, which hath made some ••ay, that he was blind, fearefull, and inconsiderat in his actions, and that which did most i••∣port, not esteemed by the Sultans: so as in regard of these things, this realme which in s••••∣me••times had bin so much feared, began to be contemned of her neighbours, & of them that were a farre off.

[ E] ¶ Schach Mahamed, called the Blind, the fourth king of Persia, of the race of the Sophians.

AFter all these reuolutions which happened (as you haue heard) vnder Ismael, Maha∣med the Blind came vnto the crowne, who being such (as I haue said) it caused Amu∣r••th, emperour of the Turkes, to make many enterprises against Persia, sending thither one of his Bashas, called Mustapha, who tooke the fort of Eres, with the towns of Sumachia, & Dennenopi, and made himselfe maister of all Seruan, yet the Persians recouered a part of it: All the raigne of this prince, which continued but six yeares, was spent in the taking and recouering of places, and in certaine defeats which were giuen of either side.

¶ Scach Abas, the fif•• king of Persia, of the race of the Sophians.

[ F] THis prince began to manage the affaires during his fathers life time, & afterwards be∣ing come to the empire, he recouered Tauris from the Turkes, & freed a good part of Persia, with many defeats of either side: yet he made a truce with them, but it was only to take breath: for some time after, especially vnder Achmat, emperour of the Turkes, which

raignes at this present, it was renewed more bloudie than before: he sent certaine embas∣sadors [ A] as well to the emperour Radolphus, as to the Archduke of Austria, to crosse the con∣clusion of a peace which was then treated of betwixt the Christians and the Turks, to the end he might more easily defeat his enemie: but the affaires of Christendome were so confused, and their forces so weake, as the emperor was forced to yeeld to that which was most necessarie: but as for the Persian, he continued the war, and was in the same termes in the yeare 1609, hauing already raigned 33 yeares. This is all that can be found of the kings of Persia, as well in ancient as moderne Authors; Let vs now see a Catalogue of them, for the ease of the Reader, distinguishing them according to diuers races.

THE MONARCHS OF PERSIA. [ B]

The yere of the World.		The yeares of the raigne.	The Moneths.
	1. Cyrus, and Ciaxre, or Darius.	2.
3427.	1. Cyrus alone.	2.
	2. Cambises, in him ended the race of Cyrus.	7.	5.
	3. Smerdis the Mage.	0.	8.
3463.	4. Darius, sonne to Histaspes.	36.
	5. Xerxes.	21.
	6. Artaxerxes.	44.	[ C]
	7.Xerxes, second of that name.	0.	2••
	8. Sogdian.	0.	8.
	9. Darius the Bastard.	19.
	10. Artaxerxes.	36.
	11. Darius Artaxerxes, surnamed Occhus.	4.
	12. Darius, the fourth of that name.	6.

THE LINE OF THE ARTAXARIDES.

The yeare of Grace.		The yeare of the raigne.	The Moneths.
	1. Artaxare or Artaxerxes.	15.	[ D]
228.	2. Saporus.	0.
	3. Hormisdates.	1.
	4. Vardanes.	0.
	5. Vardanes, second of that name.	16.
	6. Vardanes the third.	0.	4.
	7. N••rseus.	7.
	8. Misdates.	7.	9.
	9. Saporus.	70.
	10. Artaxerxes.	11. [ E]
	11. Saporus the second.	5.
	12. Varannes.	10.
	13. Idegertes.	21.
	14. Varannes the second.	20.
	15. Varannes the third.	17.
	16. Perosus.	20.
	17. Valent.	4.
	18. Cauades.	11.
	19. Bl••se or Lamase.	2.
	20. Cauades againe.	44. [ F]
	21. Hormisda.	15.
	22. Cosroè.	39.
	23. Siroè.	1.
	24. Adhesir.	0.	7.
	25. Sarbara.	0.	6.

[ A] The yeares of grace.		The yeares of raigne.	Moneths.
26. Bornan	0.	7.
634.	27. Hormisda	4.

THE LINE OF VSVN CASSAN OR ASSAMBEY.

1403.	1. Vsun Cassan	11.	6.
	2. Iacub Patischa	12.	10.
	3. Iulauer	3.
	[ B] 4. Baysingir	2.
	5. Rustan.	7.
	6. Alamut and Murat	3.

THE LINE OF THE SOPHIES.

1495.	1. Ismaell Sophi	20:
	2. Schach Tachmas	53.
	3. Schach Ismaell	1.	10.
	4. Scbach Mahamed the blind	7.
[ C] V••to the yere 1609.	5. Schach Abas.	33.

The Preface.

THis Historie abridged of the Persians, is so full of memorable actions, as if they should be set downe in particular, according to the Method which hath beene held through∣out the whole booke, it would rather make a relation than an abridgement: and this long repetition would rather be tedious and vnpleasant, tha•• profitable to the rea∣der, who will sooner haue perused this small abridgement, the reading whereof is so succinct, as it must needs giue him content. It shall suffice then to say for his better satisfaction, that this [ D] Chronicle abridged of the kings of Persia, diuides it selfe into many families: the first begin∣ning at Kaiumar as the sonne of Aram, the sonne of Sem, the sonne of Noe, vnto Alexander the Great for the space almost of one thousand yeares. After Alexander there was a vacancie of seuentie yeres, and then the Persians hauing recouered their dominion, one of the descendants of Darab entred into this interrupted possession, the which continued aboue three hundred yeres: so as this first familie of Ka••umaras the first king of Persia lasted aboue one thousand and three hundred yeares. The last king of this race was lazdegerd, who was dispossest by the Arabians and Califes of Bagadet, which are distinguished into three families: the first of Homar, which continued but seuenteene yeares: the second was that of Ben Humya, which lasted about ninetie [ E] yeres: after came that of Ben Abas, whose successor held it six hundred and twelue yeres, or there∣abouts: but the last Calises had onely the name; e••ery prouince being gouerned by a king which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Arabian: but they were in the end expelled by the Tartarians, vnder their leader Ching is Ch••m, who dispossest Almostacen, the eight and fiftieth and last Calife, by the victorious armes of Ola Kukan a Tartarian, one of his captaines, who put the Calife to death. The Mogoles or Tar∣tarians of the race Ching is Cham commaunded ninetie and seuen yeares, or thereabouts. After them came the descendants of Teymurlang, who gouerned not one alone, but many at one time, which make this familie more obscure in this Historie, for the space of two hundred yeres: the last of them called Mirzah Ab••bacar was expelled and slaine by Kara Issuff Turkoman; Persia being then d••uided into two parts, of Kara Kyonlu, and Ak••yonlu: that of Kara Kyonlu comman∣ded [ F] first in Persia, but they continued but sixtie and three yeares for they were chased from thei•• seat by the Akuyonlu, who had for their head Ozun Acembeck, but this familie continued but s••••re and thirtie yeares, hauing beene expelled by the Sophies, who had for chiefe Cha Ismaell So∣phi, who began to conquer Persia in the yeare 1501, whose descendants haue raigned aboue one ••••••dred yeares, vnto this day.

HAuing succinctly described Persia, and the kings which haue com∣maunded [ A] there since they began to sway the Monarchie vnder Cy∣rus their first king, vnto this present, as it hath beene written by auncient and moderne authors: it shall be now fit to shew the or∣der and succession as it is found in their Annales written by the Persians themselues, and compiled by Carick Mircond, as it was promised in the beginning of this short abridgement.

He saith, that in the prouince of Azerbajon or Aderbajon, as it [ B] is now called, the chiefe whereof is that rich and famous citie of Tauris or Tebris, one of the best peopled in all the East. The inhabitants of this prouince seeing the diuisions which grew daily among them, for that they had not any one which did commaund so∣ueraignely, by a common consent they made choice of a king called Kayumarras, who in the beginning excused himselfe all he could, holding himselfe too weake for so great a charge: yet he was so importuned by their intreaties in generall, as in the end he con∣sented to the election they had made of his person; and then transporting himselfe to a publicke place, they that were deputed to that end, attired him in the presence of all the people with roabes different from the common sort, and for a marke of royaltie they did put vpon his head a kind of little hood, which they cal Tage, the which is as much among [ C] them as a crowne with vs: and in signe of obedience and subiection they all kist his hand, which custome is yet obserued in those countries. This Kayumarras, as Mircond reports, was the sonne of Aram, the sonne of Sem, the sonne of Noe, whom the Persians call Adam Assany, that is to say, second Adam; for that as soone as he was created king he would be called Adam: hence grew the error among the Persians in the time of Paga∣nisme, who held that their first king had beene Adam the first father of all mankind.

¶ Kayumarras, the first king of Persia.

THis king as he was the first that commaunded in Persia, so was he the first that setled [ D] any order and pollicie, causing justice to raigne among them, whom he defended valiantly against their enemies, leauing his realme peaceable to his posteritie, hauing raig∣ned fortie yeares.

Kayumarras had one sonne called Nacek, giuen to a solitarie life, and to the contempla∣tion of naturall things, who retyred himselfe with his wife into the prouince of Dama∣oand, after called Aderbajon, and now Hyerak: and as this prince was of a good vnder∣standing, his father went sometimes to vsit him in his life time, whenas he had any brea∣thing from his important affaires: but it is not knowne why not how he was found dead in his poore retreat, hauing receiued many wounds, and yet neither his wife nor any of his people could discouer who had done the deed. After that he had beene mourned for [ E] by his familie, and his bodie burnt according to the customes of those times, euery man being desirous to know who had committed so wicked an act; they found in the end that they were certaine theeues of the neighbour countries: whereof Kayumarras being adu••rtised, he gathered together all his forces, and went to encounter them in the coun∣trie of Mecharek, where he got a victorie against them in the prouince of Ta••rastam, where after that he had slaine a great number, he carried many captiues to his house, who serued him afterwards for the building of the citie of Balk, the which he founded, as he did those of Stahhar (where he kept his court) Ardauel, Kabulstan, Komuz, Ma∣cron, Nachibem (which is Niniue) Gerion, Sagiston, and Goms, all which were subiect to the demeanes of Persia: he was also the founder of diuers others in seuerall prouin∣ces, [ F] as shall be said according to occurrents. That of Balk was in the prouince of Vsbek, well peopled, rich, and warlike, as all be of that countrie.

[ A] ¶ Siamek, second king of Persia.

NAchek hauing at his death left his wife with child, within a certaine time she was deliuered of a sonne called Siamek, whom his grandfather caused to be bred vp, and instructed according to the laws of the countrie; then being come to the age of discreti∣on, with the consent of the people, he declared him his successour. And in the end, re∣nouncing the gouernement, he resigned it into the hands of Siamek, who within few daies after inuaded the enemies countrie, and hauing incountred their armie, he gaue them [ B] battaile, where he had the victorie: but he bought it deere, for hauing receiued a mor∣tall wound, he was carried presently to his tent, where he died, leauing his wife with child, whom he conjured dying, That if she were deliuered of a sonne, he should take re∣uenge of his enemies; and with those words he ended his life: so as the realme returned to Kayumarras, who instantly went against his enemies, which were entred into Persia, vanquished them, and carried many captiues away, among the which there were many which had beene the cause of the deaths of the abouenamed Princes. They ascribe vnto this Kayumarras the inuention of most of the armes which they vse in those quarters, and especially their capatisons for horses.

[ C] ¶ Ouchangh, the third king of Persia.

AFter the death of Kayumarras, Ouchangh, the sonne of Siamek, entred into the posses∣sion of the realme, who gouerned it to all mens content: Hauing leuied an armie, his enemies being entred into a prouince, which is neere vnto Damoand, he gaue them bat∣taile, where he was wounded with a stone whereof he died, leauing one sonne after him, who was called Thamures, hauing raigned fiftie yeares.

¶ Thamures Diuband, the fourth king of Persia.

[ D] OVchangh being dead, Thamures his sonne succeeded him, who was surnamed Diu∣band, that is to say in the Persian tongue, a Tamer of the deuill, by reason of the no∣table victories which he obtained against the Persians enemies, whom they hated as the deuill. And for that his subiects had endured much during the former warre, he freed them of all imposts for three yeares; and as he was as great a louer of peace, as inclined to armes, desiring to leaue his realme better ordered than he had found it, he made many goodly ordinances for the quiet thereof. It was he that first created in Persia a Vizier, or Wazir, which some by corruption called Guazil, who is the chiefe and soueraigne magi∣strat next vnto the prince. He also appointed garrisons vpon the frontiers of Ardeba∣jon, which is one of the principall prouinces of Persia, and doth most import. The victo∣ries [ E] and good gouernement of this prince made many lords his neighbours to come and submit themselues vnder his commaund. But after all these prosperities, there fell a great plague in the countrie, whereof many men and great store of cattel died: from the which Thamures could not be freed, but died in the prouince of Vzbek, in the towne of Balk, hauing raigned thirtie yeares.

¶ Iambxed, the fift king of Persia.

IAambxed succeeded Thamures Diuband in the realme; some say he was sonne to the deceased, others affirme he was his brother, and some his cousin: a man of great wise∣dome [ F] and vnderstanding, and no lesse valiant, hauing added to his dominions seuen great prouinces, all which were gouerned by their laws and customes, doing many wor••hie deeds to maintaine them in peace, and to free them from contagious diseases, whereunto they were subiect, by the councell of two famous physitians, which did flourish in those times, one of which was called Faelasuf Rabon, and the other Facychagorres: and remem∣bring

how much they had beene afflicted with necessitie in the time of ••ham••••••s, de••i∣ring [ A] to prouide for the future, he made many goodly stor••houses, in the which he put all sorts of prouision to serue in time of necessitie. He inuented coats of armes, and daggers, and they attribute to him the first making of jewells of gold, and to haue set p••••••••ous stones. He also caused stuffes of coloured silkes to be made, whereof he ware his ••obes: He much delighted in Aromaticall things, and of a pleasing scent, the which he caused to be brought out of remote countries to his great charge. Moreouer, they hold that he first brought the vse of wine into Persia, the which notwithstanding he vsed so••erly; whereof they report a Historie of a s••aue of his whom he loued much for her great bea••∣tie, who being tormented with a great paine in her head, and the prince doing what pos∣sibly [ B] might be to cure her, and yet she finding no remedie nor ease; despairing to ••ecoue•• her health, she hid her selfe secretly in the place whereas the wine was kept, being pre∣serued in that countrie as a treasure; whereof she drunke a good quantitie: After some houres, finding her selfe eased of her great pain, she returned to drinke more than before; the which hauing done, and finding her selfe fully cured, she presently discouered vnto the king what had past, who admiring the force of this liquor, did esteeme it much better than he had done before.

This prince did reside most commonly in the prouince and citie of Sagistam; and the better to discouer what past throughout his prouinces, and to giue order of all things ne∣cessa••ie, he built the citie of Scyraz, which is the chiefe of the realme which they properly [ C] call Persia. The citie of Scyraz being built, Iambxed made his ordinarie aboad there, where he began to treat of the gouernement, and of matters, which vntill that t••me had beene confused, and without order: giuing to wise men the care and gouernement of all, he would that men of warre should haue a distinct jurisdiction from others, and that la∣bourers, and such as did till the land should not meddle with any other thing. He did also set downe an order for mechan••ique arts, applying them to the vse and profit of all men: so as euerie man rested himselfe contented with his trade as much as was p••s∣sible.

Moreouer, he made good lawes, and did procure the good of his people: so as in his time Persia did enioy peace health, and riches, but this prosperitie was soone turned in∣to [ D] affliction and miserie: for Iambxed seeing these countries so flourishing, and attribu∣ting all to his owne knowledge and good gouernement, was so depriued of vnderstan∣ding, as he caused himselfe to be worshipped as a god, causing inscriptions to be set in all the publique places of his Estates, that vpon paine of death euerie man should worship him: but he continued not long vnpunished for this impietie, for in the countrie of Sa∣gistam there did rise against him a famous captaine called Ahad, his owne kinsman: who gathering together a great armie gaue the conduct thereof to a cousin of his called Zoahk, who came neere to Scyraz, where he found Iambxed that came to incounter him with another mightie armie, where giuing battaile, Zoahk had the victorie, and Iambxed was taken prisoner, and carried to his enemie, who caused him to b•• murthered in his pre∣fence. [ E] He l••ft one sonne but three yeares old, called Frayhdun, the which he had by a wife called Framak, who hid her ••elfe with her sonne, so as she could not be found. It is not written how long this Prince did raigne.

¶ Zoahk, tyran of Persia.

THe tyran Zoahk hauing caused his king to be murthered, seised vpon the realme. He was cousin to Iambxed, descending from Kayumarras, and sonne to Hel••an, a man of great note, who was directly descended from the kings of Arabia. This Zoah•• was much giuen to the studie of naturall things, wherein he became excellent, and yet he was [ F] of a bad disposition, hauing a deformed face, a terrible aspect, and was hated of all men: hauing raigned sometime, he fell into a disease which the physitians could neuer c••r••, so as despairing euer to recouer his health, being moued by a deuillish illusion, and follow∣ing the councell and aduice of a sorcerer, he persuaded himselfe that there was no me••••s

[ A] to be cured of his griefe, but in rubbing himselfe with mans boold; so as he began a pitti∣f••ll butcherie of all ages and sexes, making a great deluge in the citie of Scyraz: the which the wisest of his Councell seeing, they went vnto him to dissuade him from this inhumane remedie, persuading him to vse sheepe in steed of men, shewing by many rea∣sons that it was more proper for his health; to whom he affirmed that there were two snakes which did continually gnaw his bowells, hauing continued many yeares in this Martyrdome, during which, they say that one night he dreampt that three men bound him, one of the which slew him, striking him on the head with a mace; the other two taking from him the girdle wherewith he was girt, tied him by the feet therewith, and [ B] transported him into the territorie of Amaoand.

Zoahk hauing dreamt this, like a man distracted, caused all the wise men of his coun∣trie to be sent for, who told him that it did signifie he should be depriued both of realme and life; for among the Persians, the girdle is a marke of honour and dignitie, which they had taken from him. He feared his misfortune should fall vpon him by Frayhdun the sonne of Iambxed: which made him to seeke curiously for him, but his mother Framak had concealed him; where at Zoahk being much incensed, discharged his choller vpon As∣p•••••• father to Framak, and flew him. The mother who fearing she should not be alwaies able to keepe her sonne so secretly but he should be discouered, gaue him to a Neatheard to keepe: the which Zoahk vnderstanding, he came himselfe vnto the Neatheard: but [ C] he had preuented him, and hidden the infant vnder a little tub which he had expresly made; so as Zoahk not finding him, he reuenged himselfe vpon his kine, whereof he slew a great number.

In the citie of Hispaon the chiefe of the prouince of Hyerak in Persia, which had sometimes beene the seat of kings, there was a man of importance and valour, called K••oh, and surnamed Angar, which in the Persian tongue signifies Yronmonger or Smith, whose two sonnes Zoahk had slaine, being come to the age of men, and of great reputati∣on. This man thirsting after reuenge, made a conspiracie with many others that hated Zoahk, and hauing gathered together great forces, he tooke many cities in Persia, which he did ouerrun & committed great spoiles; the armies of Zoahk encountring him many [ D] times, but he was alwaies victor; so as encouraged by this good successe, he increast his armie, and marcht towards Amaoand whereas Zoahk kept his court, and vpon the way he tooke the towne of Hrey, in old time the chiefe of a realme, and presently after, that of Karason. This towne of Hrey is yet famous, as well for the greatnesse thereof, as for the rare things which are found there, among others Manna, the which is more perfect and pure than in any other place, whereof they transport a great quantitie to Ormus or Harmus, and from thence throughout all the East. Kaoh Angar hauing thus seised vpon Hrey, he gathered all the people and his souldiers about him, letting them vnderstand, that the reason which had moued him to this enterprise, was onely a zeale of his coun∣tries libertie, thinking himselfe bound to do his best endeauours to free it before he de∣parted [ E] this life, referring vnto the gods after his victorie to giue the gouernment of the realme to whom they pleased: then they all cried out with one voice that they did ac∣knowledge him for king and lord, and that to him onely the realme did belong for his valour: but he excusing himselfe said, that he would neuer lay such a blemish vpon his familie and honour, as to haue the name of a tyrant: but they had Frayhdun the sonne of Iambxed whom he desired they should acknowledge and obey as their king. This being granted by the whole assemblie, they spake of nothing but to go and fight with Zoahk, who came against them, where there was a great and bloodie battaile giuen, the which Zoahk lost, who being taken was carried before Frayhdun, where he was slaine being stroke vpon the head with a club: then hauing vndone his girdle they bound his feet, [ F] and dragged him into the territorie of Amaoand, as he had dreamt. The Persians make great account of the knowledge of this prince in naturall things, and of his long life; yet they write not how long he raigned. The resemblance of the name hath made many thinke that this Zoahk was Zoroastes that great and famous Magitian.

¶ Frayhdun, the seuenth king of Persia. [ A]

FRrayhdun hauing gotten the victorie of Zoahk, he came, by his death, to the gouern∣ment of the realm, and hauing brought all things vnder his obedience, he made Kaoh Generall of his armies, giuing him a good entertainment, & sent him towards the coun∣trie of Magareb which lies vpon the West: and to Garchacef his kinsman another good appointment, sending him to Macharek which is in the Eastrne parts. Kaoh was twentie yeares in his enterprise, during the which he reduced vnder the obedience of Frayhdun many prouinces and realmes, at the end whereof he was countermaunded by Frayhdun [ B] who made him lord of Hisfaon and Aderbajon, where he was ioyfully receiued by the naturall inhabitants, whom he gouerned ten yeares with much content both to the king and people: at the end whereof he died. This was the cause of great sorrow and heaui∣nesse in Frayhdun, who suffered his kinsfolkes to enioy his possessions: and in regard of his sonnes he caused them to remaine in court, honouring them much, and giuing them great aduancements. As for himselfe he married one of the daughters of Zoahk, whom he had put to death. He had formerly one sonne called Irege, by a great Persian ladie; af∣terwards he had two others by this last wife, the one called Salm, and the other Tur, who were of as bad an inclination as their grandfather Zoahk. As for Irege, he was exceeding courteous, and therefore beloued, followed, & respect••d of all men: the which gaue great contentment to his father, who affected him aboue the rest. Persia did then flourish in [ C] great peace, and Frayhdun seeing himselfe burthened with yeares and infirmities, desiring to dispose of his affaires before his death called together the greatest men of his realme to vnderstand their wills touching him whom they desired should be his successor: all which with one consent demaunded Irege. This did nothing displease Frayhdun, who to take away all s••biects of discontent from the others, gaue vnto Salm the lands of Mega∣reb, which lye vpon the West; and to Tur, those of Mecharek which lie towards the East; and to Irege, he left Persia, and Mesopotamia, with the tytle of king, to the end his brethren should acknowledge him: and s••tting downe the bounds of eithers jurisdicti∣on, he sent the two youngest into their prouinces, either of them with an armie for the [ D] defence thereof.

As for Tur, he built a towne, which he called by his name Turon, of the which the realme and region was afterwards called Turquestan, as it is yet at this day. This towne is scituated neere vnto the Caspian sea towards the East, and in the countrie which they call Mo••re-nahar. Here was the beginning of the Turkes, from whence they came, and from thence they haue inuaded all these countries which they now enioy: so as it is not from the Teucres, Troyans, or Thracians that they are descended, but from Tur, the sonne of Frayhdun, who gaue to that countrie the name of Turquestan, that is to say, the pro∣uince or region of Tur. Salm and Tur hauing their portions, they were much disconten∣ted to see themselues brought vnder the subiection of their brother, who they said was a [ E] bastard; so as they began to make seuerall enterpises: then hauing imparted their des∣seignes one vnto another by letters, they gathered their forces together, and came into the prouince of Aderbajon, from whence they did write to Frayhdun their father, com∣playning that he had preferred their base brother, and giuen him the soueraigne autho∣ritie: that if he would depriue him, they would returne in peace, if not, they should be forced to defend their right.

Frayhdun did presently aduertise Irege, commaunding him without any delay to pre∣pare himselfe to march against them: but Irege desiring to end this businesse by s••me milder course, propounded to his father to go vnto them, who blamed him very sharply, and would not consent vnto it. But Irege who desired peace, and the case of the r••••••me, [ F] taking with him the wisest and most discreet men of his court, went vnto them to ••••n∣fer with them, without the priuitie of his father. These two brethren who de••i••ed ••••∣thing more, seised presently vpon his person, and cut off his head, which they sent 〈◊〉〈◊〉 their father, who hearing of this lamentable accident tare his garments, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉

[ A] signes of wonderfull griefe. Irege left a sonne called Manucher, whom Frayhdun seated in his fathers place. This young prince made warre against Salm and Tur, and vanquisht them in battaile: and they to saue themselues, lay hidden among the dead bodies, but be∣ing diligently sought for and found, they were brought before Manucher, who being on horsebacke, cut off Turs head at a blow; whereat Salm was so amazed, as he fell sodenly dead at his feet. Thus died these two brethren, with aboue twelue thousand of their ar∣mie that were slaine, or taken prisoners. At that time, Frayhdun was blind and verie sick∣ly, to whom victorious Manucher went, and for that the good old man could not see him, he demaunded which was he; to whom the other answered, I am your grandchild Manu∣cher, [ B] the reuenger of the bloud of Irege murthered by Salm and Tur. The which Frayhdun vnderstanding, he receiued him in his open armes, with all shews of loue and joy, and ta∣king from his head the tyer of gold which he did weare, he set it vpon his grandchilds, as a confirmation of the royalty which he had giuen him, & appointed him for Wazir Som, the sonne of Narimon, a wise man, and verie valiant. Hauing performed this act, he died soone after. Frayhdun was a good king, wise, and a friend to all good men, verie valiant, and bountifull. They report many worthie things of him, the which cannot be related in this briefe abridgement. In the computations of times which the Persians make, they say that this Frayhdun was in the time of Abraham.

[ C] ¶ Manucher, the eight king of Persia.

BY the death of Frayhdun, Manucher, the sonne of Irege, began to gouerne his realmes alone: And as they were great and spacious, hee was forced to send Som Narimon, his Wazir, towards the Easterne parts. Being in his gouernement, he had a sonne borne, which from his mothers wombe was all couered with haire that was long and white. Som Narimon being troubled and amazed at this strange accident, caused him to be cal∣led Zal. This came vnto the kings eares, who did write vnto the father to send this yong infant that he might see him: the which hauing done, the king consulted with all the wise men, of this noueltie, who al assured him that this infant should be very valiant in armes, [ D] and faithfull to his prince. Whereupon the king would haue him brought vp in Court, vntill he were able to assist his father, hauing an intent to make him gouernour of the countrie of Nim Rues, that is to say, the countrie of the South, which was the retreat of Zal. Afterwards, recreating himselfe on a time when he was at rest in his house, he had a desire to go out of his limits, and to enter into the gouernement of Kabuscam, which was a dependancie of his fathers; in which he had placed for Gouernour a Captaine of his owne making, called Merabah, who vnderstanding of his comming, went to receiue him with rich presents, and to haue the honour to kisse his hand; bringing him presently vn∣to his house, neuer ceasing to commend (before his wife and daughter called Rudabah, who was exceeding beautifull) the vertues and valour of Zal. This did so please the vir∣gin, [ E] as without sight, she fell in loue with this yong man, yet not knowing by what means to discouer her passion vnto him. In the end, she resolued to send some of her women slaues before the tent of Zal, making shew to gather flowers: so as passing that way, he might haue occasion to demaund whose they were; these women hauing wittily perfor∣med what they had in charge, they met with Zal, who hauing demanded what they were, they answered, That they did belong to Rudabah the daughter of Merabah, whose beautie and perfection they described so particularly vnto him, as he was no lesse surprised with the loue of her, than she had beene with him. This businesse was managed so discreetly of either side, as in the end they found meanes to see one another, where they plighted their faiths, with a promise of marriage. Which being done, Zal went from Merabah, [ F] and returned to Nim Rues, where he grew so melancholique, and full of perturbations, for the absence of her whom he loued, as not able any longer to endure it, he resolued to go vnto her father, and to discouer his passion, entreating him that they might go vnto the king, to craue leaue of his maiestie to allow of this marriage: the father not able to resist his request, they went to Court, where, in the beginning, the king seemed difficult

to yeeld vnto this marriage: yet being vanquished in the end by their oppor••un••ties, he [ A] gaue way vnto it, so as returning afterwards to Kabulstam, they did celeb••at the ••upti∣alls of Zal, and Rudabah, who soone after had a sonne called R••stam, of whom there shall be often mention made; this historie being reported vpon his occasion.

Manucher hauing gouerned his realme fiftie yeares, there did rise against him, in the countrie of Turquestam, a captaine called Afraciab, the sonne of Panchangh king of Turquestam, vpon pretext to reuenge the death of Tur. This man hauing gathered all his forces together, raised a mightie armie, with the which he entred into Persia. Manu∣cher vnderstood it, but he made so little account, as hauing prouided badly for his af∣faires, he was forced to fight with great disaduantage, leauing the victorie to his enemie, [ B] and to retire himselfe in great hast to the fort of Amel, whither the victor pursued him, and besieged the place. Afraciab sought all meanes to draw him to yeeld it vpon some composition. But this prince being obstinat in resistance, the other was also resolute to force it, and to become maister of the place: yet his souldiers were not of that mind, for seeing winter drew neere, they resolued to leaue all, and returne into their countrie. Wherefore Afraciab being aduertised, fearing some worse disgrace, he thought it bet∣ter to treat of a peace, than to make a shamefull retreat. Some were deputed of either part to that end: so as a peace was concluded, vpon condition, that the famous riuer of Iehun should remaine as a bound betwixt Persia and Turquestam.

A peace being thus concluded, and Afraciab retired with his armie, Manucher went [ C] out of his fort towards the royall citie of Sigestam, where he then kept his Court. But Afraciab was scarce gone out of Persia, whenas Manucher did all he could to leuie a great and mightie armie, to march against him: whereof the other being aduertised, and ha∣uing not yet dismist his troupes, he fell vpon Persia, where he committed great spoyles: but Manucher more prouident than he had beene, hauing his armie readie, charged his enemies with such furie, as he defeated them, carrying away a great number of captiues. This purchased him peace in the remainder of his raigne, which was verie long, for they hold that he raigned not lesse than twentie yeares, leauing one sonne called Naudar, to whom he gaue many good and wise admonitions before his death, touching the gouern∣ment of this realme. [ D]

¶ Naudar, the ninth king of Persia.

THe news of the death of Manucher, & of the new comming of Naudar to the crowne, being carried into Turquestam, Pachangh, king of that prouince, called his sonnes vn∣to him, persuading them not to loose the occasion vpon this change of a prince not yet well setled. Afraciab was he that gaue the first consent, as hauing more experience of the affaires of Persia than his brethren: so as setting his hand to worke, he leuied an armie (as they say) of foure hundred thousand foot and horse, with the which he marcht direct∣ly to Sagistam: Naudar being aduertised hereof, sent presently for Som Narimon, father [ E] to Zal, who gouerned Kabulstam, t••at without any regard of his great age he should come vnto him, as he did, with goodly troupes. Being together, they consulted what was best to be done: Som went against Afraciab, but not able to endure the toyle by reason of his great age, he fell sicke, and died: the which gaue verie great contentment to Afraciab.

Naudar, who thought to follow Som with the rest of the armie, marching towards Ma∣sandaron, he encountred his enemies vnlookt for. Hauing made a stand, and the two ar∣mies being one against another, a souldier of the Turkes stept forth and offered combat to any Persian: against whom went one called Kobad, grandchild to Kaoah Angar, of whom mention hath beene made in the life of Frayhdun. Kobad had the aduantage, who [ F] slew Basmon, and hauing disarmed him, retired to his lodging. The Turkes enduring this disgrace impatiently, gathered all their troupes together, and inuested Naudars armie, giuing him battaile, during the which there fell so great a raine, as they were forced to se∣perat themselues, the skie was so darke. In this seperation, Naudar found that he was not

[ A] able to resist the forces of Afraciab; which made him to send for two of his sonnes to come to his succours, whereof the one was called Thus, and the other Gostam, being ac∣companied by Caren brother to Kobad, who was come out of Sagestan, from whence he had drawne all his familie and treasure, and had transported them to Albors Kuh (this is a certain countrie whereas the Persian Pagans were woont to worship the fire).

Afraciab vnderstood the resolution of Naudar, which made him to send a captaine of his called Karahhon, who meeting with these two brethren, fought with them. Caren was slaine vpon the place, and the chiefe of his troupes escaped as they could. In the meane time Afraciab did fight the second time against Naudar, and vanquished him with the losse of many Persians, and a great number of captiues, of which Naudar was one, all [ B] which Afraciab would haue had cut in peeces, if Agarires his brother had not dissuaded him from it, causing the captaines to be carried vnto a fort. This famous victorie ob∣tained by Afraciab gaue him assurance to send an armie of thirtie thousand men vnto Sagestan, whereas Naudars court remained, which towne did presently yeeld. The newes of this victorie being spred ouer all the prouinces of Persia, came vnto the place where∣as Merabeb father in law to Zal remained, who presently prepared a rich present and sent it to Afraciab, letting him vnderstandand that he descended from the familie of Zoahk, whose kinsman he was: so as not able to auoid it, he had beene forced to yeeld obedi∣ence to the king of Persia: but seeing that he had now the honour to belong vnto him, [ C] he would more willingly yeeld him all seruice and obedience, and pay him as much or more than he had done to others. On the other side he did secretly and speedily aduer∣tise his sonne in law Zal of what was past: the which he vnderstanding, made a speedie leuie of men, before that any thing was knowne or suspected, and seised vpon Sagestan. This did much trouble Afraciab, and put him in such a rage as he caused the head of Nau∣dar to be cut off, hauing raigned seuen yeares.

¶ Afraciab, tenth king of Persia.

[ D] AFraciab hauing thus seised vpon Persia, he aduertised his father Pachangh king of Turquestan thereof, and how fortunat his affaires had succeeded: after which he car∣ried himselfe so tyranously towards his peopled, as all the Persians conspired against him, demaunding Agarires, to whom they did write, intreating him to assist them: who made answere vnto them, that they should call Zal to their succours, and first begin the wars: the which they did in the spring following, and Zal who was then at Sagestan, gaue order for all that was necessarie for the warre, sending Ghechuad a captaine of great reputation towards Tabrastam, to practise something in those countries. These things could not be mannaged so secretly, but they came to the knowledge of Afraciab, who being as∣sured of all that past, and of their intelligences, and that his brother Agarires held the [ E] Persians partie, sent to kill him: and Zal to reuenge his death (which he apprehended with much impatiencie) persuaded the Persians openly to warres against the Turkes, who being gathered together from all parts, went and presented battaile to their ene∣mies, the which continued a whole day, with great slaughter of either part; night diui∣ding them, and no man knowing who had the aduantage. After this they retired home and continued their skirmishes six months together, in which encounters there were ma∣ny men lost. Then happened a great dearth and famine, after which followed a contagi∣ous sicknesse, which infected both their campes; so as they were forced to seeke a peace, which was not vnpleasing to Afraciab, who was contented to retire himselfe to Turon, leauing Persia after that he had held it twelue yeares.

[ F] ¶ Bazab, eleuenth king of Persia.

AFraciab hauing thus left the realme, the Persians gaue the gouernment to Bazab, who was of the blood royal, the which he accepted: but being alreadie eightie yeres old, he tooke for companion a cousin of his, called Garchasef. Moreouer Bazab remembring

the miseries and afflictions wherein the Persians had liued during the for••passed wars, he [ A] endea••oured what he could to maintaine peace, as he did during his life, which was short; quiting freely vnto his subiects his royall rights, to the end they might recouer themselues of their former losses. And for the commoditie of Persia, he drew two ri∣uers into the countrie, although their heads were very far off; the one he called Habin, and the other Razhabin. He neuer had treasure, neither would he haue any: & if he rece∣iued any summe of money, he diuided it among his captaines and souldiers. But he was a great glutton, and giuen to eating and drinking, inuenting many kinds of sauces and bro∣thes: this is that which Mirk••nd saith was most remarkeable in him.

¶ Kaykobad, the twelfth king of Persia. [ B]

BY the death of Bazab, Kaykobad nephew to Naudar came vnto the crowne, and made Rostan the sonne of Zal his Generall: being accompanied by Ghechuad, Kaharen, and many other captains, they put themselues in ambush before Afraciab, who came against them with a great armie; so as he was defeated, and the Persians got the victorie. Rostan did such deeds of armes, as he forced Afraciab to demaund a truce for two daies, being then in great feare, the which was granted him, vpon condition to treat of a peace, the which his subiects did allow of, sending to Kaykobad to accept thereof: but the Persians would not yeeld thereunto; so as the came to a second battaile, in the which Afraciab was vanquished, hauing fought more obstinatly than before. Being in the heat of the [ C] fight, Rostan demaunded which was Afraciab, whom when he saw, he ran furiously at him, being strong and actiue, ouerthrew him, and tied his feet with a cord, which was the ma∣ner of Persia, and is vsed at this day, to carrie a cord with them to draw water out of the cesterns, which are common in those countries, and so he dragd him after his horse, and left him among the dead: but Afraciab was cunning, and found meanes to vnlose him∣selfe, putting another in his place, and so escaped without descouerie. Rostan being ioyful, carried these good newes to the king, thinking there was no more to doe, but to fetch away Afraciab, the which he offered to do: but seeing the deceit, he was ashamed, and craued pardon, swearing that he would not be deceiued the second time. As for Afra∣ciab, [ D] he went into Turquestan, from whence he sent an Embassadour to Kaykobad, to de∣maund a peace, the which was graunted vnto him. This being done, Kaykobad hauing diuided his treasure among his souldiers, retired into his countrie, where he admini∣stred justice, doing the office of a good prince during his life. He lost his sight long after, and his indisposition encreased dayly: he dyed in Isfaon the chiefe citie of Kyerak, where he held his court, leauing in his place his sonne Kaykaus, hauing raigned one hun∣dred yeares.

¶ Kaykaus, or Salomon, the thirteenth king of Persia.

THe occasion of precedent quarrells had giuen assurance to a Persian captaine to [ E] make practises in the towne and prouince of Masandaron, at the comming of this new king to the crowne. This made Kaykaus leuie a mightie armie, and to besiege it. The towne was strong and well furnished with men and good bastions for the defence ther∣of. This made Kaykaus deuise some stratagem, seing that force was not able to preuaile. He therefore made shew to want prouision, and found meanes to haue some intelli∣gence with the besieged, whom he woon by the excessiue price he gaue them for their commodities, which they sold without consideration: who hauing vnfurnisht themselues of a great quantitie, they found soone by experience, that for want thereof ••hey should be forced to yeeld vnto Kaykaus; the which he otherwise held impossible. This town of Masandaron is one of the most famous in those quarters, beyond the coun∣trie [ F] of Gueylon; ioining on the North to the Caspian sea. The naturall inhabitants of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••tion are strong and warlike, and are numbered among the subiects of the king of 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

M••••••••daron being thus conquered, Kaykaus visiting his countries, entred into Arabia,

[ A] betwixt the which, and Persia, there is a strait of the Sea called the Persian gulfe; a∣gainst whom came an Arabian king called Zaulzogar, with his whole armie, to fight with 〈◊〉〈◊〉, in which the Arabian was vanquished, and fled (leauing his countrie) into a fort, whereon he much relied, and where he then kept his familie, and a daughter that was rare •••• beauty. There were some treaties which ended with a peace, vpon condition, that Zaul∣••••gar should giue his daughter Sodaba in marriage to Kaykaus, whom a brother of hers did ••••ing vnto him with a thousand faire slaues, and so the nuptialls were celebrated to the g••nerall content of all men.

Whilest these things past in Arabia, Afraciab entred into the Persians countrie with an ••••mie, where he committed great spoyles: yet he was repulsed and beaten, so as he was [ B] forced to retire. As for Kaykaus, hauing disposed of all things necessarie in the realme of Am••n, and in the best part of the lands which he held in that countrie, he returned into ••••rsia with his wife Sodaba, where being arriued, he gaue to Rostan the gouernement of ••••gestam and Kabulstam, with many other gifts, honours, and aduauncements. This ••••nce, before he went into Arabia, had one sonne called Syauex, to whom Rostan had ••••••ed much seruice and affection; being vertuous and beloued of all men for his mild∣••••••se and courtesie: This did not much please Sodaba, who propounded vnto her selfe ••••ring him into disgrace with the king; fayning therefore to loue him, she acquainted 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with her desire; but this young prince detesting her allurements, auoyded it all he [] ••••uld: Malicious Sodaba, desiring to effect her dessigne, on a time whenas the king was ••••••anely accompanied, she came running into his presence with her haire loose, wee∣••••••g, beating her brest, and complayning that Syauex would was forced her: Where∣•••••• they presently layed hold on him, and put him into a darke prison; but the mat∣•••••• hauing beene strictly examined, he was declared innocent, and the king sent 〈◊〉〈◊〉 her to haue her burnt, but her entreaties, together with the loue which he bare her, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the execution.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 hath beene said, that Afraciab returning along the bankes of Iehun, went against 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ci••ie of Balk, the chiefe of the prouince of Vzbec, against the which Kaykaus sent his [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Syauex, with twelue thousand horse, and as many foot, commaunding him to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by Sagistan, and to joyne with Rostan, and with all the forces he could draw toge∣•••••••• Syauex departed from Isfaon, where his fathers Court remained, and came to Sa∣•••••••• whereas Rostan gaue him a reception worthie of his greatnesse; and they began ••••••nsult what way they should take to march against the enemie. Being vpon their 〈◊〉〈◊〉, they came within two leagues of the enemie, and going to discouer which way 〈◊〉〈◊〉 might charge him, they were assured that Afraciab would giue them battaile with∣•••••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 nights, in the which he was put to rout; whereat he was so amazed, as he resol∣•••••• imbrace a peace, and to free himselfe from that continuall care, imploying in this ••••••••iation a cousin of his called Garceues, who managed the businesse so well, as 〈◊〉〈◊〉 [ E] , and they of the Councell, yeelded thereunto, whereof they aduertised king 〈◊〉〈◊〉, whereat he was verie much discontented, sending away his vnckle Thus, the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Naudar, with sharpe letters to Syauex, commaunding him to follow Afraciab ••••••soeuer he went, and to giue him battaile, and if he found him not, to spoyle the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Thus: And as for Rostan, by reason of his old age, he haue him leaue to retire 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

〈◊〉〈◊〉, to accomplish his fathers commaund, and the accord made with Afraciab, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hi•• armie to march to Thus, and he himselfe went to Afraciab. This man had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 campe a Captaine called Pyrond Vaysa, with whom Syauex had some familiar 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••taince and friendship, who no sooner saw him a comming, but went with great 〈…〉〈…〉 Afraciab, who being aduertised of his comming, went farre to meet him, [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••ought him to his owne Tent, giuing him a seat equall to his owne; and more∣••••••, to shew how much he esteemed him, he married him to a daughter of his cal∣•••••• ••••anguys. This marriage did not please Garceues, brother to Afraciab, nor the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of his Court, who held it a disgrace vnto them: so as they conspired to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Sya••ex, whereof being aduertised, he imparted it to his wife Franguys, who was

with child, entreating her if it so fell out, and that she were deliuered of a sonne, she [ A] should put it into the hands of some Persian. Within few dayes after, the conspirators put their dessigne in execution, and murthered him, meaning to doe the like vnto his wife, whereby they should kill the infant which she said was in her wombe: but Pyrond Vaysa defended her. Being afterwards deliuered of a sonne, whom they called Kaykozrrao, whom the said Pyrond caused to be kept secretly in the campe, vntill that Guyu, the sonne of Gudarz, carried him afterwards into Persia, where they were much troubled for the death of Sya••ex, and especially the father, who desiring to reuenge the death of his sonne, gaue a powerfull armie vnto Rostam, with expresse commaundement to giue battaile to Afraciab, the which he did, and defeated him, killing Garceues his brother: so as Rostam go∣ing [ B] on like a conqueror, he had news that Chaydah, the sonne of Afraciab, came to encoun∣ter him with another armie. Rostam (in whose companie was Frayborz, sonne to king Kay∣kaus, and brother to the deceased Syauex) renewed the fight with more animositie than before, and knowing Chaydah, he charged him with his lance, and ouerthrew him dead vpon the place; whereupon, the rest of the Turkes were put to flight. Rostam pursuing his victorie, entred into Turon, the place of Afraciabs Court, and the chiefe of Turque∣stan, which the Persians spoyled and sackt, carrying away all the treasure and wealth of the inhabitants. Franguis, wife to Syauex, was then in this towne, whom Rostam entreated to shew him her sonne; whereof she excused her selfe, saying, That she knew not where he was: so as Rostam returned into Persia, to whom the king did much honour, and gaue [ C] great presents, and then sent him into his gouernement.

King Kaykaus desired much to haue his grandchild Kaykozrrao, the sonne of Syauex and Franguis, who were then at Teuton, for which cause he sent into Turquestan, Guyu, the sonne of Gudarz, a nobleman of Persia, of great sufficiencie, to manage this businesse, wherein he carried himselfe so discreetly as he entred into Turon, and saw Franguis, and little Kaykozrrao, whom he persuaded to abandon that countrie, and to come into Persia, the which they did, being accompanied onely by the said Guyu, and Pyrond Vaysa helping them on the way vntill they were arriued at the king of Persias Court, where they were receiued according to their qualities. After some time, king Kaykaus seeing many vertues and perfections to shine in his grandchild Kaykozrrao, made him Generall of his armies, [ D] giuing great recompences to Guyu for his seruices. This caused a great alteration in the kings Court, betwixt Thus (vnckle to Kaykaus, in regard of Frayborz another sonne to Kaykaus) and Kaykozrrao: for Thus endured with great impatience; that the descendants of so cruell a race, and so great an enemie vnto Persia, should be preferred before them that were borne in the countrie; so as the whole Court was diuided into two factions, one for Frayborz, and the other for Kaykozrrao, to whom Guyu had joyned to assist him. These diuisions were contrarie to the kings intention, for the preuenting whereof he did as followeth:

At that instant, one Bahaman gouerned the towne of Ardauel, who made incursions into Persia, and did much annoy it: Kaykaus made two campes equal in numbers of men [ E] and forces, giuing one to either of these pretendants, and telling them that he which should first vanquish the enemie, should also precede his companion in greatnesse and dignitie: wherewith they were both content. Frayborz parted first, and did not any thing worthie of memorie: but Kaykozrrao did fight against Bahaman, vanquished him, and sub∣dued the citie of Ardauel, and returning to court, he was declared heire of the realme, and Guyu his captaine generall. And as for Kaykaus, he retired himselfe to a solitarie life, hauing raigned (as they say) one hundred and fiftie yeares.

This towne of Ardauel, or Ardauil, is in Persia, in the prouince of Ardebajon, some few dayes journey distant from Tabris or Taubris, no lesse great than famous, for that it was the countrie of Cheque Aydar, father to Cheque or Cha Ismael Sophi, whose descen∣dants [ F] raigne at this day.

[ A] Kaykozrrao, fourteenth king of Persia.

KAykozrrao being thus come vnto the Monarchie, as wel by his owne vallour and good fortune, as by the particular affection of his grandfather: at his first entrance vnto the crowne, to giue his subiects a tast that they had made no bad choyce of him, he re∣formed justice, which was wholly depraued and corrupted during the forepassed wars, seeking to repaire euery mans losses and ruines, by his bountie and mildnesse. Then he assembled his Estates, to whom he propounded a war he pretended against the Turkes, in reuenge of his fathers death, the which all men allowed of, and offered to follow him; [] ••o as he sent Frayborz his fathers brother, and Thus his great vnckle, the sonne of Naudar, with thirtie thousand horse to inuade the countrie of Turquestan. Kaykozrrao had a sonne called Syauex, who taking in bad part that his father made warre against his grandfather, •••• if he had receiued some great wrong, retyred to Turon: Pyrond Vaysa who (as hath ••eene said) was come into Persia with Guyu, whenas he conducted Kaykozrrao, with his mother Franguys, and had married there, hauing had one sonne whom they called Freud, ••ho being come to age returned into Turquestan. The king loued this young man, as 〈◊〉〈◊〉 owne sonne; so as when he sent Frayborz into Turquestan, hearing that Ferud had the ••••ard of a castle, he gaue speciall charge to his captains to turne from it: but they being [ C] ••••••ced to march that way, and comming neere it, Ferud sallyed forth, and fought with them; but he was slaine vpon the place; the which the king of Persia vnderstanding, he ••as wonderfully grieued, and being told that Thus was the cause thereof, he caused him to come to court, and put him in prison. Frayborz and Gudarz continued the wars against the Turke, where they had bad successe, for that Pyrond Vaysa vanquished them with a ••reat slaughter of the Pesians, among which there were seuentie knights all of the fami∣•••••• of Gudarz, who with Frayborz retyred into Persia. The king was not daunted at this ••••••grace, but sent Gudarz againe with another armie; and with him Thus, who was retur∣•••••• into fauour: they parted then to go to Turon, but before they were out of the [ D] ••••••nds of Persia, they encountered their enemies, who spoiled all that was before them, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 whom they did fight, but the others resisted them with such furie, as the Persians ••••re forced to retire into the towne of Damaon, where they did enuyron them of all 〈◊〉〈◊〉 taking from them all the passages.

At the fame of this siege, two neighbour kings to Turquestan came with their seue∣•••••• armies to succour the Turkes, the one was called Hhakon, and the other Changal: this 〈◊〉〈◊〉 much trouble the Persians, holding themselues abandoned of all succours: but Kay∣••••••rrao being aduertised of the miserie whereunto they were reduced, sent presently to 〈◊〉〈◊〉, commaunding him to march thither with all possible speed, the which he did, ••••king no stay vntill he came vnto the enemie. The Persians hearing of his comming; [ E] ••••••ceiued such ioy, as they all kist the ground, in signe of thanks, and ioining with them, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 went to fight with their enemies with such courage and valour, as the greatest part 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hem were slaine vpon the place, and amongst others Hhakon one of their allied kings. ••••••kozrrao was not satisfied with this defeat, but sent foure other armies into diuers pla∣•••••• to ruyne Turquestan, the chiefe which was led by Gudarz going against Balk, who 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to encounter with Pyrond Vaysa, he who had the best of the foure armies which Afra∣•••••••• had sent against the Persians, who had the honour of the victorie by the death of Py∣•••••••• Vaysa, whose head was sent to Kaykozrrao, the which he beheld with much griefe and ••••••content, for the breeding he had receiued from him. They say that in this warre there 〈◊〉〈◊〉 slaine and taken aboue one hundred thousand Turkes, and eleuen of their ch••efe ••••••••ains, Kaykozrrao gaue great rewards to all such as had done good seruice in these 〈◊〉〈◊〉, [] giuing vnto Frayborz the countrie of Kyché or Kaché, and Macron, realms which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 towards Goadel at the entrie of the Persian gulfe.

Afraciab hauing repaired his armie entred againe with a sonne of his into the coun∣•••••••• of Kaorrazin vpon the confines of Turon, whereas then lay the Persian armie, who ••••••quished the Turkes, slew Afraciabs sonne, & forced him to retire with his familie into

a fort, whereas not holding himselfe very safe, but meaning to go to some other place, he [ A] fell into the hands of Kaykozrrao with his wife and daughters, who had beene taken some time before, and entreated with much honour and respect. Within few moneths after, Afrraciab was taken himselfe and slaine; making an end by his death of this long and te∣dious warre; the which being thus ended, Kaykozrrao in imitation of kings his predeces∣sours had a desire to retire himselfe from court, and from the gouernment of affaires: who hauing no sonne, he did substitute in his place Lorasph nephew to a brother of Kay∣kaus (against which some of the greatest opposed themselues) & then soone after he died, hauing first restored all the lands and goods which his predecessors had taken from their subiects, and payd all their debts. He fauoured the poore, did justice equally to all men, [ B] and contented the men of warre which he had imployed. He neuer vndertooke any im∣portant action without good and mature deliberation.

In the time of Kaykozrrao, there were in Persia two famous Philosophers, the one cal∣led Horez, the other Lokmon: of this last there are some workers found among the Persi∣ans, which shew that he was of a great spirit: among others they haue a booke of com∣parisons and examples very like to those of Aesope; there is also great likelyhood that they spake of him, whenas reporting his life they say that being a great Philosopher, he had beene a slaue, very faithfull, and gratious, and that he dyed condemned: one thing makes it doubtfull, for that they assure he was a Iew. They haue a prouerbe among them, which saith, It is not needfull to teach Lokmon, to shew the deepe knowledge of [ C] this man.

¶ Lorasph, the fifteenth king of Persia.

KAykozrrao hauing left no yssue male, the crowne fell into the hands of Lorasph, ac∣cording to the election which he had made before his death. This man as hath been said, was nephew to the brother of king Kaykaus, and the neerest in succession to Kaykozr∣rao: but for that he was knowne to be seuere and cruell, his aduancement was opposed by the greatest men of the realme, and especially by Zal the father of Rostan; yet he car∣ried it from them all, and was declared king: after which he went out of Isfaon, and did [ D] visit his countries, as far as Balk, sending Gudars with an armie against Mesopotamia, Sy∣ria, and Palestina, who in a short time brought all the countrie of Babylon vnder his subiection, and of Dymeskychan, which is that of Damas, then he marcht against Beyt Almokadas, that is say, Ierusalem, (for in the Arabian tongue Beyt signifies a house, and Almokadas, saints) the king whereof yeelded vpon condition to pay a tr••bute, for the assurance of which accord, he gaue many great personages in hostage, whom Gudars caused to be slaine within few daies after, hauing beene assured that the Iewes would re∣bell against his king, and that they were drawne together with an intent to make warre against him; whereupon Gudars hauing gathered his forces together returned against Ie∣rusalem, the which he forst: at the taking wherof, the Persians vsed great cruelties against [ E] the Iewes, carrying a great number of captiues into Persia, whether Gudars retired after many other victories. King Lorasph had two sonnes, the eldest was called Gustasph, and the youngest Zarir: Gustasph was proud and high minded, but withall very warlike, who ha∣uing disposed some of his friends to certaine innouations which he desired, he preuayled so, ••s they rebelled with him against his father, meaning to expell him the realme: many of these followed him in the beginning: but the father hauing gathered together the greatest forces he could, pursued him, loosing no time nor opportunitie; so as he forced him to flie out of the realme, finding his forces vnable to resist his fathers, or to keepe him in the countrie; so as he escaped alone and ill appointed, and past into Turquestan, where being arriued by a certaine accident, he married the kings daughter of that coun∣trie, [ F] being vnknowne, the which happened after this manner.

It was an auncient custome in Turquestan, that whenas the king would marrie a daughter, he drew together all the people that were then in Court into an open field, ••uerie man being appointed the best he could: they all being set in order, the ladie that

[ A] was to be married was led in by the king her father, and in the other hand she held an ••••ple of gold of the bignesse of an orange, in••icht with pretious stones: then being set w••ereas she might take good view of this assemblie, and hauing beheld and obserued them one after another, in the end finding some one that liked her, she went and gaue him this apple, and he was held inuiolable for her husband. It happened that whenas Gustasph came vnto the Court, the king had an intent to marrie one of his daughters, whom this new come guest had a desire vpon courtesie to see: but it happened that he so pleased this princesse, as she gaue him the apple, whereat the king was much disconten∣••••••, for that he knew not Gustasph, and the great men that were there present made many [ B] complaints, as if all order had beene subuerted, so as to auoyd the like inconuenience, they made a law by the which it should not be lawful for the kings daughters to be mari∣ed to any other but to men of their qualitie and merit. This king had two other daugh∣•••••••• exceeding faire, who were demaunded by the sonnes of a neighbour king, to whom ••e promised them, vpon condition, they should reduce vnder his power two of the grea∣•••••••• noblemen of his countrie, who had beene the cause of many mischiefes: the enter∣•••••••• seemed difficult vnto them; but hearing of the valour of Gastasph, they found means 〈◊〉〈◊〉 make him vndertake this charge by the persuasion of his friends: Wherefore making ••••ew to go a hunting, with a traine fit for his dessigne, he carried himselfe so politique∣•••••••• this enterprise, as he tooke them, and deliuered them into the power of his two bre∣••••en [ C] that were with him, who went and presented them vnto the king, who much com∣••••nded this martiall exploit, and gaue them his two daughters. Within few dayes af∣••••••, the king hauing appointed a tilting, Gustasph carried himselfe so gallantly, as the king ••••••mended him much; to whom he answered, That he no reason to wonder if he had ••••aued himselfe well in tilting with a Reed, seeing he had clensed the countrie of them 〈◊〉〈◊〉 troubled it; the which the king vnderstanding, and being fully informed how all 〈◊〉〈◊〉 had past, he remained much more satisfied.

••••••tasph in the meane time knowing how much his father disliked him, for that he had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to his enemies, and that he sought meanes to be reuenged, thinking of the great 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which had beene betwixt his father and him, and what reason he had to dislike of [ D] ••••••••sence, being yet ignorant in what place he was lost, he resolued to make warre 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him, and with this desire he persuaded his father in law to refuse the tribute which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him for his countrie, the which the Turke did vnwillingly, sending an Embassa∣•••••• vnto him to denounce warre. This news did much amaze king Lorasph, who 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the principall cause which had moued the Turkish king to reuolt, and finding the ••••••••ssadours reason too weake for so important a businesse, he discouered in the end 〈◊〉〈◊〉 stranger, a man of valour, who by an vnexpected aduenture had married this kings ••••••ghter, was the cause of all this mischiefe. This made the Persian king to informe him∣•••••••••• more particularly what this stranger was, and in the end found that it was his sonne 〈◊〉〈◊〉, whereof being well assured, he sent an Embassadour to his younger sonne 〈◊〉〈◊〉 [ E] ••other to Gustasph, to the end that they should go vnto him, and persuade him to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and take possession of the realme: Gustasph being aduertised of this dispatch, went 〈◊〉〈◊〉 court to meet with them, before that his father in law had any knowledge thereof; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 had conference with his brother Zarir, he receiued the tyer which his father sent 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and put it on his head, after which he was presently proclaymed king of Persia by 〈◊〉〈◊〉 whole assemblie: which being done, he caused his father in law to be called, who 〈◊〉〈◊〉 come, and seeing him in that Estate, was much amazed, thinking it had beene some 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to dispossesse him of his realme; but hearing how all things had past, he imbra∣•••••• ••im often with great joy. Gustasph hauing taken leaue of his father in law, returned 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Persia, carrying with him his wife Katabun (for so the kings daughter was called [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 had giuen him the apple) and a great traine, with camels laden with great riches: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his father receiued him with demonstrations of great loue, the which encreased 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by the seruices which he did him afterwards. In the end, the father hauing spent 〈◊〉〈◊〉 yeares with his children, being tyred with the managing of affaires, retired himselfe 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Court to spend the remainder of his dayes in a solitarie life, where he died so••••e

after; giuing vnto his sonne good and necessarie aduice for the gouernement of his [ A] Estate. He was called Lorasph Balkah, for that he remained the most part of his time at Balk.

¶ Gustasph, the sixteenth king of Persia.

WHenas Lorasph retired himselfe from Court, he left his sonne Gustasph, or Gustasef, to commaund the realme, who was a valiant prince in warre, and a wise in peace: he was much giuen to the idolatrie and worship of fire, in which superstition he was so zealous, as he made warre against them that would not follow his opinion, as he did to [ B] Ariasph, or Ariaseph, king of Turon, for that he had reprehended him in a letter, hauing beene commaunded by him to follow the sect of Zarducht, which was that of fire: This superstition began first in the prouince of Aderbaion, or Azarbajon, that is to say, of fire; and he that was the first inuenter of this sect was called Zarducht, that is to say, a friend of fire. Gustasph growing into choller, for the little respect which Ariasph did shew him in his reprehensiue letters, went to field, being accompanied by his brother Zarir, and Sphand••ar his sonne, with the greatest forces he could draw together, who marching di∣rectly towards Turon, gaue battaile to Ariasph, whom he vanquished, killing his sonnes and brethren, and without any longer stay he went against Turon, which he tooke and spoyled, and from thence returned into Persia: at his arriuall he caused his sonne Sphan∣diar [ C] to be put in prison, in a fort called Guerdkuh, in the countrie of Rudbar, for some jealousie he had of him. Whilest these things past in Persia, Ariasph hauing leuied a a new armie, entred the countrie, and tooke Balk, which he sackt, carrying away some of Gustasphs daughters, captiues; and not content therewith, he marched into the countrie with such speed, as Gustasph, hauing not the assurance to attend him alone, called his Councell, and resolued to set his sonne Sphandiar at libertie, and to giue him the charge of this warre; the which he refused to accept, or to go out of prison: yet in the end (at the entreatie of his brother Iamasph, and vpon his fathers promise to leaue him the realme if he returned victor) he went to field with a good armie, and marcht against Ariasph, to whom he gaue battaile, and woon the victorie, and so returned into Persia, whom his fa∣ther [ D] went presently to meet, making all shews of loue; yet he told him that this victorie was not much to be regarded whilest his sisters remained captiues in his enemies hands: whereat Sphandiar being ashamed, and not to faile of his dutie, he made choyce of foure and twentie thousand men out of the whole armie, of the which there were twelue thou∣sand foot, and twelue thousand horse, and being accompanied by his younger brother Buchutan, he pursued his enemie: but they resolued vpon the way to seperat themselues, which they did at three partings or wayes which went all to Turon, giuing the greatest to Buchutan his brother, where there were large meadowes, and the way more easie: giuing him charge that being come vnto a place called Paruindez, he should lie close with his troupes in ambush, least he should be discouered by them of Turon; and that whenas [ E] night came, it being the custome of that towne to make great fiers, he should charge home with all furie.

As for Sphandiar, taking with him some companie, they went by another way attired like merchants to Aphtkon, that is to say, seuen kings, or seuen lords, hauing carried with him many jewels and stones of great price (for it was the custome of Persians going to the warre, to carrie all their wealth with them) which way was much shorter than that of Buchutan: so as Sphandiar, with his companions, came to Turon within seuen or eight dayes, presenting himselfe in the habit of a merchant before Ariasph, with the jewells which he brought, carrying himselfe in such sort in his enterprise, as he was lodged in the kings palace: being aduertised that his brother was come to the Rendez-uous, he cra∣ued [ F] leaue to make the king and his courtiers a banquet the day following, the which he had a meaning should be performed in a field neere vnto the towne; so as by reason of this feast, he made many fiers neere vnto the walls. Buchutan, who was verie watchfull, discouered them presently, and then falling out of his ambush, he seised vpon all the pas∣sages,

[ A] and entred the towne with great furie, where he made a great slaughter, and sackt it, reseruing nothing for himselfe of the whole spoile but a throne of gold, inricht with fine stones of great beautie, with a white elephant. This being done, he freed his two si∣sters, whom Sphandiar deliuered to his brother Buchutan to conduct into Persia; he him∣selfe going towards the Indian sea to force certaine nations to follow the superstitious opinion of fire, from whence he returned into Persia, where he was kindly receiued by his father: but in steed of the realme which he had promised him, he caused him to vn∣dertake many great and daungerous enterprises, the which he executed with his honour. In the end his father would haue him seeke out Rostan, who had retired himselfe to Si∣ston, [ B] and came not vnto him in the beginning of his raigne. Sphandiar went, but against his will, onely to obey his father, to whom he said that it was not the accomplishment of his promise, and that he did ill requite the seruices which Rostan had done him: yet he went to Sistan, carrying with him a sonne of his called Bahaman, who going before his ••••ther, saw Rostan a far off descending downe a hill, to whom he went, telling him what that troupe was which he saw comming a far off, whereat Rostan was much amased, yet•• ••oing to kisse the hands of Sphandiar, he told him that the cause of his comming was on∣•••• to draw him to his fathers court: to whom the other aunswered, that his age should ••ow free him from such seruices, and that in case of necessitie they should find him al∣••••ies readie. Sphandiar insisted to the contrarie, so as in these disputes they grew to bit∣•••••• [ C] words, and defied on another, falling presently to armes: as for Sphandiar, he was held ••ne of the hardiest knights of Persia, and had reduced his aduersarie to such termes, as 〈◊〉〈◊〉 did but ward his blows; yet as extreame ••ecessitie doth breed new courage and force, ••••charged Sphandiar in such sort, as he gaue him a mortall wound, wherof he dyed pre∣••••tly, recommending his sonne Bahama to Rostan before his death, and his bodie to his ••••••ther Buchutan, who carried it into Persia, where it had a funerall pompe worthie of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 greatnesse: his father Gustaspph was much grieued, thinking to attempt nothing after 〈◊〉〈◊〉 death, yet the king of Turquestan comming to inuade his countrie of Persia, he was ••••••ed to raise a new armie, with the which he vanquished his enemie, and so returned 〈◊〉〈◊〉, whither he sent for his grandchild Bahaman, who was then at Siston, to whom he [ D] ••••••••••ed his realme, and retired himselfe to a place called Ghozghzar, there to spend the ••••••inder of his daies in a solita••ie life: this place was a house of pleasure, the which for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••xcellent architecture, they of the countrie said, that it was the worke of Solyman Ben∣•••• that is to say, Salomon the sonne of Dauid, thirtie miles distant from Scyras. Gustasph 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the citie of Asuartah, the which he called Herbant, and within few yeres after died, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 raigned one hundred and twentie yeres.

¶ Bahaman Daraz Dast, the seuenteenth king of Persia.

••••••er the retreat of Gustasph, Bakaman his grandchild succeeded him, who was surna∣••••••ed [ E] Daraz Dast, that is to say, long hand: they do also call him Ardchir, which is the ••••••ordinarie name they giue him in the Chronicles of Persia, the which was vpon this ••••••••on: his mother being with child, an Astrologer came to see his grandfather Gu∣•••••• and his father Sphandiar, whom after he had saluted, addressing himselfe to Sphandi∣•••• ••••d presenting him with a little basket, he said it was to put in the sonne which should 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of him, the which being vncouered they found nothing in it, but a vessell full of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a little meale, telling th••m that his smal means would afford no better present: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 princes were very well satisfied with the discourse of this wise man, and tooke so 〈◊〉〈◊〉 delight in his present, as they gaue name vnto their sonne of the things which he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 off••red: for Ard, in the Persian tongue is meale, and Chir, milke; these two names [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ioined together, make Ard••hir, which is the same the Greeks and Latins call Artax∣•••••• and of him many of his successors would be called Ardchir.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 prince was of a good constitution, hauing the right arme and hand longer than 〈◊〉〈◊〉: he was endowed with all the good parts that can be desired in a prince, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 others, he was so iealous of the commonweale, as when he sent any officers to

visit his realme, he put some among them in whom he had great trust, to serue as witnes∣ses [ A] of their actions, to the end he might reward such as behaued themselues well in their charges, and punish others that carried themselues ill. A yeare after he came to the crown he held an assemblie of his Estates, to whom he declared his intensions particularly, in∣treating them to tell him publikely and without feare, what they found defectiue in him, to the end he migh auoid it, and that if he did any thing vnworthie of a king, they should depose him, being more willing to obey, whereby some good might come vnto the pub∣like, than to gouerne without order, and to the preiudice of the realme. All commen∣ded his zeale much, and with great acclamations prayed the Gods to giue him a long and happie life: then hauing granted some things necessarie for their particular, he dis∣mist [ B] them.

Ardchir caused many buildings which had been ruined to be reedified, and gaue order for the gouernment of the realme; which done, he studied how he might be reuenged for the death of Sphandiar his father, which caused him to leuie a great armie, with which he marcht towards Siston, being vpon the way, he was aduertised that Rostan was dead, and that Framarz his sonne came against him with great troupes, who presented him battaile, the which was very bloodie; but Ardchir had the victorie which cost the life of many of his men: Framarz was slain in the fight, and Z••l his grandfather being yet liuing was taken prisoner, after which battaile Ardchir returned victorious to Persia, bringing Siston and Kabul vnder his obedience. He made warre by his captaines in Syria and Pa∣lestina, [ C] subiecting many people to his Empire, carrying many Iewes captiues into Persia. He had one sonne called Sasan, which was a great Philospher and Astrologer, who to fol∣low his studies more freely, left the court and all greatnesse, pretending not the realme after the death of his father, whereat all the subiects did generally grieue. He left his wife Homay with child of a sonne, whereof she was deliuered after his death. In his time Hyp∣pocrates did flourish (whom the Persians call Bokorat) and Democrites, whose writings they haue, with the workes of Plato, whom they call Aphlatum, of Socrates, whom they call So••••••at, and of Aristotle, whom they terme Arasto, or Arastatalis, and those also of Galien. They make great account of many Greeke authors, and it is the manner of the Persians to esteeme learned men, whose companie they affect, making vse of their authorities, con∣ceptions, [ D] and scentences: king Ardc••ir was wont to say, that a princes pallace should ne∣uer haue the gates shut.

But for that R••stan hath beene a famous personage in this historie, it shal be fit to vnder∣stand the cause of his death, the which happened after this manner: Rostan had one bro∣ther called Chagad, to whom he had giuen charge to visit his prouinces, and to receiue the rents and tributes which were due vnto him: going to Kabul to this end he fel in loue with the gouernors daughter, who was exceeding faire, and demaunded her of her fa∣ther; who seeing the brother of Rostan to be in loue with his daughter, refused him, vn∣til he had promised to free him from the subiection of Rostan his brother, and to kill him; this being agreed vpon, Chagad returned to Siston, where hauing some conferences with [ E] his brother, he made many complaints of the Gouernour of Kabul, that he had contem∣ned him, and entreated him ill. Rostan being full of choler blamed his brother of little courage, and caused souldiers to be leuied of all parts to punish this Gouernor. Chagad did ••is best to crosse this resolution, telling him that ••is presence alone was sufficient to draw him to reason: Rostan was well pleased with this aduice, and went with his brother, a subiect of his called Za••ada, and some few seruants of his towards Kabul, whereof Cha∣gad gaue secret intelligence vnto his father in law. The Gouernour of Kabul came forth in shew to receiue him, and hauing laid many of his men in ambush; being come to Ro∣stan, he craued pardon, as one that repented him of the errors he had committed, and Rostan hauing pardoned him, he of Kabul desired him to rest himselfe in a house of plea∣sure [ F] of his, whether he conducted him, so as they came into certaine ditches which he had made of purpose, being couered with bowes, into one of which Rostan fell with his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 who seeing plain••ly that he was, deceiued by the wickednesse of his guides, and that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 mis••hiefe was without remedie or hope, hauing poured forth a thousand iniu∣rious

[ A] speeches against him, he entreated him to giue him a bow and arrowes to defend h••mselfe against wild beasts, to the end they should not teare him in peeces liuing. They ••llowed of his saying, and furnished him with his desire: but whenas Rostan had them in his hand, he did put two arrows into his bow, shoo••ing them with such force, as notwith∣stading his brother and his father in law had before them the bodie of a tree which was ••••ere vnto them, yet he shot them both through, and slue them. It is an ordinarie thing ••••ong the Persians, to shoot two or three arrowes at one time, which makes this of Ro∣•••• to seeme lesse strange; and in this manner they died with him that had practised his ••••ath; for he died also with the rest, but the historie doth not tell after what manner. As ••or Kabul (whereof mention hath beene made, to the end we may enforme the Reader [] particularly) it is a realme sometimes subiect vnto Persia, and lies vpon the confines of ••ndia. In old time, they spent three whole moneths going from Kabul to Lahor, which at this day the Court of the great king of Mogol; and the center of all that which is ••alled India, whereas at this day they finish this journey in twentie or fiue and twentie ••••yes, the reason was, partly, for that they were forced to make a great circuit in regard 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the multitude of theeues.

¶ Homay, Queene of Persia, and put in the ranke of kings, the eighteenth.

[ C] O returne now to the historie, after the death of Ardchir, the gouernement of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 realme continued in Homay his wife, who (as hath been said) was with child, and at 〈◊〉〈◊〉 end of fiue moneths, deliuered of a sonne, who was ezceeding faire: whereupon (ac∣••••ing to the custome) they presently called Astrologers, to know his Horascope, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 should befall this royall infant; who answered, That he should be the cause of great ••••••••••ies and ruines to his realmes, so as many were of opinion he should be put to death: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ender affection of the mother could not yeeld to the death of her sonne, but she 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him to be put in a little cradle, and then closed vp in a coffer of wood, in the which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 put many pretious stones of great value, to the end, that if any poore man found 〈◊〉〈◊〉 might helpe to feed him, and breed him vp: with which things she committed [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the riuer of of Iehun, the current whereof had soone carried it farre from thence, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 comming neere the bankes, it encountred with a poore man that was washing of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, both for himselfe and others: (the Orientalls call these men Maynatos) who see∣•••••••• little coffer to flore vpon the water, being amazed at the noueltie of the thing, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••pening the coffer to see what was within it, he found a little child, at whose beautie 〈◊〉〈◊〉 much amazed, but much more whenas he beheld the treasure that was within it, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 made the launderer thinke that he came of some noble familie: carrying him then ••••••ence, with all that was with him, he brought him home to his wife, and bred him 〈◊〉〈◊〉 much care, calling him Darab, framing his name of the little coffer wherein he [ E] ••••••osed, and of the water whereon he had beene exposed: for Dar in the Persian 〈◊〉〈◊〉 signifies a table of wood; and Ab, water: Within few yeares, Darab growne able 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••omething, the launderer (who desired to haue him instructed according to the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 would haue had him learne some trade, but Darabs inclination could not be drawne 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the estate of his fortune could not make him loose the feeling of his extraction: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his supposed father sufficient testimonies that he should be vnwillingly drawne ••••••o••e things, and that he was more inclined to armes than any other vocation: where∣•••••••• ••he launderer knowing his humour, bought him armes, and furnished him in the ••••••••••ner he could, giuing him some small prouision to liue by, and sending him to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ome preserment by warre. At that time, Queene Homay was in warre with the na∣•••••••• [ F] R••mestan, against whom she meant to send a mightie armie; there Darab inrold 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and past his first apprentiship, the Persians of this armie had battaile with their 〈◊〉〈◊〉, in which Darab did such strange deeds of armes, as it held all his companions 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••azement, who talked of nothing but of his exploits. The affaires of Rumestan 〈◊〉〈◊〉 pacified, the Generall came to giue an account of all things vnto Homay, where

(among other things) he made mention of a souldier that was newly come into the ar∣mie, [ A] whom he could not cease to commend, which made the Queene desirous to haue him brought before her, of whom she enquired what name he had, and whose sonne he was; to whom he answered that his name was Darab, and that he did not acknowledge any other father and mother than a launderer and his wife, telling the cause of his name, and how he had beene found, as he had vnderstood from them: By this discourse, the Queene came to know that he was her sonne, whereof being assured, she deliuered the realme into his hands, the which she had held two and thirtie yeres. She built the towne of Gerbatkon, and set vp a thousand Pyramides in Persia of a strange achitecture, the which Alexander did afterwards cause to be ruined. [ B]

¶ Darab Kebar, the nineteenth king of Persia.

DArab, the sonne of Homay, being come to the crowne of Persia, entred into the go∣uernement with the generall content and joy of all his subiects, for the great opini∣on they had of him, the which was not in vayne; for he exceeded all his predecessours in bountie and wisdome, yea them that were held for good princes, so as he was not one∣ly beloued of all his subiect, but also of neighbour kings, except Phaylacus king of Yunon, (this is he whom we call Philip king of Macedon, father to Alexander the Great) who (growne proud by the victories which he had gotten in Greece) refused to pay the tri∣bute [ C] which his predecessours had long before payed to the kings of Persia; for which cause he tooke armes against Darab, who made warre against him, first by his Captaines, and afterwards in person, in the which Phaylacus was vanquished, and forced to retire himselfe into a fort, whereas Darab besieged him: yet there was a peace concluded be∣twixt them, vpon condition, that Phaylacus, and his descendants, should pay fortie thou∣sand Pesans of gold yearely vnto Darab and his successours: and to make this treatie in∣uiolable, Darab demaunded of Phaylacus a daughter of his, who was held for one of the goodliest princesses of her time, the which was performed: but she liued not long with Darab, who put her away for that she had an vnsauorie breath. About this time, Kari∣••ah (the wife of Phaylacus) was with child, (not by her husband, as some say) and deliue∣red [ D] of a sonne called Ascand••r, or Alexander. Darab, afer this warre, returned into Persia, and died soone after, leauing his realme to his sonne Darab, hauing raigned foure yeares.

¶ Darab Seguer, or Kuchek, the twentieth king of Persia.

DArab, surnamed the Little, the second of that name, and sonne to the first Darab, af∣ter the death of his father, came vnto the realme: he was of a bad disposition, with∣out courtesie, disloyall, and of a fierce aspect: so as for his bad qualities he was as much hated of strangers, as of his owne people, as his father had beene beloued; and he did so purchase the disgrace of his subiects, as they conspired against him, and resolued to deli∣uer [ E] him into the hands of Ascandar or Alexander, the sonne of Philip, to whom all the Vuazirs or Lords did write, with a generall consent, that he should speedily come into Persia, with all the forces he could raise, promising him all assistance, and giuing him councell to begin the warre with some colour, to refuse the tribute of fortie thousand Pesans of gold, whereunto his father had bound him.

Ascandar, who was by nature warlike, seeing an offer so conformable to his desire, lost not the occasion, but followed the counsell which they gaue him, and refused the tri∣bute. Darab, seeing that his subiect would shake off the yoke, sent to demaund it by an Embassadour, to whom Alexander answered, That they which payed the tribute, were [ F] dead. Darab dispatched a second embassage vnto him, by the which he sent him a little s••eepehooke, a bagge full of sand, and a cupboord of plate. There are diuers opinions am•••••• the Persian writers what these things did signifie: but the most common is, that by the first he would say he was a boy without judgement or consideration: by the se∣cond

[ A] he did signifie the great number of people he had in his kingdomes; and by the ••••st, the great aboundance of gold and siluer which he did enioy: all which together did shew that it was a great rashnesse for him (being so meane a companion) to oppose ••••••selfe against so mightie a Monarch: (for it was a custome of them of the East, to make themselues to be vnderstood rather by figures and comparisons, than by any long discourse.)

Ascander receiued this Embassage, being in field with an armie, not great in num∣ber, but all choice men, and of great experience in martiall affaires; who making an al∣••usion of all that which Darab had sent vnto him, he conuerted it to his aduantage for [] ••he good successe of his desseignes, and continuing his resolution, he entred into Asia without any great resistance. Being in Aegypt, he built a towne and called it by his ••wne name Alexandria, being in a port very commodious for his affaires; the which ••wne hath beene famous throughout the whole world: he also tooke Mecera, which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the great Caire, the which hath alwaies beene the chiefe of Aegypt, as their authors ••••ue left by tradition, it is that which the Latins call Memphis, the Hebrews Mesrrahen, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 since, the Arabians, Persians, and Turkes by corruption of the language call it Mes∣••••••a, being but a mile distant from her first scituation: there happened the fortune of chast ••••seph, and there the Prophet Moses was borne, and exposed vpon the riuer of Nile, ••hich doth bath the walls of this citie: and as for the name of Caire (which is that we 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it at this present) Mircond in the fourth part of his historie by the report of Teixeres 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the relation which he hath made of the Califes of Caire, after sundrie and variable ••••ccesse, he saith, That Messera (for so it was then called) came into the power of a king ••••lled Mohez, who sent from Damas a slaue of his, a great Captaine and Conquerour ••hose name was Iauuarkaden to gouerne this citie which was then vnder his power, for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 safetie whereof, he caused a fort to be built neere vnto it, the which he called Kayrch, ••onour of one of his Lords wiues, who had that name, and in succession of time this 〈◊〉〈◊〉 building encreased in such sort, as the name of Mecera was in a manner forgotten, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it is no more knowne in Europe, but by the name of Kayrch or Caire, the letter 〈◊〉〈◊〉 little changed.

Alexander passed from thence to Armenia, where he receiued a letter from Darab, [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which he exhorted him not to hazard a battaile, sometimes persuading him as 〈◊〉〈◊〉 had beene carefull of his good, and sometimes vsing threats. Alexander aunswered 〈◊〉〈◊〉 That realmes and empires were not held but of God, who gaue them and tooke 〈◊〉〈◊〉 away at his pleasure: and hauing dispatched his Embassadours, he continued his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 into the prouince of Aderbajon, where he encountred one of Darabs captaines 〈◊〉〈◊〉 kept it, and vanquished him, and from thence he entred into the prouince of Guey∣••••••••▪ This Gueylon was sometimes a great realme, but now reduced to a prouince and ••••••ded into fiue gouernments: the Persians call it Gueylon or Guylon; but the natural ••••••••bitants do call it Endsafet, that is to say, white India, for that it is very cheerefull and [] ••••••ant in comparison of India it selfe: it containes the port and entrie of many realms, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which they haue great trafficke, as Kefah port, and that chiefe citie of the Tartari∣•••••• the riuer of Astrakam: the people of Muscouie haue many other nauigable ri∣•••••• which flow into it.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 to returne againe to Alexander, leauing the countrie of Gueylon, he went into 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Nacudunia, and comming against the chiefe citie, he caused it to be burnt down 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the very foundation: from thence he entred into persia, whereas Durab came ••••••nst him with a mightie armie, betwixt whom there was a great and bloodie bat∣•••••• in which battaile Ascander had the victorie, and Durab fled from his campe, lea∣••••••g the greatest part of his souldiers dead vpon the place, and all his Treasure, ••••••••ues, and Daughters captiues, and in the power of Alexander. Many of Darabs soul∣•••••• followed him in this fight, whereof a good number were drowned at the pas∣•••••••• of a riuer, the which being frosen, many passed before to trie the foord, and hauing 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it good, Darab past, and then all the rest of his people followed, whereof many 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••edrowned.

Dara•• being in a place of safety, he sent Embassors to Ascandar or Alexander, pro∣mi••••ng [ A] him that if he would restore him his wiues and daughters, & returne to Greece, he would discharge him of the tribute which he did owe, and free him of the arrerages ••hat were due: and during this treatie, he sent other Embassadours to the kings of Ma∣char••k and India his vassalls and freinds, who knowing the state of his affaires sent him Tuccours; so as he drew together a greater armie than the first.

As for Alexander, he mockt at Darabs conditions, and offered him battaile againe, where he had the victorie, forcing Darab to retire into a fort, whereas some of his owne subiects gaue him many wounds with a dagger, and leauing him almost dead, retired themselues to Alexanders campe, who being aduertised of their treason, went with great [ B] sp••••d whereas Darab lay, where finding him readie to leaue his life, being much grieued 〈…〉〈…〉 him in that estate, he poured forth many teares, lifting vp his eyes to heauen, which ••e ••ooke for witnesse of his innocencie in that action: Darab aunswered him with thanks, tha•• he did beleeue it, entreating him to punish and take reuenge of those traitors, to ••a••••ie his daughter Ruchanch, and not to suffer his realmes to fall into the hands of stran∣gers. Alexander promised to accomplish all: then Darab hauing made many grieuous complaints of the miserie of mans life, and of the inconstancie of temporal goods (which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 describes very amply) died, hauing raigned fourteene yeares.

THE MONARCHIE OF THE MACEDONIANS. [ C]

Ascander or Alexander, the one and twentieth king of Persia.

AScander or Sacander, so called by the Persians, Arabians, and Turkes, and by an∣other name Zulkarnheh, which is the same we call Alexander, came not onely to the Empire of Persia, but also to that of Greece, India, Tartaria, and a great part o•• the world. The Arabians speaking of Persia, diuide it into two prouinces, both which they cal Hierakhen, the one halfe for the Metropolitan citie Isphaon, & that is called Hie∣••••kagemy, which is the Hierak of Persia: the other, Babylon or Bagadet, which makes a [ D] part of Arabia, and containes Aegypt, and other prouinces: this is called Hierakaraby, but when as they say Hierakhen, they meane both prouinces together.

All Persian authors say that Alexander was not the sonne of Phaylacus or Philip, but that a vassall of his called Kolùs fell in loue with his wife, who thought that the meanes to enioy her with more libertie, was to kill king Philip, the which he put in execution soone after: Alexander vnderstanding this, being accompanied by one called Barakus his chiefe captaine, found out the traytor Kolus and slue him with his owne hand. After which he went to Philip breathing out his last where after many complaints Philip know∣ing his death to approach, tooke Alexander, and set him in the middest of all the noble men that were present; requiring them to receiue him for king, and to yeeld him obedi∣ence: after which he deliuered him into the hands of Aristotle, to be instructed by him, [ E] the which he performed with great care: he taught him also what he should do for the well gouerning of his subiects, and then he died.

Alexander hauing conquered Persia after the death of Darab, married his daughter R••••b••••ch, the which doth signifie light, like vnto a candle which burnes. He deliuered the realme of Persia into the hands of a kinsman of Darabs, and diuided all his monar∣chie into foure score and ten gouernments, the which he gaue vnto so many captaines. He caused three bookes to be translated out of the Persian into the Greeke tongue, the one was called Teb, the which treated of Physicke; the other Noiun, of Astrologie, and the Mathematicks: (Noiun signifies stars in the Persian tongue) and the other of Phi∣l••sophie. He built vpon the riuer of Iehum, a towne called Maruoh or Karacon, otherwise [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 & that of Samarkand in Vsbek. Then hauing setled the affaires of Persia, he went to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the East; where hauing past many rough and daungerous passages he came to India. ••ut all this hath bin written at large by many authors, which makes me forbeare

[ A] to relate the historie more particularly. After all his great conquests, he died in Babylon, being six and thirtie yeares old, and hauing raigned seuenteene yeares. He commanded 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••wo and twentie great prouinces in three parts of the world, whereof the kings of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 did still accompanie him. The Persians admire the life of this prince, and haue 〈◊〉〈◊〉 many bookes of his braue exploits, as well in prose as rime, full of excellent con∣••••••tions and sentences, the which Mircond sets downe at large.

¶ AN INTERREGNE OR VACANCIE OF PERSIA.

[] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or the death of Alexander, the affaires fell into confusion touching the gouernement: so 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Persia had a vacancie, which continued seuentie two yeres, during the which it was gouer∣•••••••• by V••azirs or Satrapes, vntill it returned vnder the power of the descendants of precedent ••••ngs, which continued as followeth:

The Persians are commaunded againe by them of their owne nation.

¶ Chapur, the two and twentieth king of Persia.

••He seuentie two yeares of vacancie being past, after the death of Alexander, the Per∣sians made a king ouer them called Chapur, kinsman to Darab, whom Mircond cals his [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉, after the common manner of speaking of the Persians and Arabians, who call all 〈◊〉〈◊〉 kinsmen, brethren, a custome which is obserued in the holie scriptures. During the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Chapur there passed nothing that was memorable, whereof they haue made any ••••••tion, and yet he raigned (as they say) sixtie yeares.

¶ Ardchir Babakhon, the three and twentieth king of Persia.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 king Chapur succeeded Ardchir B••bakhon, which in the Persian tongue is the same ••hat Abumalek, that is to say, Father and Lord, or Father King. He was a good prince, ••••gouerned the countrie to the content of all men, according to the opinion of the [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉. This king raigned whenas our Sauior Christ was vpon the earth: whereunto obiections might be made which would be too long for this little discourse: We ••ot that during the time of Ardchir he had any warres, this king hauing past the fif∣••••••es of his raigne in peace.

¶ Chapur Zabel Ketaf, the foure and twentieth king of Persia.

R••chir left two sonnes to succeed him in the realme of Persia, the eldest was called C••••pur, and another younger: And for that they were verie young, they were com∣•••••••• to the gouernment of one of their vnckles called Ardchir, the son of Hormos, whom [ E] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the chiefe of the realme would acknowledge for king, and many Persian wri∣•••••••• him in that ranke: yet Mircond saith, that he refused it, and that he gouerned the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with great wisdome in the middest of many practises and conspiracies; after some 〈◊〉〈◊〉, when he saw it fit and conuenient, he setled Chapur Zabel Ketaf in the gouerne∣••••••••, who swayed that scepter whilest he liued, with great satisfaction to all men, being 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with wisdome and vertue, the which neuer wants some that enuie it; for Cha∣•••••• ••••eeping one night in the field where his pauilions were set vp: no man can say who 〈◊〉〈◊〉 into his Tent and strangled him; but so it is, at their going forth they cut the cords 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••upported his Tent, and so let it fall: They had by chance made choyse of a bluste∣•••••••• and raynie night, to the end it might be said that some gust of wind had ouerthrowne [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and killed the king, who died after this maner, and yet the conspiracie could not 〈◊〉〈◊〉 discouered. All Persia lamented the death of this prince, by reason of his bountie: he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sixtie yeares.

¶ Baharon Kermoncha, the fiue and twentieth king of Persia. [ A]

IT hath beene formerly said, that Chapur Zabel Ketaf had a younger brother: his name was Baharon, whom his brother had made gouernour of Kermon, and therefore he had the surname of Kermon••ha, as if one should say, king of Kermon, the which is a great pro∣uince, and one of the chiefe of Persia; in the which is the country of Karachon, famous in the East, for the commodities which are drawne from thence. Speaking of Chiraz, it hath bin obserued 〈◊〉〈◊〉 they drew from thence great store of Rose-water, as they doe also from Yazd, the which is made by infusion and decoction: the like done in Kermon & Dusgon, Rose 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is called by two names in the Persian tongue; some call it Gulap, and others [ B] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ul, which is asmuch to say, as the sweet of Roses, a verie proper name to shew that it is made by distillation, whereof they make great store yearely in Kermon, the which is transported into all parts of the East.

In three parts of Persia they make tapestries, which they call Persian, after the name of the countrie, and in Persia they call them Kalichey; the richest and most esteemed are made in the prouince of Yazd, & they are so excellent, that some are valued at a thousand duckats: the second in bountie, are those of the realme of Kermon: and the third, of Ka∣••••son. In Kermon they haue Tutia, the which is onely found in that place, and in the Persian tongue they cal it Tutiah: in a Canton of this prouince, some six and thirtie miles ••istant from the towne, they make it after this manner: They take the earth of that coun∣••••ie, [ C] & mingle it with pure water, then taking certaine flaggie turfes, they bake it in ouens like vnto earthen pots, and being well baked, they pollish it, and clarifie it vntill it come to the forme of Tutia, then they put it into chests, and send to vent it at Ormus. Herein doctor Garcia was ill informed, who in diologues which he hath made of Indian simples, saith, That Tutia is made of the ashes of a certain tree called Gunè. It is true, that in Per∣sia there is fruit called Gaon, of the forme and bignesse of a cherrie stone, couered with a little skin that is greene and yellow, which the Naturalists vse in many things as we doe the kernell of the Pine apple: but this hath a contrarie effect to Tutia, which is made in Kermon, in which place they doe also find another thing no lesse profitable than the pre∣cedent, that is, Lauronne, or Garderobe, verie good against wormes, which they call in [ D] the Persian tongue Dramnah Kermony, and the word which we vse of Kermez is drawne from that of Kermon: for Kermez is the singular, and Kermon the plurall, and of this Kermez, that is to say, of the graine, there are wormes made of the same name: and of this Kermez, the physitians make their confection, which they call after the same manner.

But to returne to Baharon, he was of a sound constitution, and of great judgement and wisdome, which made him to raigne with the generall content of all his subiects, whom he gouerned eleuen yeres, at the end whereof there fell a great sedition in court, the which was of such importance, as Bahaman was forced to go in person to pacifie. All things being quie••ed, one of his subiects, who desired but some opportunitie to doe him a mischiefe, shot an arrow at him from out of the presse, the which passed through his bodie, and slew [ E] him vpon the place, to the great griefe of all the subiects of his realm, who liued in peace vnder his command.

¶ Yarzd Gerd, the six and twentieth king of Persia.

THe Persians hauing lamented the death of Baharon, made choyce of Yarzd Gerd his sonne. Before his comming to the crowne he was much beloued and respected of all men, taking delight to be affable and courteous to euerie man. But whenas he saw him∣selfe king, he changed his good inclination into arrogancie, crueltie, and couetousnesse, shewing himselfe the more implacable, whenas he was intreated with teares to shew mer∣cie. He was wont to say, There was no hope of compassion in three things, that is to say, [ F] in fire, the sea, and in an incensed king. He was married, but he had great jarres and dis∣likes with his wife, for tha•• hauing had many children, she could neuer bring vp any one of them: but amidst his discontents, she was with child, and deliuered of a sonne whom they called Baharon, who hauing liued more than the rest, which not continued aboue a

[ A] mo••eth, by the aduice of his physitians, he sent him from court into a certaine countrie o•• Arabia, and deliuered him into the hand of a king his vassall, called Neamanben Amara∣••••••keis, a man of great trust, who brought vp that little infant in that good aire, instru∣••••••g him in the doctrine which was conformable to the religion whereof he made pro∣••••••ion: being come to the age of discretion, Neaman died, leauing in his place a sonne ••alled Manzar, as valiant and faithfull as his father, who had raigned fifteene yeares. In 〈◊〉〈◊〉 meane time Yarzd Gerd gouerned his realme with the generall dislike of all his sub∣••••••••s, for his tyrannies and cruelties, wherein he persisted to his end, the which was like 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his life; for in a time taking view of a horse of great price, the which did much de∣•••••••• him, the beast without any apparant occasion, stroke him twice with his hinder feet, [ B] ••ith such violence, as he dyed sodenly, and neuer spake, hauing raigned two and twen∣•••••• yeares and fiue monethes. Although his death was not much lamented, yet did it 〈◊〉〈◊〉 great dissentions among the nobilitie, for some would chuse one after their owne ••••••cies, and others desired to haue the custome of the realme maintained. But they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 that Ba••aron would imitate his father in his peruerse and bad dispositions, saying that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 should giue the realme to some one that might deserue it by his vertue. So as they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 were of this partie being the stronger, preuailed against them that would haue cho∣•••••• the sonne of the deceased king, and gaue the realme to one called Kezere Khozrrao his ••••ere kinsman, who besides the good parts that were in him, had gotten the realme with [ C] ••••ny faire promises.

Baharon, who was in Arabia, hearing of his fathers death, and in like manner of the in∣••••uations that were in Persia, he imparted it to Manzar the sonne of Neaman, in treating 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to assist him in the recouerie of his realme which of right did belong vnto him, and ••••ch Kezere Khozrrao did vsurpe vniustly. Manzar yeelded willingly to his request, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him ten thousand horse, with the which he began to march, then he himselfe follo∣•••••• after with thirtie thousand men more; all which together made an armie of fortie ••••••••sand, which being entred into the countrie, the Persians were much troubled; so as 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the chiefe went and ioined with him: yet Kezere Khozrrao went to meet him with [ D] ••••ghtie armie. Many were much grieued to see the ciuile war; so as before they came 〈◊〉〈◊〉, they laboured to compound the quarrell, treating in such sort, as Baharon was 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and obeyed for king; and the first that did acknowledge him was Kezere Khozr∣•••• whom many Persian writers put in the number of their kings.

¶ Baharon Gur, seuen and twentie king of Persia.

••••haron being thus settled in the possession of the realme, the first thing he did at the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••stance of Manzar, was to pardon all in generall that had past during the ciuile wars, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hat soeuer had bin attempted against him. After this he laboured to settle justice [ E] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••olicie, beautifying his realme with publike buildings, repairing the old that were fal∣•••••• decay during the warres, and building new. And as for Manzar who had bred him 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and had beene the cause of the recouerie of his realme, he sent him many rich pre∣•••••••• with great and kind thankes, keeping a sonne of his in his court vntill he grew 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 prince carried himselfe so wisely and mildly towards his subiects, and shewed such 〈◊〉〈◊〉, as he was beloued and esteemed of them all; and they blessed heauen which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 done him so great a fauour, to be come into the world vnder so good a prince, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 so full of felicitie: for he had setled so good an order for all things, and had so ••••••shed the frontires with strong garrisons, and wise gouernours, as they did long en∣•••••• very happie peace, during the which, the Persians had no thoughts but of their [ F] ••••••••ures, wherein they tooke such a habit (especially the vulgar sort) as euery man ••••••ght armes would be vnprofitable, for the continuance of this securitie.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the middest of thi calme, and whenas they thought to enioy their tranquilitie 〈◊〉〈◊〉 greater assurance, news came, that Hhakhon Chini king of the Tartarians, seeeing the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 wherein the Persians had gotten a habit, and assuring himselfe that he should

surprise them in the middest of their delights, leuied an armie of two hundred and fiftie [ A] thousand men, and inuaded the prouinces of Persia which lay neerest vnto him, where he committed great spoiles. This did strangely amase all the barons and chiefe lords of the countrie, seeing no forces readie to make head against the violence of so powerfull an enemie: whereupon they came to Baharon their king, representing vnto him the pre∣sent necessitie, who aunswered them very coldly, as if he had not much regarded what they said: and thereupon he commaunded to prepare all things necessarie for his hun∣ting. He had commonly in his court seuen kings his vassalls, whom he let vnderstand that hewould 〈◊〉〈◊〉 them accompanie him in those sports. These made themselues readie with a reasonable traine, and he himselfe tooke but three hundred of the best men of his guard. [ B] And thus they went altogether to field with faulcons, grayhounds, and all kinds of in∣••••••ments for hunting.

The kings and chiefe lords among the Persians haue beene alwaies giuen to hun∣ting, in which exercise they spend much, holding it for a marke of greatnesse. For this cause Baharon was surnamed Gur; which word hath a double signification, and in this place signifies a wild asse. His subiects gaue him this surname, for that he was much giuen ••o hunt that beast. It doth also signifie a pit, wherein they burie dead bodies: so as after the death of Baharon, Poets which sing his prayses, say that he tooke great delight in this ••ind of chase. And whereas Gur signifies a pit, it agrees well with their ordinarie kind of hunting in Persia. They teach their faulcons, and other kind of hawks in such sort, as they [ C] maister this great and furious beast: for the hawkes falling betwixt his hornes picke at his eyes, and trouble him in such sort, as he is forced to stand still; and in the meane time the huntsmen come and kill him. Besides their grayhounds and other dogges, which are exceeding good and swift throughout all the East, they hunt with tame ounces and leo∣pards, the which they dragge after them in carts, and priuat men carrie them vpon their horses. These beasts they arme with plats of yron, least they should be torne in peeces with their nailes. That kind of chase which they most esteeme, is of a kind of beast they call Gazal, which hath a bodie like vnto our roe buckes, hauing straight hornes, sharpe, and wreathed, great eyes and are exceeding swift. They haue also a kind of wild rams.

In India they do often hunt one wild beast with another: for they keepe many tame in [ D] their houses, which are instructed for that sport, the which they lead in leases like gray∣hounds, and carrie them with them a hunting, letting them slip whenas they find their game. But these tame beasts going to feed in meadowes, and meeting with any that is wild of the same kind, they rub one anothers hornes in signe of loue; and to this horne there is a cord fastened in such sort, as when the tame one retires, the other is taken in the snare. But in the prouince of Zeylan, they haue a strange inuention to take the elephant after this maner: they send into the forresta woman whom they call Aleah, with a Cor∣naca, which is an Indian that can speake vnto, and gouerne the elephant, whom he ties artificially to the belly of the Aleah, then putting himselfe betwixt them, he speakes flattering and wanton words to prouoke him, and when the Indian finds that he is suffi∣ciently [ E] moued, he bids the woman returne, and then the elephant followeth her home, and for euer after growes very tame.

As for the chase of tygres, whereof they haue great numbers in the East, they of the Island of Zeylan hunt them after this maner: A man armes his left arme vnto the elbow with strong plates well steeled, and in his right hand he holds a sharpe pointed dagger, then leaping against the beast, he giues him many stabs, and so kills him. There are many men exceeding actiue, and expert in this exercise: yet some loose their liues in the pra∣ctise; for the tygres of the East are exceeding great, and very cruell. The Nayres of this countrie which be the Pagans of Malabar, hold it a great honour to kill tygres. Teixieres, who hath made this obseruation, and trauelled ouer all the East, holds that this beast in [ F] respect of others, is very slowe, although he be cruell: but he saith that experience doth ••••ch, that what beast soeuer hath any scent of him, escaps easily, for that he cannot 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••im: so as his ordinarie hunting is after men, for that they cannot run so fast as beas•• being pursued: and this is the true reason saith Teixieres, why they do rather sol∣low

[ A] low men, and not for any desire of their bloud, nor for that their flesh is more delicat, and yet it might make them more eager, hauing once deuoured any. The same Author reports, That in Malaca, vpon the riuer of Parannaque, in the yeare of our Redemption ••••00, a Tygre did fight with a Crocadile, and that the like happened vpon the riuer of ••••••ma.

And to the end we may omit nothing worthie of note, which hath beene curiously ••••••erued by this Authour; (it depending also in some sort of hunting) he saith, That in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 realme of Champa (which is betwixt Camboya and Cochin China, vpon the South 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of India, throughout all the coast of Mardel) there are certaine sparrowes somewhat [ B] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to swallows, which at a certaine time of the yeare enter into heat, during the which, ••••ere comes out of their bills a slauer and glutinous humour, with the which (being ••ight by prouident nature) they go to the rockes and precipices, making their nests 〈◊〉〈◊〉 wonderfull art, building one vpon another vntill they come vnto a place that is 〈◊〉〈◊〉 drie; and they build their nests somewhat like to a spoone raysed vp on either side, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the which they lay their eggs, and discouer their young ones. These nests built after 〈◊〉〈◊〉 manner, are gathered together and sold; the Chinois pay for euerie Quintall fiftie 〈◊〉〈◊〉, which is about fiue hundred duckats: They eat them, for that they say they are 〈◊〉〈◊〉 wholesome for the braine and stomach: and some Portugals which haue tasted ••••ereof, affirme that they haue found much ease. But his digression hath been ouer long [ C] ••or this small discourse, the which notwithstanding I did not hold fit to passe ouer with ••ence, as curious things to content the Reader.

But to returne to Baharon, (being accompanied as we haue said) he fell to his sport of ••••nting, holding a contrarie course to Karason whereas the enemie lay, hauing left in his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for gouernour a kinsman of his called Narsy, whom some among the Persians put in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ranke of kings: he, with the chiefe noblemen of the realme, being persuaded that Ba∣haron was fled, sent Embassadours to Hakhon Chiny, to treat a peace with him, and to free ••••••selues in some sort from the daungers wherein they were. Hakhon accepted the of∣••••••nd being assured of Baharons flight, he desisted from his first furie, and neglected his ••••••ds. In the meane time, Baharon tooke his way to Aderbazon and Armenia, hauing [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with him his guards, and some two thousand horse men of whom he had made 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for their valour: with these small forces he marched by secret by-wayes, still 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of his enemie; and hearing that he was neere him, he sent three spies by three 〈◊〉〈◊〉 waies, to obserue the scituation of his campe, and their numbers: these men being 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and he particularly informed, and that they liued securely, and without guard: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 loath to loose any time, he diuided his small troupe, which consisted but of foure ••••••sand, (yet all men of action) into foure companies; and taking the opportunitie of a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 night, he went with his trumpets and drums to charge the enemie in foure 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with such furie, as being all diuided, and not able to make head in such a great ••••••fusion and darknesse, they disbanded, and were soone put to flight. As for Baharon, [ E] ••••••ent to the pauilion of Hakhon, who began to arme; but giuing him no time, he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and cut off his head; then following him that fled, he pursued them to the riuer of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, putting many to the sword. Many write this diuersly, but this is held to be the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 report. Thus ended the warre of Hakhon Chiny, king of the Tartarians: And 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••auing pacified all things in those quarters, returned into Persia, full of honour and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 riches, to the great admiration of all his subiects, who receiued him with much joy 〈◊〉〈◊〉 content. Afterwards, Baharon had a desire to see the countrie of India: the which 〈◊〉〈◊〉, being accompanied by some few of his subiects, leauing the gouernement againe 〈◊〉〈◊〉 (who is a gaine accounted by some for king of Persia:) going thus through the [ F] ••••••tie, he tearmed himselfe to be Vazir to the king of Persia, and that for some discon∣••••••tment he had retired himselfe. Being there, he serued the greatest king in those quar∣••••••s, for whom he did many great and worthie exploits, and by whose meanes the king ••••••ayned great victories against his enemies; so as finding himselfe much bound vnto 〈◊〉〈◊〉, in requitall of his great seruices, he gaue him his onely daughter to wife. Baharon 〈◊〉〈◊〉 married, and seeing no further cause of feare, discouered himselfe to his father in

law, to whom this news was not verie pleasing, fearing it would breed some innouation [ A] in his countrie: for Baharon hauing purchased great reputation by his valour, he feared, that being knowne, his subiects would affect him the more. But he had another dessigne, and the better to assure him, he tooke his wife, offering him certain lands of Persia, which confined vpon his countrie, and so returned into his realme, where hauing rested himselfe some time, he sent a C••••t••ine of his with a goodly armie to inuade the lands of Rume∣ston, that is to say of the Roman empire, where he tooke many places without any resi∣stance. Baharon himselfe went with an armie into Arabia, and inuaded the countrie sub∣iect to the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Hamon: There is a difference betwixt Hyamon and Hamon, which are 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in Arabia, neere vnto the realme of Sabaah, whereas that ladie was Queene [ B] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 came to Hierusalem to see Salomon, the countries being neere, and the way short 〈◊〉〈◊〉 frequented: for she was not of the countrie of the Abyssins, or of Aethiopia, as some 〈◊〉〈◊〉 held, which are remote countries. Baharon, hauing in his conquests gotten great ••••••tories, pursuing the enemies in the night, fell by chaunce into a poole or moore, where he was smothered and lost: the which was vnknowne to his subiects, by reason of the ••ight; whereof being aduertised in the morning, they went to seeke him with great speed, but it was too late. Such was the end of Baharon Gur, hauing raigned three and twentie yeares, leauing for successour a sonne called Yazd Gerd.

¶ Yazd Gerd, eight and twentieth king of Persia. [ C]

AFter the death of Baharon, Yazd Ger•• being come vnto the crowne, he made Narsy his kinsman gouernour of the realme, as sometime his father had done: so as he was the third time gouernour, and is againe numbred among the kings of Persia. This Yazd Gerd was a great louer of justice, wherein he was so strict, as no respect could make him faile in the execution; in regard whereof, he was much respected of his subiects during his life. In the foureteenth yeare of his raigne he leuied an armie against the king of Ru∣meston, but they came not to battaile, by reason of an accord made betwixt them vpon certaine conditions.

Yazd Gerd had two sonnes, the eldest called Pheruz, and the younger Hormoz, whom [ D] the father loued more than the other, and desired to leaue him the realme after his death: for this cause he sent Pheruz to gouerne the prouince of Nimrus, to the end, that by his absence he might not dispute the succession with the other, and the people might affect him more: Then, hauing raigned eighteene yeres, he died, leauing Hormoz for king. They called him Yazd Gerd Sepabd••xt, that is to say, a friend to souldiers.

¶ Hormoz, the nine and twentieth king of Persia.

HOrmoz was receiued for king after the death of his father, by a generall consent of all the people, whereof they repented soone after: for Hormoz being naturally wicked, [ E] he had dissembled his bad inclination, vntill he came vnto the crowne: so as the first loue of his subiects was conuerted into hatred. This being knowne to Pheruz his elder bro∣ther, from whom the father had vniustly taken the realme, he contemned not the occasi∣on, but made vse thereof, and by the fauour of his friends, especially of the king of Abte∣lah, to whom Pheruz bound himselfe to quit the lands of Termed, which lie at the entric of Karason, betwixt his countrie and Nimrus, vpon condition, that he should assist him with thirtie thousand horse, as he did: so as Pherus, with some other troupes which he ga∣thered together, entred into Persia, whereof Hormoz being aduertised, he went against him, and offered him battaile: but the armie was defeated, and put to rout, and himselfe taken prisoner. Some dayes after, Pheraz put him to death, as shall be said, hauing beene [ F] ••ing but one yeare. He was surnamed Farzand, that is to say, Sonne.

[ A] ¶ Pheruz, the thirtieth king of Persia.

PHeruz hauing thus seised vpon the realme, and studying for all things necessarie for the well gouerning thereof, he grew somewhat iealous of his brother Hormoz, who liued 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and had certaine practises with some of his subiects, especially with three brethren, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 familiar friends; whereof being fully informed, he caused all their heads to be cut off. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 beginning of this princes raigne was very remarkable, by reason of the great ••••ought that continued seuen yeares together in Persia, in such sort, as the fountaines [ B] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 dried vp; yea, and some affirme the famous riuers of Iehun and Degilah, which is ••••••ris: so as much people and cattel died for hunger and want. The fields were couered 〈◊〉〈◊〉 birds that fell from the aire for want of water, and the earth was barren, and yeelded 〈◊〉〈◊〉 fruit. Pheruz had a sensible feeling of this generall calamitie, and did what possibly he ••••••ld to helpe it, but the affliction was so great, as neither his trauaile nor his bountie 〈◊〉〈◊〉 able to preuent it. And seeing all prouidence and care was fruitlesse, he drew toge∣••••••a great multitude of people of all sexes and ages, with the which he went into the 〈◊〉〈◊〉, doing pennance, and imploring the diuine mercie: wherein they continued ma∣daies vntill that it rained; so as the earth began to fructifie, and beasts to profit and ••••••iplie.

[ C] After this, certaine people came to Pheruz to complaine that the king of Abtelah had ••••••led their lands. This was he to whom Pheruz had restored the lands of Tcrmed, for ••••••ccours of thirtie thousand men which he had giuen him for the recouerie of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Athio and Tornamire write, that this king of Abtelah was called Euthalitas, and that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 died in his ditches, whom they call Peruzas: the which is not strange, for that in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Arabian and Persian writing, there is a certaine affinitie betweene P. and F. and also 〈◊〉〈◊〉 pronuntiation: and as for the word Euthalitas, it is the same that the Persians call ••••••lah, the one and the other signifying water of gold. This nation lies vpon the North ••••rsia. Pheruz being aduertised of these spoiles, prepared to make warre against him: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which was soone knowne to Gox Nauuaz(for so this king of Abtelah was called) that [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉, a good player of instruments, whereat he was much amased: for he was neither ••••••rant of the power of the king of Persia, nor of the great courage of Pheruz. But a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of his, knowing in what perplexitie his prince was, offered to free him of this in∣••••••brance; so as after his death he would remember the seruice which he did him, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his wife and children. This being promised with all the assurances that the words ••••••rince may giue, being reduced vnto that extremitie; the Wazir retired 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and hauing caused his hands, feet, and nose to be cut off, he caused himselfe being 〈◊〉〈◊〉 maimed to be laid in a wood, where he knew that Pheruz and his armie must of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 passe. He was found in this manner by the scouts of the armie, who tooke him 〈◊〉〈◊〉 thence, and carried him to Pheruz campe: who being amased at this crueltie, de∣••••••ded [ E] of him who had so ill entreated him: to whom the other answered with words ••ompassion, that he was the Wazir of Gox Nauuaz king of Abtelah, who preparing ••••••elfe to make war against the king of Persia, and seeking (according to the duetie of ••••••arge) to diuert him from the daunger whereinto he did rashly run, for that his en∣••••••se did seeme too difficult to haue any good successe, he had taken his sincere 〈◊〉〈◊〉 affection in so bad part, as in steed of acknowledging his words to be true, he had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him to be dismembred as he might see, and to be cast into those woods, to the end 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hauing neither feet nor hands, he should haue no meanes to defend himselfe against 〈◊〉〈◊〉 beasts that might teare him in peeces. Pheruz detesting the crueltie of this prince, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 holding all for trueth that he had reported, comforted him, giuing him hope that [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in a short time he would take reuenge for so wicked an act, and of all other villanies 〈◊〉〈◊〉 this prince had committed. After many thankes giuen by the other, Pheruz mea∣•••••• to continue his intended course, the Wazir making shew to haue a great desire of ••••••nge, told him that if he would follow his directions, he would conduct him a shor∣••way, by which the enemie should not discouer him, Pheruz commaunded presently

that he should be put in the head of the armie, and that they should follow him. This man [ A] led them so cunningly, as in the end the best part of the armie perished for want of drinke, the which they could not preuent; and the small remainder with Pheruz hauing escaped this daunger, fell into the hands of Gox Nau••az, who entreating them with all clemen∣cie, set them at libertie vpon certain conditions, whereof the one was, That Pheruz should bind himselfe neuer to make war against him, neither by himselfe nor any other; where∣unto he agreed to haue his libertie.

Pheruz was no sooner returned into Persia, but he made a great leuie of men, to go against Gox Nauuaz, notwithstanding that his subiects sought by all meanes possible to di∣uert him: but their reasons and entreaties were all fruitlesse; so as he sent for a kinsman of [ B] his, who was gouernor of Sistom, called Sufarah, whom some put twice in the ranke of the kings of Persia: once in this place, and another time before; to whom he gaue the gouernment of his realme and of his two sonnes, whereof the one was called Belax, and the other Kobad, prescribing him an order what to do concerning the gouernment. He led with him a daughter of his that was of rare beautie: being come neere to Abtelah Gox Nauuaz went against him to stop his passage, yet sending vnto him to require him to obserue that which was concluded betwixt them: whereunto Pheruz lent a deafe eare. Gox Nauuaz had caused many deepe ditches ful of water to be made vpon the way, the which were couered so artificially, as no man could discerne them: and seeing Phe∣••••z wilfully bent to war••e, he made a shew of flying, the which gaue more courage to [ C] Pheruz souldiers to pursue him, who as it were assured of all danger without any disco∣uerie of those places by the which they were to passe, they run rashly into these dit∣ches where they were all drowned with, Pheruz hauing raigned six and twentie yeres.

Sufarah, who had remained gouernor in Persia, being assured of this losse, leuied a mightie armie with great speed, and began to march towards Abtelah forcing the king to demaund a peace, on condition to yeeld vp the captiues and spoiles, with the daugh∣ter of Pheruz, the which Gox Nauuaz performed with much griefe, for that he loued her deerely. This being done, Sufarah returned into Persia, whereof he made Belax the el∣dest sonne of Pheruz king. As for Kobad the younger, who pretended the crowne, finding himselfe wronged and disgraced by Sufarah, he went to serue the king of Turquestan. [ D]

¶ Belax, the one and thirtieth king of Persia.

AFter this manner Belax obtained the quiet possession of the crowne of Persia: and as for Kobad concealing the secret of his intentions, he continued his way to Turque∣stan, being accompanied by Bezarmeher the sonne of Sufarah his great friend, who was married, and had his house an familie in Nichabur. He entreated Kobad to do him so much honour as to passe that way, to the end he might receiue him in his house, and moderat his discontents by his good reception: wherein, at length he preuailed. This Bezarmeher had one daughter called Zarmeher, which was exceeding faire: Kobad hauing seene her, [ E] grew passionate in loue; the which Bezarmeher perceiuing, and being the thing he most desired, he offered him his daughter, wherewith the prince was much content, and tooke her to wife, of whom in time they had one sonne, whom some call Anuchiron, and others Nauchiruan.

Kobad hauing continued there some daies after his marriage, he left his wife in his fa∣thers house, and continued his way to Turquestan, where being arriued, he presently put himselfe into the seruice of Hhak••on Chiny, who at that time gouerned this realme, with whom he continued foure yeares, at the end whereof he demaunded a good armie of Hhakhon, in recompence of his seruices, with the which he marched into Persia against his brother Belax the king thereof, who gouerned it to the great content of all men. Kobed [ F] went to see his wife in Nichabur, where hauing dispotted himselfe with her and his sonne whom he had not yet seene, going on his journey, he had newes that Belax his brother was dead, hauing raigned but fiue yeares.

As for Nichabur it was a prouince subiect to the king of Persia, lying betwixt Karazon,

[ A] Vsbek, and Tartaria, a great countrie, and full of desarts and sands, the which (as some af∣firme for truth) doe boyle continually. It was in this prouince, that Tamerlan, or Tey∣m••rlangh, caused foure hundred thousand persons to dye in one day, (as the Histories of Persia report.) In Nichabur grow the stones which they call Turquestes, so called for that this prouince confines with Turquestan, and there are no pretious stones found in Persia, but in this place, except the Bezar stone, which is the most perfect, the which grows in Persia: this name of stone is called in the Persian tongue Sangh; and in the Arabian, Ager. But as for the Bezar stone, the Persians call it by excellencie Pazahar, that is to say, an antidote or remedie against poyson: for Zahar is a generall name for all [ B] poyson. In a certaine strait of Persia, called Sthabanon, of a citie which beares the same name, there is a towne called Lara, three daies journey from the way, in whose fields there is a great aboundance of a certaine kind of plant verie like vnto that of Safron, whereon the sheepe of that quarter doe feed, in whose stomach there breeds a certaine stone the which in bountie and vertue is preferred before all others; so as Scach Abbas, at this present king of Persia, esteemes them so much, as those which exceed a certaine weight belong to him. The naturall cause of this effect is their feeding, for the sneepe be∣ing transported into another soyle, yeeld no such stones. The inhabitants of this pro∣uince haue no haire vpon their head, the which a seruant of Scach Abbas hauing obser∣ued, [ C] he demaunded of him in recompence of his seruices, that euerie person of his realme that was bald should pay him a Cherafin, which is a peece of coyne of the value of a du∣c••at, which demaund being held ridiculous, he graunted: but he who knew the secret, put it in practise, and grew exceeding rich in a short time. As for the Bezar stones of America, they are of no such value.

¶ Kobad, the two and thirtieth king of Persia.

THe news of Belax death was the cause that Kobad entred more quietly into the posses∣sion of the realme of Persia than he expected, his brother hauing left no sonne to suc∣ceed [ D] him: so as many went to meet him, and to receiue him with as great demonstrati∣ons of loue as he could desire of his subiects. The realme was in the meane time gouer∣ned by Sufarah, who for his great bountie, & wisdome, was generally beloued, except of Kobad, who was much discontented to see him in this great authoritie, desiring to ruine him, and to make him away, the which he resolued to put in execution by the meanes of a hardie and valiant knight which was in his Court, to whom (hauing discouered his in∣tention) he made him consent to the death of Sufarah, whom, within few dayes after, he went to visit, where (descoursing of diuers matters) they fell to words, and in the end to armes, so as Xamo slew him.

About the tenth yeare of the raigne of Kobad there did rise vp in Persia a man called [ E] Mezdahk, which came out of the countrie of Sthahar, who sought to erect vp a new sect touching the veneration of fire, finding out new follies and superstitions. They called him a Prophet, and he did faigne that the fire spake vnto him, and did reueale many high and great matters, the which he made the vulgar people to belieue, with some other in∣••entions which hevsed. He allowed communitie in goods, wiues, children, and all other things: he did prohibit the killing of any liuing creature, propounding many other ab∣surd things vnto the people. Many which had not yet found out the falshood of his do∣ctrine, followed him to liue dissolutely and in libertie, among which was king Kobad, who commended him much; and they that followed him, honoured him greatly, esteeming him as a holie man. The chiefe and wisest men of the realme, who considered the daun∣ger that might ensue, and how much the king was deceiued, entreated him to put him to [ F] death, or to banish him: but hauing made many requests, and seeing nothing could pre∣uaile, they deposed him of the realme, and put him into prison, inuesting one called Ia∣••asp his neere kinsman, who is numbred by some among the kings of Persia. Kobad be∣ing restrained, the Persians sought to put Mezdahk to death, but they could not effect it, by reason of the great multitude that followed him, standing still vpon his guard; yet in

the end they made him away, as you shall heare. Kobad had a sister exceeding faire, with [ A] whom (being passionatly in loue) he married, hauing a dispensation from Mesdahk, who was not veriescrupulous. She seeing her brother and husband a prisoner, being bound by such strict bands to affect him more than ordinarie, sought all possible meanes to free him: In the end, she bethought her selfe of one which in her opinion might effect her dessigne: she attired her selfe therefore in her richest roabes and most pretious jewells to giue more lustre to her naturall beautie, and then she went into the prison where Kobad was, where, with presents and promises (which were not very lawful) she had such power ouer them that kept him, as they suffered her to sleepe that night with him, the which be∣ing past, she caused his bed to be emptied, whereinto he was put, and so carried him to his [ B] house. In the meane time she entertayned the guards, to giue Kobad time to retire him∣selfe, the which he did so secretly, and with such speed, as it was not discouered before he was in a place of safetie. Being thus gotten out of Persia, he went into the realme of Ab∣telah, hoping to draw some succours from the king, the which he obtayned not present∣ly: yet after some yeares, assisting him with thittie thousand horse, hauing drawne some other forces together, he entred into Persia: This bred a great combustion amongst them of the countrie, whether they should receiue him as an enemie, or peaceably, as their king. In the end, they concluded to receiue him with all submission, and the first that did acknowledge him, and subiect himselfe vnder his commaund, was Iamasp, to whom they had committed the gouernement: whereupon, Kobad requited their obedience by a ge∣nerall [ C] pardon for all offences past. He imployed the remainder of his raigne to reforme his realme. He was verie curious to build the cities of Bardah, and Guania, and to people others. He died of sicknesse, hauing raigned three and fortie yeares.

¶ Kesere Anuxiron, the three and thirtieth king of Persia.

KEsere Anuxiron or Nauchiruan (for they call him by either name) the sonne of Ko∣bad and of Zarmeher his wife, succeeded in the realme: he was endowed with many excellent vertues, for the which he was much respected and honoured, as well by his sub∣jects as strangers: hauing giuen order for the necessarie reformation of Estates, the first [ D] act he did, was to condemne Mezdahk and his followers to death, the which was execu∣ted with such rigor, as in a short time they were all extinct, although the number were in a maner infinit, freeing Persia of this pernitious sect. And to the end he might gouerne his realmes with lesse toyle to his person, he diuided them all into foure gouernements, the which he committed vnto men of great loyaltie and trust, and who were allied vnto his maiestie. The first of these gouernours had the prouinces of Karazon, Sagistam, Ker∣mon, and Maurenahar: the second, Isphaon, Kom, Aderbajon, and Armenia: the third, had Farc or Parc, which is Persia and Ahuua: and the fourth, Hierak, the which is about Babylon, and the countries of Rumestam, which is Greece. Hauing thus ordered all things, he leuied a great armie, with the which he conquered Tacharstar, Zabulstam, Ka [ E] bulstam, Iaganyan, and Abtelah: but being in this enterprise, Hakhon Chini, king of the Tartarians, inuaded his countrie, and tooke from him Barchach, Ferana, Kaich, Nesaf, Samarkand, and Bokara. This Samarkand is a towne of great strength in the countrie of Maurenahar, whereas Tamerlan was borne, who was a famous and renouned prince throughout the world, borne of noble parents, and not descended from a heardsman or a theefe, as some haue held, but from the bloud of Chinguis Cham, king of the Tartari∣ans, of whom we will hereafter speake: being come vnto the realme, not for his beautie, for he had but one hand, was lame and blind of one eye, but for his great valour in armes, he made himselfe maister of a great part of the habitable earth; he shewing him∣selfe mild and courteous to such as yeelded vnto him, and most cruell to them that made [ F] resistance. They did call him by his owne name Teimur, and he was surnamed Langh, that is, limping; whence grew the corruption of the name which, we giue him of Tamberlan. The Persians call him commonly Sahaybkharon, that is to say, a ruler of fortune. There is a particular booke written of his life in the Persian tongue, in an elegant stile.

[ A] After his death he left many sonnes, who diuided his Estates, and at this day, the great king of Mogol is one of them, whom the Persians hold to be one of the greatest Mo∣narches which are in the whole world, called Gelaladinakbar, and that he is descended from him in the eight degree of the direct line. The names of these great Monarches, ac∣cording vnto the opinion of the Persians, are, he of the Turkes, of the Persians, of the Tartarians, of China, and of Mogol, whose dominions extend from the riuer of Gan∣ges, vnto the realme of Makron, or the Persian gulfe: in which tract of countrie are con∣tained many great kingdomes, and rich prouinces. He is a Pagan, but differing from the rest, for that he followes no Sect, pretending to haue one priuat to himselfe: he causeth [ B] himselfe to be honoured as a God, and hath alwaies secretaries about him to write his words, and actions. The ordinarie guard of his bodie are six kings his vassalls, who liue continually in his court. There are many things worthie of obseruation in this prouince, which would be tedious to relate.

As for Bokara, it is a towne in the prouince of Vsbek, wheras Auicen was borne, whom the Persians call Boaly; he was very learned in Physicke, of whose writings they make great account; and they call him commonly Chequereis, Boaly Sina, or Eben Sina, that is to say, the lord Boaly, the sonne of Sina: he was nobly borne, but not prince of Vsbek, neither yet of Cordoua, nor a Spaniard. He did write many things which are to be seene at this day, and especially, a volume containing twentie bookes of Musicke, and he com∣piled [ C] all his workes in the Arabian tongue, rather than in the Persian, for that this tongue is more generall and eloquent: they held that he was ill conceited of the law of Maho∣••et. As for Physitians, this is to be obserued in Persia, that all Physitians keepe shops, selling drugs and physicke to such as haue neede of them; they call them Mulah, that is to say, Maister. But to returne to Kesere Anuchiron, knowing the entrie of Hakon Chiny in∣to his countrie, he sent his sonne Hormoz against him, with the greatest forces he could raise, who vsed such diligence, as he came soone neere vnto the enemie, to whom he gaue so many assaults and skirmishes, and vsed such stratagems, as hauing receiued great losse, being full of feare and amasement, he retired into his countrie, abandoning all that he had conquered; so as Hormoz returned to Persia with much honour. The Tartarian war [ D] being thus ended, Kesere had presently aduertisement that Kaled Beniulas Guasanij a cap∣taine to the king of Rumestan, had inuaded the countrie of Manzar, king of Arabia his vassall, where he committed great spoiles, and put many of his subiects to the sword; whereof Kesere made complaint to the king of Rumestan, demaunding restitution, and to haue Kaled punished, whereof the Greeke Emperour (which is the same that Rume∣stan) made small account: the which Kesere vnderstanding, he leuied a great armie, and entred into the territories of Rumestan by Mesopotamia, which they call Zazirat, and tooke Dara Medineyraha Kanserin, and so passing into Syria, he tooke Antioch, and other places; so as he forced the Grecian Emperour to demaund peace, the which he graunted, paying him a yearely tribute, in regard whereof he restored vnto him the [ E] countries of Chan, Zazirat, Heyaz, Hyaman, Thaef, Bargre, and Homan, all belonging to the Empire, the which he had subdued in this warre. Kesere had some yeares before married a Christian woman for her great beautie, who was much persecuted by this king that was a Pagan, seeking to force her to renounce her religion, wherein she conti∣nued constant. Kesere Anuchiron had a sonne by her called Nuchzad, who hauing suck•• the mothers religion with his milke, notwithstanding all his fathers threats, would not forsake it, whereat the king being much incensed, caused him to be put in a darke and strait prison, and to be entreated as one of the basest of the people, neither could the con∣stant patience and perseuerance of this young prince moue him to pittie. At that time the people of the countrie of Chan, which is Syria, reuolted against Anuchiron; so as he [ F] was forced to goe in person, whereas he fell grieuously sicke, being thought in Persia that he could not escape: this comming to the knowledge of Nuchzad, who was yet a prisoner, he found out meanes to free himselfe, and hauing gathered together all the Christians that were then in the realme (whose number was not small) hauing also drawne vnto his part a great number of souldiers, and (that which did most import) he had

seised vpon his fathers treasure, the which he diuided liberally among his people, placing [ A] new captaines vpon the frontires and forts of the realme, and displacing such as his fa∣ther had left, who hauing present aduice of all these innouations, sent Rambarzin a very famous Captaine whom he had left at Hierahk, that with all possible speed he should Ieuie men, and crosse the desseignes of Nuchzad, giuing him charge that he should not kill him, but seeke to take him aliue, and to put him in safe custodie, yet worthie of his qualitie.

Nuchzad had a Captaine called Chamaz Rumy, who presented battaile to Rambar∣zin; so as in the beginning the victorie seemed to encline vnto his side: but the valour of Rambarzin (who thrust himselfe into the middest of his troupes, fighting more cou∣ragiously [ B] than any one) was the cause that by his example they renewed the fight with more furie than before; whereupon he put the enemie to flight, in the which Nuchzad was wounded vpon the stomach with an arrow, his armes being not able to resist; so as within few daies after, he died, and could not be recouered, to the great griefe of Rambar∣zin, who caused him to be interred with that pompe and ceremonie which was vsed amongst the Christians. In the meane time Kesere hauing recouered his health, and pa∣cified the troubles of Cham, returned into Persia, whereas he preuented many practises against his Estate; and then he went to make war in India, and Selandyne or Seylan, the which is that we call Taprobana, where he made a peace with the king of that Island, paying him a certaine tribute; so as this Anuchiron commaunded ouer the prouinces [ C] of Maurenahar, Karazon, Darband, Hhezrran, Hyamama, Tabarstan, Gerion, part of India, Kermon, Parsi, the which is Persia, Aderbajon, Hyerakhen, Iazirat, Homan, to Hyaman in Arabia, and ouer many other countries to Magareb in Rumestan.

In the time of this king, there was brought out of India into Persia two famous books of Philosophie, the one called Kelilah, and the other Vuademana, with a chesse boord, which the Indians sent vnto the Persians, meaning to represent vnto them the inconstan∣cie and mutabilitie of humane things, and of mans life, which is a continuall warfare, and therefore they should gouerne themselues wisely. Mirkond saith, that for answer the Persians sent them a paire of tables, letting them vnderstand that as wisdome was very necessarie in this life, so must they be somewhat assisted by hazard, as they might see by [ D] that game. Both these nations are much giuen to these two games, and are very expert, es∣pecially at chesse; and it is a remarkable thing that they obserue the same names: for they call the kings Scha, which hath the same signification that king; and the queene Vazir, which is he that hath the supreme dignitie, he that the Spaniard calls Delfils, they cal F••l, that is to say, an elephant which serues in their Easterne wars; the knight, Asp or Faratz, which is all one; and the Pawne, Peada, that is to say, a souldier on foot, that which we cal Check, they tearme Scha, that is, to aduise the king, and wheras we say Mate, they say Schamat, which in their language signifieth the king is dead: and as for the name of chesse, they call it Schatranke, as if they should say, a sport or entertainment for a king: some hold that this game was inuented in Babylon. As for Kesere Anuchiron, he was very [ E] wise, and fauoured all wise and vertuous men in his countrie: he had many sonnes, but Hormoz was best bred among them, and the father did affect him more than all the rest; so as he caused him to be declared his successor befor his death, the which happened the eight and fortieth yere of his raign, recommending vnto him peace, concord, and the loue of his subiects. Mirkond hath made a relation of the vertues, wisdome, & great courage of this king, adding, that in his time Persia did flourish in all kinds of prosperitie: he was surnamed Adel, that is to say, the Iusticer, by reason of his great integritie in the admi∣nistration thereof.

¶ Hormoz, the foure and thirtieth king of Persia. [ F]

THings which are most desired after are not alwaies the best nor most profitable. Hor∣moz as you haue heard, was held for a good prince; but he chaunged his disposi∣tion as soone as he had gotten the reines of commaund into his hands. He was issued

[ A] from a daughter of the king of Tartaria; who when he saw himselfe to be in the quiet possession of his realme, made it appeare that he was a very cruell, vicious, and tyra∣nous prince: and to the end no man should contradict him in his le••d and bad course of life, he put to death all the great men of his realmes, depriuing all the officers of ju∣stice; and holding it an vnseemely thing, that there should be any other Iudge in his realme, but onely himselfe; and he carried himselfe so cruelly vnto all men, as it is con∣stantly maintained, that in the twelue first yeares of his raigne, he put to death thir∣teene thousand persons of great account, besides an infinit number of others, of whom mention is not made; so as many to flie this plague exiled themselues voluntarily from [ B] their countrie.

The Emperour of Constantinople (being aduertised of the cariage of this prince, and how all things past in Persia) would not loose so good an opportunitie, but sought to recouer these prouinces which the predecessours of Hormoz had vsurped of the Ro∣man Empire, and taking armes, he surprised the Persians, and entred into the countrie of Naciben before he was discouered. This Naciben, according to the tradition of the Persians, is Niniue, the which they, and the Arabians at this day call Mosul in Diar∣bek, or Karamite, the which they hold for certaine, saying that the Pehhanber did preach there, for so they terme him whom the Arabians call Naby, and we a Prophet, and they say that he was swallowed vp by a Whale: if this be true, Niniue was neuer [ C] wholly destroyed, seeing that it flourisheth at this day. The Christian Emperour ha∣uing entred the countrie of Naciben, sent word to Hormoz, that if he would restore that which did belong vnto the Roman Empire, he would retire backe againe with∣out any spoile: but the Persian making no pleasing aunswere, he past on, ruining all Armenia and Aderbajon, sending two captaines (whereof the one was called Abas Auual, and the other Homer Azarek) with good troupes of souldiers, to spoile the coun∣trie of Babylon. At that time Chabacha Hhakhon Chiny vnckle to Hormoz, and brother to his mother, seeing his nephewes distresse, leuied a great armie, the which they say did consist of foure hundred thousand men, not to succour his nephewe, but to seise vpon his lands, as he did; for passing ouer the riuer of Iehun, he entred into the coun∣trie [ D] of Karazon. Then did Hormoz find his owne error, hauing put the chiefe men of his countrie to death, there being few to oppose against his enemies: and in this confu∣sion of mind, hauing called them of his Councell, it was resolued to quit vnto the Em∣perour of Rumestan the lands which he demaunded, that hauing some assurance from him, they might conuert all their forces against the Tartarians, as they did: for king Hormoz hauing gathered together all his troupes, he gaue the charge to a Persian Cap∣taine, who was accounted for one of the most valiant at that day in all the Easterne countries, called Baharon Chuby, who was gouernour of the frontires of Armenia: be∣ing come to court, and hauing receiued his commaundement from the prince, he mar∣ched presently with his armie against the Tartarians, hauing with him only twelue thou∣sand [ E] souldiers, but they were men of great experience, with the which he durst boldly charge that great and mightie armie of Chabacha, and with such succe••••e, as the Tarta∣rian king was slaine with a great part of his armie, and many of them were taken priso∣ners. Chabacha being dead, the Tartarians aduanced his sonne, who continued the war with the like disgrace: for the Persians were alwaies victors, and especially in a great battaile, whereas the Tartarians where wholly defeated, and the spoile was so great, as Baharon Chuby did send by a sonne of his vnto king Hormoz twelue hundred and fiftie cammells, the which were laden with gold and siluer, with much rich moueables: but the worthie exploits of this braue and valiant man, were ill rewarded, for they ••hat were in this princes court, enuying his glorie and prosperitie, slaundering him in such [ F] sort with Hormoz, as growing iealous that he had some enterprise against his Estate, at his returne, he gaue him a prison for his welcome: but Baharon was so sensible of this in∣gratitude, as hauing found meanes to escape, he entred into practise with Kozrra•• Par∣uez eldest sonne to Hormoz, giuing him meanes to rebell against his father, who pre∣sently

coyned money with his name and armes, stiling himselfe king of Persia. He had [ A] two vnckles by his mother, who serued him for supports, the one was called Ban••u••ye, and the other was called Bostan. King Hormoz hearing of all his conspiracies, sought by all meanes possible to stop the course of his proceedings, the which the others vn∣derstanding, and finding themselues to be too weake to resist him, they fled. Kozrr••o reti∣red into Armenia, and from thence they went vnto Aderbajon; and as for the two brethren of Hormoz, they were put in prison: but finding meanes to escape, they ga∣thered together new forces, and surprised Hormoz, whenas he least thought of them; so as he fell into their power: but they did not entreat him after the like manner, for they put out his eyes. Kozrrao being aduertised of all these troubles, returned into Persia, [ B] where he was recei••ed for king, and seeing himselfe setled in his Estate, he went and cra∣ued pardon of his father, the which he graunted, so as he would take reuenge of his two vnckles, who had depriued him of his fight.

Persia being thus in combustion, Baharon Chuby who had beene the cheife motiue of these diuisions, the which in shew he had attemped to reuenge an iniurie, conuer∣ted his reuenge into ambition, aspiring vnto the crowne of Persia; so as with a pow∣erfull a••mie, he did ouerrunne the countrie of Persia, and committed great spoiles: against whom Kozrrao Paraez comming vnto battaile, he was vanquished, and forced to flie vnto Constantinople; with his two vnckles the which did accompanie him, who gaue him counsell to take away all pretex••s from his enemies, and to put his father to [ C] death; for in so doing, there was no more feare: but they seeing that the loue of a fa∣ther had more power ouer this prince, than the desire of raigne, fained an occasion to retire themselues, and leauing Paruez there, they went whereas Hormoz remained, whom they strangled with a bow-string: such was the end worthie of the life and cru∣••ltie of this prince.

As for Kozrrao Paruez, who as we haue said had retired himselfe vnto the Grecians, he married the Emperours daughter, who assisted him with one hundred thousand men to recouer his countrie, sending with him a sonne of his the which was called Ben Athus, in recompence whereof, Kozrrao Paruez gaue him a great peece of the holie crosse, the which his father Hormoz had in his custodie. Kozrrao being vpon the way with this good∣ly [ D] armie, encountred his enemie Baharon in Persia (who by many is put among the number of kings) and both armies being in battaile one against another, there came out of Baharons campe three captaines, who defied the brauest of the aduerse part; Kozrrao seeing the brauerie of these men, caused himselfe to be armed, and went out of his campe to fight with them against the will of his brother in law, who dissuaded him to the contrarie, in which combat he carried himselfe so valiantly, as he vanquisht all thr••e one after another; the which the souldiers of Baharon admiring, they abando∣ned their captaine, and went to Korzraos partie; so as Baharon was forced to flie into Turquestan, and to leaue Persia: after which he went to serue Hhakhon Chiny, where he died soone after. [ E]

¶ Kozrrao Paruez, the fiue and thirtieth king of Persia.

KOzrrao Paruez being thus freed from all troubles and in quiet possession of the realme of Persia, he performed that which he had promised to his father, commit∣ting to prison his vnckles Boston and Banduhye, who had put him to death, whom he punished very seuerely. In the foureteenth yeare of the gouernment of this prince, the Grecians reuolted against their Emperour, whom they did kill, with his sonne Ben Athus who had accompanied Kozrrao, as hath beene said, in his recouerie of Persia, his younger brother escaped with much difficultie, who retired himselfe to Paruez by [ F] whom he was receiued, and entreated with much honour, giuing him good troupes l••d by valiant captaines, for the recouering of his Estate, who going out of Persi••, en••red into Syria and Palestina, marching towards Constantinople, committing great spo••le••▪

[ A] and carrying away many prisoners with them. The Grecians after the death of their Emperour, had chosen in his place one called A••col, or Heraclius, a man of great wise∣dome and valour, who hearing of the Persians comming, marched against them, and gaue them battaile, in which he vanquished them, and s••ew sixteene thousand Persians vpon the place; but the greatest part of their armie turned their backes, and fled into their countrie.

About the thirtieth yeare of the raigne of Kozrrao, there did rise at Medina in Arabia, that false and pernitious Prophet Mahomet, who writ to many princes and lords of those countries, entreating them as it were from God, to heare and follow his doctrine: among [ B] others he did write to Kozrrao, who was so far from assenting to him, as he gaue him 1000 curses: yet his accursed sect encreased in Arabia and other neighbour prouinces. But to returne to Kozrrao, the Grecian warre being ended, he liued in peace; and being in his town of Madahem, he dreamt that he was in a citie enuironed with strong walls, hauing eleuen towers, all which were ruined to the foundations successiuely one after another; so as the citie was without any fortifications: being awake, and much troubled at his dreame, he sent for the Diuines and Astrologers, demaunding the signification thereof: whereof one among the rest aunswered, that the eleuen towers did signifie eleuen kings, which should gouerne Persia, after which that Monarchie should haue an end. Korzrrao to preuent this prediction and ruine, thought that this alteration might grow by the dis∣cord [ C] of his children: wherefore he caused them to be taken, forbidding them to frequent or speake with any man, no not with their owne wiues. Among all his children, there was one called Ch••rear, who of all his wiues loued one whose name was Cherin for her great beautie: this word Cherin in the Persian tongue signifies sweet, and it is found in a booke of that language, intituled Kozrrao Cherin, which a prince of that countrie (not he whose life we now describe, but another of lesse qualitie) hath compounded in elegant verse, whereof the Persians make great account, as being full of gallant conceptions, wherein they are great artists. Charear remembring his Cherin, and being strangely distempered with the losse of his deerest sight (as loue neuer wants inuention) he found meanes to free himselfe of this griefe, fayning himselfe to be sicke, and that of necessitie he [ D] must be let blood: whereupon Cherin by the aduice which he had giuen her, disguised herselfe in the habit of a surgeon, and came vnto him into the prison, where hauing re∣mained some time with her husband, she retired himselfe; but she was conceiued of a sonne whom she called Yasdgerd, who was bred vp in the house of king Kozrrao his grandfather without his priuitie, vnto the age of fiue yeares, the which being made knowne vnto him, he commaunded that the child should be put to death, wherein he shewed himselfe to be so resolute, as nothing could alter his determination. The which the mother vnderstanding, she went vnto him, and preuailed so by her prayers and intreaties, as he was not put to death, but carryed into some desart or solitarie place, and there exposed to the mercie of wild beasts (the which is related in this place for [ E] the vnderstanding of that which shall be spoked hereafter) so as the credit which Kozr∣rao gaue vnto this wizard made him suspitious, couetous, fearefull, proud, and hated of all his subiects, of whom he put many to death without any other reason but his owne fancie; among the which there was one called Neaman, nephew to Manzar, who had done him great seruices.

Kozrrao Paruez had raigned eight and thirtie yeares in Persia, whenas his subiects no longer able to endure his crueltie and tyrannies, by a common consent deposed him of the crowne, deliuering it into the hands of a captaine, in whom they had great confi∣dence, and they setled his sonne called Kobal Chyruyhe in the royall throne: this happened in the ninth yeare of the Egyra, according to the account of the Mahometans, and in the [ F] yeare of Grace 631. This Kozrrao Paruez is he whom we call Kosdroez.

¶ Kobal Chyruyhe, the six and thirtieth king of Persia. [ A]

THe Persians thought that this change had somewhat eased their affections, and that they should receiue all good vsage from this prince; but they had soone cause to re∣pent it, for that seing himselfe confirmed in the Royaltie, the first act he did, was to kill his father being a prisoner, the which did soone purchase him▪ the generall ha∣t••••d of all his subiects; for notwithstanding that this prince was hated for his bad con∣ditions, yet was not there any one that would pollute his hands with the bloud of his prince: but within few daies after his election, one called Merehe Hormoz (sonne to [ B] one Mordomcha whom Paruez had commaunded to be slaine) offered himselfe to Kobal to commit this parricide, who entring into the prison whereas Kozrrao remained, with∣out any other respect or complement, he vsed these termes: It is iustice to kill him that hath slaine my father, wherewithall he cut off his head. Returning vnto Kobal who was much satisfied with the deed, he demaunded of him how he had proceeded in this acti∣on; who expecting some great reward, told him the words which he had vsed cutting off his fathers head: to whom Kobal aunswered presently, that is was reasonable to kill him that had slaine his father. But not satisfied to haue made away him that had giuen him life, he wrought so with his Waz••rs and Gouernors, as he slew his fifteene brethren the which was sodenly effected. After this there fell a great plague vpon Persia, with the [ C] which it was much afflicted; so as vpon the subiect of these calamities, the two sisters of Kobad (whereof the eldest was called Turon Dokt, and the younger Azarmy Dokt) tooke occasion to reprehend him, telling him that his sinnes and impieties (hauing put his father and brethren to death) were the cause of all those miseries, the which the Gods had sent them, threatning him yet with worse, and therefore he should repent him of the crimes which he had committed, and amend his future life, as well for the feare of God, as for the shame of men. Such words spake his sisters vnto him, the which wrought such an impression of the villanies which he had committed, as the violence of his griefe and passion cast him into a great sicknesse, whereof he died within three daies, hauing raigned but eight moneths: he left a sonne which succeeded him in the realme. [ D]

¶ Ardchir Chyruyhe, the seuen and thirtieth king of Persia.

AFter the death of Kobad, the Persians did presently settle Ardchir Chyruyhe his onely sonne in the royall throne, being yet but seuen yeares old. But a kinsman of his cal∣led Charear or Gher Khan, who was then gouernour of the prouince of Agen, hearing of the death of Kobad, and knowing how young his successor was, thought it a fit oppor∣tunitie to effect his desseignes: whereupon he gathered together all the forces he could, and came to court, where he slew the young king, with many that thought to defend him: and then being fauoured by the souldiers, especially by such as he had brought with [ E] him, he declared himselfe king of Persia, young Ardchir hauing carried the title of king but fiftie daies.

¶ Charear a tyrant, the eight and thirtieth king of Persia.

CHarear hauing thus seised vpon Persia by the death of Ardchir, and of such as oppo∣sed themselues: he did what he could to winne the hearts of the noblem••n of the realme, trying all possible meanes, but he could not preuaile. There were at that time in court three brethren of a noble familie, and very valiant, who grieuing to see this man raigne, could not endure a tyrant should commaund ouer them: so as being of one will, [ F] they resolued to kill him: whereupon going to horsebacke on a time at his pallace gate, they ouerthrew him, and slew him with their daggers, being fauoured by the people who desired his death, hauing raigned but one yere, some say but fortie daies.

[ A] ¶ Ioon Chir, the nine and thirtieth king of Persia.

THe Persians being thus freed from the tyrannie of Charear, gaue the realme to Ioon Chir (this word signifies a faire Lyon, or a young Lyon) kinsman to the deceased king; he was cousin to Baharon Chuby, who made warre against Kozrrao Paruez. He gaue great hopes of a generous prince, if death had not preuented his intentions, depriuing him both of life and kingdome at one instant, the which he enioyed but one yeare.

[ B] ¶ Turon Dokt, the fortieth queene of Persia.

TO Ioon Chir succeeded in the realme of Persia Turon Dokt, daughter to Kozrrao Par∣uez, the eldest of the two which had blamed Kobad their brother: this name of Turon is the proper name of a woman, and Dokt signifies a damsell or virgin: she was verie wise and of good gouernement, setling her realmes in peace, and punishing such as were se∣ditious seuerely: she reformed justice, and reedified many publique buildings which had beene ruined by iniurie of time: she made one of the three brethren which had killed the tyran Charear, supreame Vuazir of all her realmes, and made a strict league with the king of Rumestan, that is to say, the emperour of Constantinople: but whenas her subiects [ C] began to reape the benefit of her gouernement, death tooke her from them, hauing go∣uerned but six moneths, and six dayes.

¶ Iasancedah, the one and fortieth king of Persia.

AFter the death of Turon Dokt, the Persians made choyce of Iasancedah, at whose ele∣ction there was great dispute, but in the end he was admitted: some write, that when∣as they did set the Tagè vpon his head, the which we call a crowne, he said, that it was too ••eightie, and that he would none of it: some say, that it was to shew the burthen and [ D] weight of gouernements: others affirme, that it was for meere ignorance, which opinion is more probable, for that the Persians being ill satisfied with his person, deposed him as ••g••ominiously, as they had chosen him rashly, hauing raigned but six dayes.

¶ Azarmy Dokt, the two and fortieth queene of Persia.

IAsancedah being thus deposed from the Persian crowne, they gaue the gouernement to Azarmy Dokt, second daughter to king Kozrrao Paruez, and younger sister to Turon Dokt, endowed with singular beautie, and of great vnderstanding. At that time, there was go∣uernor of the prouince of Karason, and euer since the raigne of Paruez, a renounced cap∣taine [ E] called Ferrok Hormoz, who, allured by the fame of Azarmys beautie, came to Court, as if he had beene forced to leaue his prouince for some speciall affaires of the realme, leauing a sonne of his in his place to gouerne, hauing an intent to court the queene, and to make loue vnto her, the which he did with such importunitie and inciuilitie, as she was forced for her honours sake to make him away, causing him to be put to death: the which being made knowne vnto his sonne called Iuego, who was in Karason, he grew into s••ch furie, as hauing speedily leuied an armie, he came sodenly to Court, where he mu••••hered the queene cruelly, hauing no regard to her prayers and complaints. She raigned but six moneths.

¶ Kesere, sonne to Iasancedah, the three and fortieth king of Persia.

[ F] TO Azarmy Dokt succeeded Keserè, sonne to Iasancedah, who (as we haue form••rl•• said) had beene deposed for his insufficiencie: but the sonne being no more capable, nor of a better life and gouernment than his father, he gaue occasion vnto his subiects, by rea∣son of his follies and indiscretions, to kill him, hauing raigned but one yeare.

¶ Ferrogzad, the foure and fortieth king of Persia. [ A]

SPeaking of the raigne of Kobad Kyruyhe, it was said that he slew his fifteene brethren, the which stroke such a feare and terrour into all the rest of his kindred, as euerie man desiring to flie the furie of this prince, saued himselfe where he could; but after his death, some returned into Persia, among the which was Ferrogzad, the sonne of Kozrrao, and ne∣phew to Kozrrao Paruez, whose qualitie being well knowne, he was made king, giuing great hope to be a verie good prince, if he had liued longer, but he died within a moneth being poysoned by his slaue. [ B]

¶ Iazdgerd, the fiue and fortieth and last king of the Persians of their owne nation.

IN the life of Kozrao Paruez it hath beene obserued, that whenas Charear his sonne was a prisoner, seeking to hinder the prediction of his dreame, he had by his wife Cherin a sonne called Iazdgerd, which being afterwards knowne vnto his grandfather, he had cau∣sed him to be opposed to wild beasts in a forrest, where hauing remayned some time, cer∣taine heardsmen passing by tooke him vp, and being moued with pittie, gaue him bree∣ding, not knowing what he was: but as time discouers all things, this young infant com∣ming [ C] to age, found meanes to know his beginning, by the knowledge whereof being car∣ried to higher things than the place did beare, where he had beene bred, he went from thence, and came to the king of Persias Court, where he carried himselfe so discreetly, as in the end he was acknowledged for what he was: so as afterwards they made him king of Persia, where (hauing gouerned well for the space of nineteene yeares) a great multi∣tude of Turkes came from Turquestan, and entred into Persia by Nahaoand, making a great spoyle where they past; so as they forced Iazdgerd to retire into the countrie of Ka∣••ason, where he had another aduertisement that the Arabian captaines of Mahomets sect were entred into his countrie by another by-way; who (preparing to march against them, heard that they were neere him, and came to encounter him: whereupon, he re∣returned [ D] to Karason, where he died sodenly, hauing raigned twentie yeares. He was the last of the Persians descending from Kayumarraz, in whom ended the Persian monarchie, which past vnto the Califes successours to Mahamet, who first planted their seat in Kufa, and afterwards in Bagaded, as shall be said.

¶ The kings of Persia since that the Arabians began first to commaund there vnto our dayes, according to the Persian Historiographer Mirkond. [ E]

ALl things are found so confused at this new change of the lords of Persia, as it is hard to giue any beginning to a true and sinsere relation: yet the Histori••grapher Mirkond, hauing somewhat explaned the Chronologie, the Reader may find a course of kings continued also in this familie of the Kalifes, and other Arabian princes which haue gouerned Persia, as he hath done in that of Kayumarraz.

He saith then, That Mahomet, the false Prophet, hauing commaunded ouer many nati∣ons for the space often yeares, at his death he left his Estate much confused, by reason of the diuisions which grew amongst his chiefe captaines: but after many great disputes, the soueraigntie fell into the hands of Abubakar, who was the first that caused himselfe [ F] to be called Calife, a tytle which his successours would afterwards hold: for as these ty∣rants would ground their empire vpon a shew of religion, so they couered their am∣bition and auarice with godly names of holinesse and pietie: As this, amongst others, which signifies giuen to God; yet it hath an encounter contrarie to their intention, for

[ A] their meaning was, that they were giuen of God for the sauing of the people, and they were sent as a scourge for their punishment. This Abubakar continued the conquests of his predecessor; but his time was short, for he gouerned but two yeares and a halfe.

¶ Homar, the second Calife, and first king of Persia, after that the Arabi∣ans had conquered it.

AFter the death of Abubakar, the Mahome••ans scepter fell into the hands of Homar, who hauing hold it ten yeares and a halfe, seeing his enterprises to succeed in all things, and being aduertised how much Persia was inf••sted by the Turkes, he thought he [ B] should giue a great increase to his commaund, if he should inuade it, as he did in the time of Iazdgerd, as hath beene said, the which succeeded so happily by the sodain death of the king of Persia, as he made himselfe absolute lord of that realme, with more speed and facilit••e than he could imagine, setling for himselfe, and his successours, Califes, his royall seat at Bagaded▪ He died a yeare after, about the yeare of Grace 655, and of the Egyra, or yeares of Mahomet, 33.

¶ Osman or Otman, the third Calife.

[ C] OTman succeded Homar, of whom our Historian writes nothing but that he raig∣ned eleuen yeares and a halfe; for the Mahometan warres, and the furie of their armes were rather turned against Europe than Asia, the which was in a manner all at their deuotion.

¶ Aly, the fourth Calife.

MAhomet the false Prophet, after his death, left a cousin German, who was also his sonne in law, called Aly, and by the Persians, Morts Aly, who came vnto the Maho∣metan [ D] crowne after Otman, whose followers tell of his great conquests and speake won∣ders of his valour, the which are more ridiculous than true. This was he that began the first diuorce in the Mahometans sect, the which hath continued vnto the Sophies, who say they are descended from him; and they haue beene alwayes enemies to the Eunis, who hold one beliefe with the Turkes. He raigned but foure yeares and a halfe, being treacherously slayne by a seruant of his in the citie of Cufa in Arabia. His Sectaries say, that finding him dead, they washt his bodie, and imbalmed it according to their cu∣stome, then they layed it vpon a camell (for they say he had so ordayned before his death) suffering it to go at will, following it continually, vntill after many turnings, it stayed in a desart of Arabia neere vnto Cufa, where they did erect a verie stately sepul∣chre, [ E] to the which his followers in time bringing many gifts and offerings, they built a verie sumptuous and faire Mosquee, of rare architecture: but deuotion grow∣ing cold in processe of time, and their accustomed presents and offerings fayling there∣with, this building hath also lost much of the lustre, a good part of it being fallen to ruine.

¶ Acem, the fift Calife.

THe death of Aly bred great dissention among the Arabians for the succession, for that some would haue Acem, sonne to Aly, succeed his father: others would haue Mauuia, the sonne of Safion, sonne to Harb, of the race of Ben Humya; yet after much [ F] dispute, they did chuse Acem, Calife, who enioyed it but six moneths.

¶ Mauuia, the sixt Calife. [ A]

MAuuia came in the end to be Calife, after the death of his competitor, in the yeare of Grace 662, and of the Egyra 41, the which he enioyed twentie yeares, during the which, he did not any thing touching Persia worthie of memorie. During the time of his contention with his predecessour (for he had beene well serued and assisted by a great and famous Captaine called Abdalazyad, to whom for recompence Mauuia gaue the citie of Basora, which is neere vnto the riuers of Tygris & Euphrates, about the place where they joyne together, and so fall into the Persian gulfe. Mauuia died in the yeare [ B] of our Redemption 682, and of the Egyra 61.

¶ Yhezid, the seuenth Calife.

YHezid, sonne to Mauuia, succeeded his father in the Califat and seigneurie of Persia, whereof he had no sooner taken possession, but Ocem, sonne to Aly, nephew to Ma∣homet, and brother to Acem, made warre against him, and gaue him battaile in the plaines of Kalbelah, where there is at this day a towne called Mechet Ocem, built in this desart for the deuotion of his sepulchre. Vpon the death of Ocem, an Arabian Captaine cal∣led Abdalazuber tooke armes against Yhezid, vpon colour to reuenge the death of Ocem, [ C] and made cruell warres against him for the space of three yeares that he gouerned, after whose death he entred into all the prouinces of his empire, spoyling Arabia, Persia, Ader∣bajon, Karason, and others: then falling vpon Egypt, he tooke his way by Mecque a citie of Arabia, where there is one of the most famous ports of the red sea. Yhezid died in the yeare of Grace 685, and of the Egyra 64.

¶ Mauuia, the second of that name, and the eight Calife.

MAuuia the second, nephew to the first Mauuia, and sonne to the deceased Yhezid, [ D] was installed in his fathers throne presently after his death, but his great cowar∣dise and insufficiencie were the cause that he was presently depriued, hauing raigned but one and fortie dayes: which deposition bred a great confusion in the whole Estate of Persia, euerie one of the greatest noblemen aspiring to the principalitie: but in the end, the partie of Maruan, sonne to Akam Ebenhumya, a kinsman to the Calife who formerly had beene deposed, preuayled against the rest, by the support and fauour of Abdala∣z••ad, to whom (as we haue formerly ••ayd) Mauuia the first had giuen the citie of Ba∣sora.

¶ Maruan, the ninth Calife. [ E]

MAruan, kinsman to Mauuia, and of the same race, came to be Calife at the age of eightie yeares, where he was not receiued so peaceably, but he was forced to raise a great armie to make head against the Arabians of Mecque, who would not acknow∣ledge him for their Lord, seeking to establish the descendants of Aly in the empire: for they held them that were not of his race, for tyrants. To this end they were gathered to∣gether from all parts, hauing chosen a commander ouer them, called Soleymon Ben Mon∣caeb, and came against Cufa, which was then a famous citie in Arabia, and the chiefe of the Califes empire, but at this day it is wholly ruined: It was destroyed by them who committed a great slaughter of all that were of the race of Ben Humya, of the which [ F] Maruan was, who being aduertised of his enemies march and dessigne, went to the towne of Orfa in Mesopotamia to encounter them, it is called by another name Raha, and was in old time the towne of Vr, whereas the Chaldeans would haue burnt the Patriarch

[ A] Abraham, for that he did worship the true God, they being Idolaters. In this place Maruan gaue his enemies battaile, where he was victor, hauing slayne Soleymon their Generall.

Ater this great victorie, Maruan returned home triumphing, but it cost him deare, for his wife (who was allyed to Soleyman) desiring to reuenge his death, and the rest of her kinsfolkes and friends, which had beene slaine in the battaile, strangled him in the night as he slept. Thus he died, being eightie one yeares old, in the yeare of Grace 686, and of the Egyra 65, hauing raigned one yeare.

[ B] ¶ Abdelmalek, the tenth Calife.

THe victorie obtayned by Maruan, gaue an easie entrie to his sonne Abdelmalek to the royall throne, where he liued not long in quiet, for a Captaine of the Chiahis, which hold the partie of Aly, called Moktar Eben Ebiabe•• Zakafy, accompanied by ano∣ther called Ebrahem Achtar, drew together great troupes of souldiers, and came and spoyled the countries of Aderbajon, Diarbek, Auuas, and other prouinces of Persia and Mesopotamia, making cruell warres where they past, putting all to the sword that were of the aduerse partie. Against these, Abdelmalek leuyed an armie of seuentie thousand men, and went first against Abdalaziad, whom he defeated in battaile, and also slew, ha∣uing [ C] beene Lord of Basora one and fortie yeares: then he gaue the gouernement of Ia∣zirey, which is Mesopotamia, to Abraham Malek, and he made Mazaeb Benzober, bro∣ther to Abdela Zober, gouernour of Basora: After which, he made warre against Mok∣tar, whom he defeated, and slew in an encounter. Not long after, the Calife Abdelma∣lek leuyed another mightie armie against Masaebzober, whom he vanquished, recouering the lands which he had held in Persia. From thence he went to Damaz, where he sent Os••asgè, or Asiasgè, against Abdalazobar, who had reuolted, and fortified himselfe in Mec∣que, who was also vanquished and slayne, like to the other rebells: after whose death Ab∣d••lmalek enioyed his Estates in peace, giuing to Osiasgè, in recompence of his seruices, the gouernment of Ayerakhen, and of Karason. After this, Abdelmalek did build a great [ D] and populous citie called Vuacet, that is to say, middest, for that it is scituated betwixt two riuers, and in the middest of Mesopotamia, whereof there remaines nothing but the ruines. Abdelmalek, hauing raigned one and twentie yeres, and one moneth, died in the yeare of our Redemption 706, and of the Egyra 86, leauing foure sonnes, O••lid, Soley∣m••n, Yhezid, and Ochon.

¶ Oelid, the eleuenth Calife.

AFter the death of Abdelmalek, Oelid succeeded to the crowne. He exceeded all his predecessours in power and wealth, extending his empire by the meanes of Cap∣taines, [ E] among the which one called Koteybah Eben Moselem, conquered Karason as farre as Turquestan, with all the countrie of Maurenahar and Koarrazm. On the other side, Moseleima Ben Abdel Malek entred the territories of the Grecian empire with a mightie armie towards Constantinople, conquering many places, and binding the Emperour to pay him a certaine tribute. If Oelid made himsel••e fearefull, and in a manner inuin∣cible by his great deeds of armes, he tooke no lesse content to make publique buildings in many places, among the which the most famous was the Mosque at Damaz, the which he caused to be built with admirable art and architecture, besides the sumptu∣ousnesse.

About that time, Osiasgè died in Karason, whom Oelid had sent to gouerne that coun∣trie, [ F] being but fiue and fortie yeares old, who (they say) was so cruell, as in that countrie he put to death aboue a hundred thousand persons, during the time of his gouernement, besides an infinit number of others which had beene slayne during the warres. He left thirtie thousand slaues captiues of diuers nations, which is an argument of his great

power. At the end of the same yeare, which was in the yeare of our Redemption 715, [ A] and of the Egyra 95, Oelid died, being also fiue and fortie yeares old, hauing raigned nine yeares, and eight moneths.

¶ Soleyman, the twelfth Calife.

SOleyman, sonne to Abdelmalek, and brother to Oelid, succeeded him. As Persia was not yet wholly reduced vnder the Califes obedience, so there were still some in∣nouations and subiects of warre, sometimes in one prouince, sometimes in another. Among others, there were two that were not yet subdued, Gerion, and Tarbestan, [ B] against the which he sent Vezid Eben Mahalep, a braue Captaine, with a sufficient armie to conquer them, who made them subiect in the time of Soleyman, by the councell of Ia∣far Barmaki his Vuazir, where he made an order for the value of coynes: which vnto that time had beene verie confused, to the preiudice of the people; and soone after, he died at Damas, of a payne which he had in his side, hauing raigned two yeares and a halfe.

¶ Homar, the thirteenth Calife.

TO Soleyman succeeded Hamar or Homar, sonne to Abdala Aziz, the sonne of Maru∣uan, [ C] and elder brother to the deceased Calife: some say, he came vnto it voluntari∣ly; others say, by force, notwithstanding the opposition of his other brethren. Some also affirme, that Soleyman, before his death, seated him in the empire: but by what meanes soeuer it were, it is most certaine he succeeded him. This Moore was verle jea∣lous and superstitious of his sect. It was then in the yeare of Grace 718, and the 98 of the Egyra, whenas the descendants of Abas, vnckle to Mahomet, did rise against Ho∣mar, and made warre against him, pretending that the Califat did by right belong vnto them, especially one Aly Eben Abas, who sent many embassages to diuers princes, per∣suading them to shake off Homars yoke, and to acknowledge him, in regard of his just title, which gaue him the empire. But during these treaties, Ochon (sonne to Abdelma∣lek, [ D] and brother to Soleyman) poysoned Homar, so as he died, being fortie yeares old, ha∣uing raigned two yeares, and fiue moneths. This happened in the yeare of our Redem∣tion 720, and of the Egyra 101.

¶ Yezid, the second of that name, the foureteenth Calife.

THe death of Homar gaue the empire to Yezid the third, sonne to Abdel Malek. In the beginning of his raigne, one Aben Mocelem Karasony reuolted by the persuasion of Aly Ben Abas, and they two made warre against Yezid for the space of two yeares, at the end whereof, this Calife died, hauing done nothing worthie of memorie, in the yeare of [ E] Grace 724, and of the Egyra 105, hauing raigned foure yeares, and eight moneths.

¶ Ochon, the second of that name, and the fifteenth Calife.

OChon, he who had poysoned Homar, being brother to the deceased Yezid, came in his ranke to be Calife, during whose time there were some combustions in Persia, in the which Nacer Sayar, and Yucef Eben Homar el Sacafy, two captaines of great reputation, did him notable seruices: He recompenced them with good gouernements, giuing to Sayar the countries of Karason; and to Yucef Eben Homar, those of Hyeraken. The rest of this Califes raigne, being nineteene yeres and eight moneths, Persia liued in peace vntill [ F] his death, which happened in the yeare of Gra••e 743, and of the Egyra 124.

[ A] Oelid, the second of that name, and the sixteeneth Calife.

AFter the death of Ocem, Oelid the sonne of Yezid was chosen Calife. He had great warres against them of the familie of Abas, among the which Abdalah Ben Abas, one of the chiefe pretendants was slaine, by whose death he thought he should be much fortified in his Empire: and the better to assure himselfe, he caused two sonnes of the deceased Abdala to be acknowledged his successors in his gouernement, thinking by this meanes to pacifie them of that familie, one of the which was called Ehrahem el Safa: But all his foresight preuailed little, for he was so cruell, and of so bad a dispositi∣••n [ B] as he purchased the generall hatred of all his subiects, and especially of the souldiers, who slew him, hauing enioyed his Empire but foureteene moneths.

Yezid, the third of that name and the seuenteenth Calife.

YEzid the sonne of Oelid, commonly called Yezid Nekhes (for that he had taken away what his auncestors had giuen) succeeded to the realme at the age of fortie yeares▪ the which he enioyed but six moneths, at the end whereof he died in Damas.

[ C] Ebrahem, the eighteenth Calife.

EBrahem succeeded his brother Yezid, who hauing held the Septer but two moneths the greatest of his subiects seeing his little industrie carried themselues insolently to∣wards him, and among others, one called Maruuan, who was of the same familie, reuol∣ted against him, tooke him, and put him in prison, where he detained him three moneths, at the end whereof he put him death.

Maruuan, second of that name, and the nineteenth Calife.

[ D] Maruuan hauing seised violently vpon the realme, the affaires were in great confusion, the Moores disagreeing among themselues. The prouince of Karason was then go∣uerned by Nacer Sayer, who taking armes against Malab, who had the gouernment of the realme of Kermon: this warre was verie bloudie, and cruell. Moreouer in Maruuo, they of the familie of Abas fell to armes, against whom they of Karason and Kermon ioyned themselues to resist their furie, and comming to battaile, they of Abas faction vanquished them, and slew aboue a hundred thousand men of the troups of Kermon, especially of the familie of Ben Humia. As for them of Karason, such as remained at this conflict fled to Sauua. They had taken one Abu Mocelem for their captaine, who vp∣on colour of this defeat, and not content with his charge, aspiring to greater matters, [ E] sent Katabey Eben Echabib with a great armie to seise vpon the countrie of Hierak, as he did, from whence he went to a place called Cufa in Arabia, where he met with Maruuan, who came from Vuacet to encounter him; the which they did at Night, neere vnto the riuer of Euphrates, where without any delay they joyned battaile, in which encoun∣ter the souldiers of Maruuans armie charged their enemies with such furie, as they for∣ced them to retire to the riuer to saue themselues by swymming in the which Katabey was drowned without the priuitie of his souldiers, who taking courage, thinking their Generall had beene amonge them, returned to the charge with such resolution, as they defeated Maruuans armie. This happened about the breake of day, whenas the victors finding their Generall to be wanting, they presently made choise of Acem his sonne [ F] to command ouer them, who without any delay pursued his enemies, which fled to Kufa, and finding Safa in their way, who was of the familie of Abas, one of the two whom Oelid had caused to be acknowledged for Prince, as hath beene said, they decla∣red him Calife against his will; yet seeing himselfe to haue the command in his hands, he sent three of his vnckles, Safa, Abdula, and Abdsamet, with great forces against

the sonne of Maruuan, who hauing gathered all his troupes together came to encoun∣ter [ A] them againe neere to the riuer of Euphrates, where he gaue them battaile, in the which he was vanquished, and forced to flie to Mecera or Caire in Aegypt, where he was taken, and put to death in the y••are of our Saluation 751, and of the Egyra 132 hauing raigned fiue yeares, with whom there died aboue fourescore persons of the fa∣milie of Ben Humia: They also did breake open the sepulchres of such as were alreadie dead, and burnt their bones, not pardoning any of that line, except one called by the name of Hamarben Abdala Azis, to whom for his wonderfull great bountie, all his enemies by a generall consent gaue him life and libertie, such force hath vertue, euen amonge mortall enemies. Thus the Empire of them of the familie of Ben Humia en∣ded [ B] in the sonne of Maruuaen, to passe vnto that of Ben Abas, who held the Empire long.

¶ OF THE KINGS OF PERSIA OF THE LINE OF BEN ABAS.

Safa, the twentieth Calife. [ C]

Saf•• the sonne of Abdala, the sonne of Aly, the sonne of Abdula, the sonne of Abas, being thus rid of his enemie, setled himselfe in the realme, where seing himselfe peaceable, and without competitor, he sent his two vnckles, the one called Abdula, to gouerne Surya, Aegypt, and Affricke, which were vnder his obedience; and the other called Daud, that is to say Dauid, he sent to Medina, and to Mecque. He sent Safa to Vuacet to his brother Abuiafar to pacifie those coun∣tries which were all in cumbustion: From thence he caused him to goe to Karason, one of the most famous Prouinces of Persia, for the greatnes and wealth, the chiefe citie whereof is called Mechad, whereas Ismaell Sophi, and his successors are interred. This citie [ D] is fortified with three hundred towers, euerie one being a Musket shot distant from the o∣ther. The countrie is very fertile, and the people white and warlike, obseruing the Persi∣an customes, betwixt this prouince of Karason, and that of Turquestan and Vzbek runs that famous riuer of Iehun: & that which lies beyond those contries is called by the Per∣sians Maurenahar, that is to say, beyond the riuer which is towards the North. This shall serue for the better vnderstanding of things when we shall speake of any of these prouin∣ces: For as it hath beene said, this countrie of Karason had beene vserped by Abusalem, who seing Abuiafar the Califes brother to come against him, not onely yeelded him o∣bedience, but did also put himselfe into his hands, seruing and assisting him with much fidelitie, the which is the more remarkable both in regard of those times, and the humor [ E] of that nation, which was naturally trecherous and inconstant. Safa had for Vuazir one ••alled Abuzalemah a man of great sufficiencie, whom he affected much for his good ser∣uices: yet hauing discouered that he treated with certaine persons, and conspired against his life, he put him to death, and gaue the charge to Kaleb Barmaqui, who carried himself•• very discreetly: In the end Safa hauing raigned foure yeares and nine moneths, he died, in the yeare of Grade 755, and of the Egyra 136.

Abuiasar the one and twentieth Calif.

ABuiafar brother to the deceased Calife was no sooner come vnto the crowne, but [ F] he had aduertisement that Abusalem gouernor of Karason, (who as we haue said had vsed such respect vnto him, whenas during his brothers life he had beene to visit his pouince) meant to reuolt; but this Prince found meanes to draw him into his presence, where he caused him to be presently slaine, by whose death the affaires of

[ A] Persia were more peaceable. But it was not so in Arabia, whereas they of Mekay Ba∣sora had reuolted, against whom he sent his captaines with sufficient forces to draw them to obedience, as they did, yet not without the losse of much bloud. In the yeare of Grace 763; and of the Egyra 1••5. Abuiafar at the end of this war meant to visit his realme, and parting from Cufa, he crost through Mesopotamia, and comming to the bankes of the riuer of Tygris, he found the scituation, bountie of the soile, and commo∣ditie of the place so pleasing vnto him, for the visiting of his prouinces, as he built a great citie, the which by reason of many pleasant and delightfull gardens which are in that countrie, the people called Bagadad of Baga a Persian word, which signifies a garden, [ B] then hauing raigned three and twentie yeares, he died vpon the way to Mecque, in the desart of Byrmaymum, that is to say, the Pits of Maymum, so called of his name that caused them to be digged, in the yeare of our Lord God 777, and of the Egyra 159.

Mahady Bila, the two and twentieth Calife.

A Buiafar after his death left one sonne behinde him called Mahady Bila, who came vnto the Califat, and gouerned the Empire foure yeare peaceably, without any great alteration, at the end whereof a Captaine of his called by the name Akemben O∣cem (who aforetime had beene Secretarie vnto Abusalem, gouernor of Karason, whom [ C] Abuiafar had put to death) reuolted against his Prince, making those prouinces parta∣kers of his rebellion. This man had but one eye, and was of a terrible aspect who not onely sought to be acknowledged for king, but he would be worshiped as a God: And to the end they should beare the like sepect vnto him, he couered his face with a vaile, saying, that men were vnwortie to see his face. And as such monsters neuer want fol∣lowers, in regard of the liberties and infolencies which they allow them, many subiect∣ed themselues to this impious and wicked man, either for feare or ignorance, the people being all naturally inclined to insolencies: so as a great number of prouinces receiued him for king.

Mahady the Calife being aduertised of all these practises, sent a mightie armie a∣gainst [ D] him, whereof the gaue the charge to one called Monsaeb, who marching with all possible speed, came into Karason, the which the kin••men and neerest partizans of A∣kem vnderstanding, seing their forces too weake to resist so great a power, they poyso∣ned him to saue their owne liues, thinking by his death to draw somd better commo∣dities from the Persian Captaine, giuing it out, that he was ascended vp to heauen: But Monsaeb hauing subdued all those countries, seing that he could not get his enemy neither daed nor aliue, tooke seuere punishment of all his kinsfolkes and followers, cau∣sing as many to be burnt as he could get, whereof the number was not small. All this hap∣pened in the yeare of Grace 786, and of the Egyra 169, in which yeare Mahady Bila died; being three and fortie yeares old, hauing beene Calife ten yeares and one moneth.

[ E] Elady Bila Musa, the three and twentieth Calife.

TO Mahady succeeded Elida Baly Musa, but his time was short, to the great discon∣tentement of all his subiects, for that he was a very affable Prince, and of a good disposition: but neither his cheerfull humor, nor his pleasant disposition could wa••rant him from death, hauing raigned but one yeare and three moneths, in the yeare of Grace 787, and of the Egyra 170.

Arachid Bila Harun, the foure and twentieth Calife.

[ F] ARachid, second sonne to Mahady, by his brothers death succeeded to the Empire: He had for Vuazir Hyahya Kaled Bermaky, a very wise man in matterts of gouernement. This Prince in the yeare of Grace eight hundred and foure, and of the Egyra one hun∣dred eightie seuen, sent to massacre the Berameques, who were of a very noble familie,

and his Vuazirs being iealous that they would attempt somthing against him; three yeres [ A] after, the Grecians made warre against him; but sending an armie against them, he for∣ced the Emperour to seeke a peace, and to buy it with a great summe of money. This war being ended, he had an other from Maurenahar, whereas one called Rash Eben Na∣cer of Samarkand had titled himselfe King, against whom Arachid would goe in person: But death surprised him vpon the way, depriuing him of life at Thus, the chiefe towne of a prouince of that name, hauing held the Empire three and twentie yeares, this hap∣pened in the yeare of our Redemption eight hundred and ten, and of the Egyra one hun∣dred nintie three. This Prince had foure sonnes, that is to say, Mamed Hammi, to whom he gaue all that he held in Alep, and thereabouts, towards the West: Mahamun, to whom [ B] he gaue Persia, and Karason, with all the lands depending: and to the third called Ka∣cem, he gaue the gouernement of the prouinces of Aderbajon and Dyarbek: as for the fourth called Matacon, for that he loued him not, he left him no portion, yet in the end his was not the least.

Mahamed Amin, the fine and twentieth Calife.

ARachid Harun had appointed Mahamed Amin to be his successor in the Califat, wherein being installed he was very much discontented in mind to see his Empire so diuided, and his part so small; so as with this conceit the first thing he did was to studie [ C] by what meanes he might dispossesse some one of them; whereupon he leuied a mighty armie, commanding the leaders thereof to enter into Persia. Mahamun to whom, as we haue said the father had giuen that countrie, not holding himselfe safe, his brother Amin being in armes, stood vpon his guard, & seeing the storme ready to fall vpon him, he leui∣ed a mighty army, whereof he gaue the charge to a certaine Vuazir of his called by the name of Taher Ben Ocem, who went presently to charge the enemies, to whom he gaue battaile and vanquished them, pursuing them vnto Bagader, where he entred by force, and tooke the Calife Mahamed Amin, whom he carried away with him and slew vpon the way, hauing held the Empire foure yeares and seuen moneths, in the yeare of Grace 814, and of the Egyra 198. [ D]

Mahamun Ben Arun, the six and twentieth Calife.

MAhamun Ben Arun brother to the deceased, whom the Vuazir Taher had put to death, succeeded in the Califat. He made Fazele Ben Saleh his chiefe Vuazir, a wise man, & of great vnderstanding in matters of gouernment: And as the affairs of his Empire were then quiet, he spent much to haue all the bookes of Philosophy, the Mathematikes, Astrologie, and Physicke, which he could recouer, to be translated out of the Grecian, Sy∣rian, and Arabian tongues: But this peace lasted not long in Persia; for one called Ba∣bek Coramdin reuolted in Aderbajon, against whom he sent certaine troupes: but the war [ E] continued some time; yet in the end they agreed in the yeare of Grace 821, and of the Egyra 205. In this yeare Mahamun sent Taher Zulemin to gouerne the countrie of Kara∣son, but he soone repented him; for he vnderstood that he aspired to greater matters than the gouernement, and practised certaine innouations: For which cause he sent Ha∣med Abichaled to frustrate his enterprises; but all was presently pacified, by the death of Taber. Notwithstanding all the practises of the deceased, yet the Calife gaue the gouern∣ment to a sonne of his called Talahe Ben Taher: But the deceased Taher had an other sonne called Abdula, whom the father had sent to make war against the Vsbeques, for that they would not receiue his sect, who returning victorious, found his father dead, and his brother in possession of the gouernement. This was troublsome vnto him; but [ F] his brother with the Califes consent, tooke him for companion in the gouernment, and so all things were in quiet, and continued so the rest of Mahamuns life, who died in the yeare of Grace 826, and of the Egyra 210 hauing raigned twelue yeares, and seuen moneths.

[ A] Abu Ezach Matacon, the seuen and twentieth Calife.

AFter the death of these two, in the end he came vnto the Empire whom the father had so much contemned, as he left him not any portion in his Inheritance: For he was sonne to Harun, and brother to the deceased. At his comming to the crowne he built a towne within three miles of Bagadet towards the North, vpon the riuer of Tygris, cal∣ling it Samarrah, the which did flourish for a time, but it hath since so declined, as there is nothing at this day remaining but ruynes. At the death of Mahamun, Babec Coram, [ B] who had the gouernment of Aderbajon, had twice reuolted: but at the last Matacon sent so great an armie against him, as he was defeated and taken prisoner, whose hands and feet this Prince caused to be cut off, and then to be hanged. Yet there were some com∣bustions in the countrie of Karason, by reason of the Prouince of Sistom, which is in base Karason and Kermon towards the Persian gulfe, and is ioyning of the one side, to Persia, to the gouernement whereof Sistom is subiect, & on the other side to the realme of Macron neere vnto the countrie of India: For at that time there did rise a man in this prouince of Sistom, who being accompanied by all such as would follow him, seised vpon the better part thereof: and for that it depended vpon the iurisdiction of Karason, [ C] Talahe, who commanded there at that time, armed speedily and went to incounter Am∣zah, (for so the rebell was called who continued his conquest) fought with him, and woon the victorie; from whence he returned to Karason, where he fell sicke presently af∣ter, and died, in the yeare of our Redemption 829, and of the Egyra 213, leauing in his place Aly Ben Talahe his sonne, against whom the neighbour Princes made a long and tedious war, vntill that in the end Aly was slaine in an encounter; yet the war ended not, but seemed rather to be more and more inflamed by his death. During all these broyles in Karason, Matacon made war against the Emperour of Greece, of whom he woon ma∣ny victories, after which he died being fortie eight yeares old, in the yeare of our Salua∣tion 833, and of the Egyra 217 hauing raigned eight yeares. After his death he left be∣hind [ D] him eight sonnes, and eight daughters, with eight thousand slaues: He had taken eight cities, the chiefe of eight realmes, whereof he had put to death eight kings: they also found eight millions of gold in his coffers, all which numbers of eight are very re¦markable, he was a great warrior, yet affable, bountifull, and beloued of all men, espe∣cially of the souldiers.

Vuacek, the eight and twentieth Calife.

VVacek succeeded his father Matacon, of which Calife there is nothing found memo∣rable. This onely past in Karason: After the death of Aly Ben Talabe his vnckle, Ab∣dula [ E] Ben Taher succeeded him in the gouernement of the realme of Karason, in whose time (not withstanding that the soile of this countrie is very fertile, and yeelds aboun∣dantly) there happened a terrible, and generall famine, by reason of a great and mightie drougth, which continued in a manner for the space of three yeares, whereby the whole countrie was almost vnpeopled: But afterwards there fell great store of raine which made the land as fertile as before, so as euery man returned againe to his owne house. In this reunion the Persians and Moores gathered together to make war against the Gentiles, which were yet in that countrie, and of the same nation; yet they doe vul∣garly call them Mayusi, and they doe worship the Fier, whereof there are great num∣bers at this day in Persia: at which time they made a great and terrible massacre of them, and them Abdula Taher died in Karason, to whom succeeded Tahen Ben Abdula his [ F] sonne, being confirmed by the Calife Vuacek, who died two yeares after, hauing raigned fiue yeares and nine moneths, in the yeare of Grace 838, and of the Egyra 222 leauing Iafar his brother to succeed him.

Almoto Vuakel Bila Iafar, the nine and twentieth Calife. [ A]

ALmoto-Vuakel Bila Iafar succeeded his brother Vuacek, during whose raigne the descen∣dants of Aly did rise, for that he sought all meanes to hinder their pilgrimages to his Sepulchre, which is in Mecha Ocem, in the desarts of Kilbelah, as hath beene said, and the better to effect it, he caused the bankes of Euphrates to be broken in many places, that drowning the fields round about, he might with little trouble stop their passage by the great plaine of this desart: In the time of this Calife Taher Ben Abdula died in Kara∣son, leauing his gouernement to his sonne Mahamet, who gaue vnto an vnckle of his be∣ing [ B] his fathers brother, the lands of Tabarstan to liue on, the which he enioyed but little, as shall be said, as for the Calife Vuakel, he had one sonne called Montacer, so desirous to raigne, as his ambition made him so impious and vnnaturall, as he caused his father to be slaine by his slaues, hauing raigned twelue yeares, in the yeare of Grace 850 and of the Egira 234.

Montacer Bila the thirtieth Calife.

THis execrable Paricide came thus vnto the empire; but his ioy was short, for at the end of six monethes a great sicknes depriued him both of life and that which he had [ C] so much desired.

Abul Abas Hamed, the one and thirtieth Calife.

ABul Abas Hamed sonne to Mahamed the sonne of Matacon, as neerest kinsman to the deceased, succeeded himin the Califat: But hauing commanded fiue yeres, and nine moneths with small satisfaction to his subiects, his souldiers tooke him, and cast him in∣to a straight prison, where they suffered him to famish. At that time the affaires of Persia were in some confusion, for that in the prouince of Taberstan, which as we haue said, had beene giuen by Taher to his vncle Soleymon, there did rise one called Acem Ben Zeyd [ D] Alanuy, that is to say, sent of God, who seized vpon the countrie of Taberstan, forcing Soleymon to flie to Bagadet, where he was very curteously entertained by the Calife which then raigned called Mostahhin, who did him much honor. In the meane time Acem Ben Zeyd hauing placed good garrisons throughout all the prouinces which he had conque∣red, entred into Persia, where he committed great spoyles, taking Deylon, Gueylon, Ha∣bar, Zenion, and Casuin: The which happened in the yeare 856, and of the Egira 240.

Mostahhin, the two and thirtieth Calife.

THe souldiers hauing thus famished their king, there was great controuersie among [ E] the Moores for the creation of an other, but in the end they agreed all in the Electi∣on of Mostahhin kinsman of the deceased Calife, whom they installed in their Royall Throne, the which he enioyed very little, for in the end of sixteene moneths, falling sick, he died, in the yeare of Grace 858, and of the Egira 242.

Almatez Bila, the three and thirtieth Calife.

ALmatez Bila being come vnto the Empire, he presently sent a very great army against Acem Ben Zeyd, vnder the command of a captaine called Mesa Ben Buka, who entring into Persia fought with his enemies and had the victorie, recouering by this meanes the [ F] royall citie of Charear, Casuin, Habar, and Zenion, forcing Dahe Alauuy brother to A∣cem Ben Zeyd, to retire to Taberstan, where he died: So as Acem was constrained to send his other brother in his place, called Mahamed Eben Zeyd. Matters passing after this sort in Persia, the Califes souldiers being all discontented and wearie of him, caused him to die

[ A] after this manner: They came into a Stoue whereas he was bathing himselfe, and forced him to drinke a pot full of colde water, whereof he died sodainely, hauing raigned three yeares and a halfe, in the yeare of Grace 865, and of the Egira 246.

Motady Bila, the foure and thirtieth Calife.

AFter the death of Almatez they did chuse Motady Bila for Calife, but he enioyed his Empire eleuen moneths onely, at the end whereof the souldiers slew him, in the yeare of our Redemption 863, and of the Egira 247.

[ B] Almat Hamed Bila, the fiue and thirtieth Calife.

ALmat Hamed Bila Hamed Eben Emoto Vuakel was made Calife after the death of Mo∣tady, who to assure himselfe of his kinsfolkes and friends, whom he feared more than any other, found meanes to giue them diuers charges, and to send them by the countrie of Hyaman and Medina into Arabia. And for that throughout the whole historie, there is often mention made of Medina, it shall be fit to aduertise that this word is a common name, which signifies some people: Wherefore they haue beene accustomed to add an other word vnto it, as in Spaine, they say, Medina Celi, Medina Sidonia, or Medina del [ C] Campo, which are words that come from the Moores. In like manner by excellency, the Persians, and Arabians call the towne of the Sepulchre of their false Prophet Mahomet, Medina el Naby: that is to say, people of the Prophet: And when as in pilgrimage to his Sepulchre, although they say, they goe to Mecque, yet it is to Medina el Naby, for these townes are not one, Medina being within the land, and foure daies distant from Mecque or Mokah, which is a maritime towne standing vpon the red sea, whether the Moores vessells doe commonly come, which saile out at that sea into the East: But for that they which come from the Easterne parts disimbarke at Mecque, they say they come from Mecque, as they also doe which come from the Westerne parts, for that hauing ac∣complished [ D] their vowes, and pilgrimages at Medina, they passe to Mecque to buy diuers commodities which come thither from the East: and for that this towne stands vpon the shoare of the red sea, as hath beene said, and is more frequented than any of that coast, the Portugalls call it the strait of Mecque, and after this manner you may vnderstand Medina or Mecque, which is in that sea, and not vpon the Persian Gulfe, as some would maintaine.

Returning now to the affairs of Persia, which were at that time in great confusion, it happened that a new Captaine called Yacub Leys reuolted in the countrie of Siston, who in the beginning had not many of his partie, but fortune so fauored him as with his small troopes he tooke the chiefe towne of the prouince, and of the same name, and [ E] from thence entred into the country of Karason with verie fortunat successe, marching as far as Harat in the country of Maurenahar, wheras Mahamed Ben Taher had planted a gar∣son, with the which Yacub Leys did fight and woon the towne, the which gaue him assu∣rance to goe and charge Mahamed Ben Taher, who was gouernor of Karason, but being aduertised of his comming, he abandoned his company and fled to Nichabur. On the o∣ther side Acem Ben Zeid Alauuy continued still his conquests, and seazed vpon the coun∣trie of Gerion, by whom Mahamed was stopt in his passage; so as seing himselfe without hope of remedy, gathering together what forces he could; he resolued to defend himselfe against Yacub Leys, and to fight with him, as he did, but he was vanquished: who leauing him a rich spoile, with the lands of Siston and Karason, and to Acem Ben Zeyd Alauuy, those of Geryon, vnto Rey Charear, he fled being accompanied by few men to Nicha∣bur, [ F] whether he was pursued by Yacub Leys, who incountered with Abdula Saleh Vuazir to Taher, who talking together, Abdula demanded of him by what authoritie he made this war, for that if it were in the Califes name they should not make any resistance against him: But Yacub drawing his sword, answered: This is it that giues me power and autho∣ritie. And when as Taher sought to draw him vnto him vpon good assurance, and that

Yacub would not yeeld vnto it, they fought againe, in which battaile Taher fell into the [ A] hands of Yacub, who put him to death, being the last of that name which held that go∣uernment. He was of a more royall disposition & indued with greater vertues th••n all his auncestors: But for that the deeds of Leys were worthie of admiration, in whose life there are seene many notable encounters and accidents, it may happilly seeme sitting to relate in more fully, and at length, for that the knowledge thereof auailes much for the historie.

In the prouince of Siston did liuean officer of the kings, who was as we would say among vs a maker of kettles, called Leys, who had thee sonnes Yacub, Hamar, and Aly a∣mong the which Yacub learned his fathers art, and being a young stripling, who went vp [ B] and downe the countrie to earne some small matter to feed his father and himselfe, he still reserued something to spend with his companions and friends, either in making good cheere, or in his sports, wasting what he could get by any meanes possible, after this manner, which kind of life he continued vntill he came vnto the age of discretion, and after that time he left off his childish sports, and with the rest of his companions fell to actions of moment: So as Yacub hauing bound them vnto him by his liberality, which hath a great power to moue men, he found them fully resolued to follow him, whom he armed after the best manner that he could, and began to keepe the high waies vsing still his naturall liberalitie to these his companions, by whom he was called Captaine: hauing withall compassion of the miserable which fell into his hands, taking from them onely [ C] a part of what they dad. At that time Taher Ben Abdula, of whom we haue formerly spoken, was gouernor in Karason, to whom they repaired that had beene thus robbed, telling him that one called Salekh Ben Asar had drawen into his company Yacub Leys, and that he entertained him, and giuen him the title of Captaine; That being entred into the countrie of Sistom, they had taken the towne and spoiled it. This made Taher Ben Abdula send his forces against them, who made them to abandon Sistom. Soone after Taher Abdula died, leauing his sonne Mahamed Ben Taher in his place, who being entred into the possession of his gouernement, an other Captaine called Dram Ben Nacer draw∣ing Leys vnto his partie, made an other incursion into the same prouince, and seised ther∣on: But Dram desiring to pursue his enterprise, left the gouernement of Sistom to Leys. [ D] Taher being aduertised of all these intelligences, forced Dram Ben Nacer to come to battaile, in which he tooke him, and sent him prisoner to Bagader, whereas the Calife caused him to be put into close prison, and kept him there long.

In the meane time Yacub Leys loosing no occasion, seeing himselfe freed from the bond which he had to Dram, made himselfe lord of Sistom, gouerning himselfe in such sort as the loue of his followers did daily increase: so as he fortified the towne, and put good garrisons therein, and in all parts of the prouince for the defence thereof; and then he began to make incursions into the countrie of Karason, in the yeare of our Redemption 763, and of the Egyra 253 with a great armie, subiecting all where he past vnder his power. After which he tooke Herat and Fuchangh, and comming to Ker∣man [ E] he tooke it, expelling the garrisons of the prouince, which had beene placed there by the gouernor of Sci••as, which towne he besieged, the which not able to defend it selfe against his forces, yeelded, whereas the souldiers made a great spoile, of all which he re∣serued nothing to himselfe but twentie Faulkons which did belong vnto the Lord of Sciras, whereoften were white, and ten of diuers collours, and some foure hundred and fiftie weight of pure muske, which things he sent vnto the Calife of Bagadet, offering him his seruice, with all that he held, hauing then disposed of all things which he thought fit and necessarie, he returned to Sistom. But in the yeare of our Saluation 872, and of the Egyra 257 hearing that there were some alterations in Sciras he posted thither, to settle all things in good order. The Calife was not well pleased with these proceedings [ F] of Yacub Leys: So as, notwithstanding all the offers which he had made, he sent him word that he should presently depart out of Sciras, and all the lands of Persia, and that he should not presume to enter into them, contenting himselfe with that which he had tyranously vsurped. Leys finding himselfe vnable to resist so great a power as the Cali••s,

[ A] made no other answere, but obeyed, and left Persia, going from thence to Balte in Mau∣renahar, from whence he marcht to Kabul, a countrie which lies betwixt Karas••n and India, the which he subdued; then he tooke his way by Herat, and came to Nichabur, where he fought with Mahamed Ben Taher, and then going to Karason, he past by Ta∣berstam, and staied at Sary, whereas Acem Ben Zey Alauuy of (whom mention hath been made) came to encounter Leys with a goodly armie, and fought with him, but he was vanquished, and forced to fly to Delmon, Delymon, or Delon, for they call this towne by all these names, and it is scituated in the prouince of Gueylon. Leys hauing pulled this thorne out of his foot, pursued his enemie to Amal: Winter was then well ad∣uanced, [ B] and those countries are commonly exceeding cold. Moreouer there fell great store of snowe, and terrible tempests, which forced him at that time to giue ouer his des∣seigne, with the losse of fortie thousand men which perished by the tediousnes of the weather.

The Calife hearing of this disaster, and desirous to imbrace the best occasion he could to diminish the forces of Leys, sent with all speede into those countries that were sub∣ject to Leys, persuading them that gouerned for him to reuolt, and to obey him no more: But the contrary succeeded to that which the Calife pretended, for that Mahamed Ben Vuacel Tamimy a Captaine of the Arabians (whereof there were at that time good num∣bers in Persia) made an enterprise against the garrisons which the Calife had at that time in cities and forts, whereof he slew some, and made the rest reuolt: in the meane time [ C] one called Muca Ben Bugan, Lord of Bacora, Hauuas, and Hiamema, countries of Arabia, and neere vnto Persia, being aduertised of these cumbustions, leuied a goodly armie, and gaue the command thereof to Abderramon Ben Mosseh who marcht present∣ly againg Maha Ben Vuasel Tamimy, with whom he ioyned battaile, but he was vanqui∣shed by him and taken. In the meane time Leys stept not, but during these reuolts stood vpon his guard, being readie to doe some great exploit when he should finde any good opportunitie, who taking his time entred into Persia so fitly, as he made himselfe ••oue∣raigne, putting all them to death that might haue any pre••ence, then finding himselfe strong enough to passe on further, he marcht towards Bagader.

[ D] The Calife was presently aduertised of the disseigne of Leys to whom he did write, with an intent to diuert him, intreating him not to proceede any farther, and granting him freely whatsoeuer he held: to whom he made answere, that a desire to see him, made him come to Bagadet, that nothing should make him desist from his desseigne. The Calife seeing this his resolution, leuied an armie in great hast, giuing the charge thereof to a brother of his, who marcht against Leys, with an intent to fight with him: but he had another dessigne, for he dislodged in the night, and went towards Bagadet by vnfrequented waies, leauing the Califes brother very much troubled, not knowing what course he should take to follow him. Yacub Leys aduanced with all speed, fortify∣ing his armie in all places as he past: He was come to the middest of his journey, when as [ E] he was surprised with the collique, the which put him to exceeding great paine: where∣upon the Physitians being called together, they were of opinion to giue him a clister, the which he would not take, saying, that death would not be so troublesome vnto him as his disease and sickensse was grieuous and paynefull. Beeing in the extremitie of his paine an embassage came vnto him from the Calife, persuading him to desist from his intended journey; whereupon sitting vp as well as he could, and taking in his right hand a naked sword, & in the left hand a kind of bread which the Persians called Gerda, or Apa, and garlicke; he answered the Ambassadors: Tell the Calife your maister, that if I die of this accident, death shall end our contentions, and if I liue this Sword shall pacifie all; but if I loose the game, without any further pretention of Kingdomes, I will con∣tent [ F] my selfe to liue in some remote place, with this bread and garlicke, and with this answere he dismist them: But they were no sooner returned home to Bagadet but they had presently newes that he was dead of that disease which we haue formerly spoken of, in the yeare of our Redemption eight hundred eightie two, & of the Egyra two hundred

sixtie eight, hauing commanded eleuen yeares in Persia: He was verie valiant, wise, [ A] bountifull, affable, and a strict justicer; they did kill daily for the vse of his kitchin twenty Sheepe, fiue Oxen, and many Fowle, all which after his repast (the which was very so∣ber) he caused to be giuen to the poore and such as had need. After his death, they found not any thing of value in his rent, but the armes which he vsed, a peece of Persian Ta∣pestrie, and a pillowe whereon he rested; he left not any children, so as his brother suc∣ceeded him.

Yacub Leys being dead, and his brother Hamer Ben Leys being heire to his conquests, he thought it best to be in good termes and friendship with the Calife: Whereupon, he presently sent vnto him promising to yeeld him obedience, and intreating him to re∣ceiue [ B] him into grace and fauor, the which the Calife did so much esteeme, as he not one∣ly confirmed him in the possession of Persia, Karason, and all the countries which his bro∣ther had conquered; but he also gaue him the inuestiture of Hierak, the chiefe citie wher∣of is Hisphaon, making him Chena of Bagadet, which is the soueraigne magistrate of justice next vnto the Calife, which charge he gaue with the Califes permission to Abdu∣la Ben Taher, and from thence he past with his armie to Casuin, and so to the citie of Rey, leauing for gouernor at Scyras one called Mahamed Ben Leys which was his kinsman, who seing the other absent declared himselfe king, but Hamer Ben Leys returned pre∣sently from his intended iourney, against him, the which Mahamed vnderstanding he fled, leauing behind him a very rich spoile, the which Hamer sent afterwards for a great pre∣sent [ C] to the Calife; to whom many came with complaints of great insolencies, and tyr∣rannies which Hamer Ben Leys had vsed, whereupon he made a publique Edict, by the which he depriued him of the lands which he had giuen him, and gathered forces from all parts, he gaue the charge thereof to Sayd Ben Mochaled who went against him with his forces and vanquished him. Hamer had one in his companie called Dram, who had beene a long time prisoner at Bagadet, who seing this bad successe fled from the campe: Hamer did the like with a small traine, hauing afterwards recouered new forces, and ga∣thered together the remainder of his defeated armie, he made a new attempt to enter in∣to Scyras; but Mousek brother to the Calife, being aduertised of his intended desseigne, put himselfe in great hast into the towne, the which Hamer vnderstanding, and altoge∣ther [ D] despairing to recouer it, he returned to Kermon to visite the Lands of Siston, and from thence past to Karason. At this time the Calife Almat Hamed Bila died, hauing raig∣ned three and twentie yeares, in the yeare of Grace 893, and of the Egyra 279.

Matazed Bila Hamed, the six and thirtieth Calife••

MAtazed Bila Hamed succeeded his father Almat Hamed in the Califat: He was wise and valiant, yet very sensuall. Hamar Leys hauing (as hath beene said) lost all hope [ E] to recouer Scyras, past into Karason, whereas one of the gouernors of that prouince cal∣led Rafeahy Ben Arsuma, hauing rebelled against the Calife, followed the partie of Maha∣med Ben Z••yd Alauuy, against whom Hamer Ben Leys, with the permission of the Calife, caused his armie to march, vanquisht him, and tooke him prisoner, and hauing put him to death, he sent his head to the Calife, who did much esteeme his seruice, for that Ra∣feahy had greatly troubled those prouinces, so as to recompence Hamer, he made a new gift of Karason, Maurenahar, Parcy, Kermor, & Siston, commanding that his name should be written in their publike Ensignes, to the end that his obedience and loyaltie might be knowne to all men: This happened in the yeare of grace 898, and of the Egyra 284 In acknowledgement of all these fauours, Hamer Ben Leys sent for a present vnto [ F] the Calife, a great masse of coyne, many vessells of gold and siluer, store of amber, muske, ••yuet, with man rich roabes of cloth of gold.

The countrie of Maurenahar had beene long in peace, and in a manner shaked off

[ A] the Persian yoake, being at that time commaunded by Ismaell Ben Hamed, against whom Hamer Ben Leys leuied an armie of souldiers, and marched against him, who attended him neere to the riuer of Gehun, which diuides the countrie of Maurenahar and Kara∣son, where after many and variable encounters, Hamer was vanquished and taken by Ismaell, who as they say was assisted with money from the Calife, being glad to be rid of Hamer, yet he intreated him well, hauing swo••ne that he should maintaine an inui∣olable peace and friendship betwixt them, and that he should neuer make warre a∣gainst him neither by himselfe nor any other; which done he carried him with him to Maurenahar, whereof he aduertised the Calife, and of the whole successe of the busi∣nes, [ B] who did write vnto him to send him to Bagader, the which Ismaell per••ormed; be∣ing in the Califes power he caused him to be sl••ine, hauing beene king three and twen∣tie yeares, he had but one eye, and was exc••eding cholericke. Before this, Ismaell in the yeare of our Saluation eight hundred nintie foure, and of the Egyra two hundred and eightie went out of Maurenahar into Turquestan, where hauing obtained many victo∣ries against the Turkes, in the end he tooke the king of Turquestan in battaile, with his father, wife, and tenne thousand men: some write that the spoile of this victorie was so great, as euery of Ismaells souldiers had for his share a thousand deniers of gold, all which did make about one thousand and fiue hundred duckats. Hauing obtained this victorie he came vnto Samarkand, and from thence he marched against Hamer Leys, with an armie of threescore and ten thousand men, whom he vanquished as hath beene [ C] said, and for this cause the Calife Matazed gaue him the title of king of Maurenahar, Karason, Scyras, Siston, and Kermon.

This being done, Ismaell vnderstood that Mahamed Ben Zeyd Alauuy spoiled the countrie of Taberstan, whereupon he did write vnto him to desist, and in the meane time prepared a mightie armie, the which he sent against him vnder the command of Mahamed Ben Aren Somony, who vanquished him; so as he brought vnder the power of Ismall, the countries of Gerion and Taberstan, of which prouinces he had the go∣uernement, vnder the authoritie of Ismaell. This happened in the yeare our Redemp∣tion nine hundred and one, and of the Egyra two hundred eightie and seuen. The [ D] Calife Matazed Bila dying within two yeares after hauing raigned nine yeares and nine moneths.

Moktafy Bila, the seuen and thirtieth Calif.

MOktafy Bila sonne to Matazed succeeded his father, in whose time many compa∣nies of Arabians, spoiled the countrie of Arabia, robbing passengers, and hin∣dring the pilgrimage to Mecca and into Persia. Taher Ben Hamed Ben Hamer Leys, who in his grandfathers place had beene made king of of Siston, entred Persia at the same time with a mightie armie, with an intent to make himselfe maister thereof, hauing defeated the garrisons, and reduced all vnder his obedience: After which he passed [ E] to Auuas, the gouernor of which prouince was called Abdula, who presently deman∣ded succors from Ismaell, king of Maurenahar, who did write to Taher Leys, intreating him to desist from his enterprise, whereunto either for loue or feare he agreed, so as Ismaell would obtaine from the Calife that he should enioy the lands which he and his father had conquered, and that he should confirme him in the possession thereof, whereunto the Calife consented willingly for the loue of Ismaell, and Taher hauing newes of this donation returned to Scyras, the which happened in the yeare of Grace nine hundred and seuen, and of the Egyra two hundred nintie and three in which yeare the Calife died, of weaknes by reason of his excesse, hauing raigned about foure [ F] yeares.

Moktader Bila, the eight and thirtieth Calife. [ A]

MOktafy hauing left no children, they gaue the place of Salife to his brother M••••tader, vnder whose raigne Mahamed Ben Arun Somony, (who as hath beene said had vanquished and slaine Ben Zeyd Alauuy, and hauing recouered the countries of Gerion and Taberstan, whereof Ismaell had giuen him the gouernement, rebelled, and hauing leuied an armie by meanes of the intelligence which he had with the inhabitants of the towne of Rey, he seised thereon, whereof Ismaell being aduertised he went against him, [ B] but the other fled speedily, yet he pursued him to Casuin, Zenian, and Taberstan, which pouinces he reduced vnder his obedience, yet he could not take Ben Arun; so as hauing placed necessarie garrisons for the defence of the countrie, he past the second time into Turquestan, conquering many new countries, and new realmes, whereas he tooke an inestimable bootie, with the which he returned to Maurenahar, in the yeare of our Re∣demption 909, and of the Egyra 295 leauing his sonne Hamed in the realme to whom the Calife confirmed his gouernements with many prerogatiues: For the Cali••es be∣ing held as soueraigne both of spirituall and temporall matters, they were not thought to hold their seigniories and commands with any just title without their confirmation. In the meane time Taher enioyed Scyras, and other lands which the Calife had graunted [ C] vnto him, who going a hunting in the countrie of Siston, Sanghery a slaue to Leys the sonne of Aly his vnckle, seised sodainely vpon Scyras, and Taher comming to dispossesse him, Sanghery gaue him battaile, & in the same encounter Taher was quite vanquished & taken prisoner, with a brother of his and sent to Bagadet, hauing raigned full six yeares, and to enjoy his conquest with more securitie he also tooke one of the sonnes of L••ys called Aly with his brother Madet, and sent them to Bagadet, the which happened in the yeare of our Saluation 914, and of the Egyra 300.

In the meane time Hamer the sonne of Yacub, grandchilde to L••ys, seeing the coun∣trie of Siston reuolted and all in cumbustion, inuaded it with an army, and subdued it in nine moneths, putting to death many of the sediti••••s, but he died soone after leauing [ D] in his place Kalef Ben Hamed his elder brother, who de••••••ing to goe in pilgrimage to Mec∣ca, left a kinsman of his called Taher Benocem for gouernor, but he seeing him absent re∣uolted presently, and seised vpon his countrie, so as the other returning from his pilgri∣mage he found all the gates shut against him, so as he was forced to goe to Boka••a in Maurenahar to demaund succours of Mansur, who gaue him goodly forces, with the which he recouered his countrie of Siston, Taher beeing ••led.

Kalef seeing himselfe thus restored to the quiet possession of his realme sent back the troupes which Mansur had giuen him, the which Taher vnderstanding he came againe to Siston, and conquered it againe the second time, so as Kalef was forced to haue recourse againe to Mansur, who gaue him a new armie, and as he approached neere vnto Siston [ E] he had newes vpon the way that Taher was dead, and that his sonne Oc••m had succee∣ded him who being aduertised of the comming of Kalef into the prouince of Siston, he retired himselfe into a fort, whereas Kalef besieged him so straightly, as being depriued of all hope and reduced to extremitie, he begged the fauour of Mansur to obtaine some grace of Kalef, who did write vnto him that for his respect he gaue libertie to Ocem and his people, with meanes to retire themselues to Bokara, where he would giue them lands to liue on. All these realmes were tributarie to Mansur; but Kalef seeing himselfe in quiet possession of his owne, forgetting his forepassed miseries, and succours which he had drawne from Mansur, he made no great regard to pay the tribute that he ought him and had beene demaunded; whereupon Mansur leuied a mightie a••mie whereof he gaue [ F] the command to the said Ocem to match against Kalef, who not standing vpon his guard was forced to retire himselfe into a fort, the which by nature and art was held impreg∣nable, so as he beseiged it seuen yeares, but seeing him vnable to force it, Mansur

[ A] sent another captaine called Aboaly Ben Seniur, who joyned with Ocem all the forces he could draw together: The arriuall of this captaine made Kalef to leaue his fort which was called Darek, the which he deliuered to Mansurs armie, who restored him after∣wards to his realme: such was the vnconstant and variable fortune of this Prince, to be often expelled and restored againe: but the most sensible disgrace, was the reuolt of a sonne of his called Tahar, who expelled him his realme; and seeing no meanes to reen∣ter, nor to satisfie the ingratitude of this child, he fayned himselfe to be sicke, causing it to be published abroad that he was brought to the extremitie, and that he desired to see his sonne before his death, and to discouer certaine treasures vnto him, his fatherly loue [ B] binding him to preferre him before any other, and not to relie vpon his seruants; this ill aduised and couetous young man, being aduertised of his fathers will, and thinking to enioy this great treasure, came vnto Kalef; who at his arriuall imbraced him, and for his welcome, slew him with his owne hands, and so reentred into the possession of his realme, the which he lost afterwards twice, and recouered it againe: and in the end, he died, leauing a son of his called Abu Afes.

Hamed, the sonne of Ismael, who by the death of his father was come into the posses∣sion of the realme with the consent of the Calif Moktader, visited his countrie, and com∣ming into Samarkand, he tooke the Gouernour thereof, whose name was Ezach, being his vnckle, and put him in prison, suspecting that he had an inclination to reuolt: yet [ C] soone after, he restored him to his former libertie, and gaue him withall the gouernment of the prouince. Tabarstan had reuolted twice, but he alwayes had his reuenge, and pu∣nished the rebels according to their demerit: He also tooke Siston, in the yeare of our Redemption 900, and of the Egyra 298: and in the yeare following, he gaue the go∣uernement of Nichabur to Mansur the eldest sonne of Ezach. In the yeare of our Sal∣uation 914, and of the Egyra 301▪ being a hunting, news came vnto him that the pro∣uince of Tabarstan had reuolted the third time: whereupon, retiring into his tent verie much discontented, he was slayne by his owne slaues whilest he slept; and his bodie was interred in Bokara, hauing raigned six yeares and foure moneths: he was a prince of great courage, and full of magnanimitie, but wonderfull cholericke, and subiect to his [ D] pleasure: He left one sonne not aboue the age of ten yeares, whose name was Nacere Benhamet, whom one called Hamet Benhamet Leys, Gouernour of Bokara, tooke vpon his shoulders, and being followed by a great multitude, crying through the citie, that it was the king, he caused him to be so acknowledged: but in the meane time, the young prince seeing himselfe carried after that manner, wept bitterly, demaunding of them that were about him, if they would kill him as they had done his father: but euerie man assu∣red him, and freed him from that feare.

In the meane time, Ezach, vnckle to the deceased king, remayned at Samarkand, who hearing of his nephews death, and the greenenesse of his sonnes yeares, le••yed a great armie to seise vpon that Estate: Nacere, whom otherwise they call Amir Seyd, was adui∣sed [ E] to send a captaine against him, whose name was Hamuyhe, who defeated Ezach twice, and in the last he was forced to flie before him to Samarkand, where he had left for Go∣uernour, a sonne of his called by the name of Alyas or Elyas, who abandoned the ci∣tie, and fled away: so as Ezach by this meanes being neerely pursued by Hamuyhe, he was forced to yeeld himselfe at his discretion, who sent him immediatly to Bokara, whereas Nacere put him in prison, in which he died. This death was the cause that Mansur, his sonne, who was at that time Gouernour of Nichabur, tooke armes against Nacere, and joyned with Ocem Ben Aly, one of Naceres Captaines, who had reuolted by rea∣son of some discontents. Hamuyhe prepared to go against him, but vpon the way he vnderstood that Mansur was dead, yet Ocem Ben Aly continued the wa••re, the which was [ F] of no long continuance, for that in the first bat••aile he was defeated, taken prisoner, and sent to Bokara. At the same time, Nacere had sent a Gouernour to Kara••on, cal∣led by name Hamet Ben Sal, who being reuolted, and in armes with the whole pro∣uince, leuied troupes, and seised vpon Gerion and Mar••••o. Hamuyhe went also to

fight with him, whom he vanquished and sent to Bokara, where he died in prison: This [ A] happened in the yeare of our Saluation 914, and of the Egyra 301, at what time the Calife Moktader died, hauing held the empire seuen yeares.

¶ Iafar Ben Matazed, the nine and thirtieth Calife.

AFter the death of Moktader, they gaue the dignitie of Calife to Iafar Ben Metazed his brother, who enioyed no greater peace than his predecessor had formerly done: for in the prouince of Tabarstan did rise one called Leylahe Ben Neaman, who committed [ B] some spoyles in the neighbour prouinces, with happie successe. Nacere was forced to send an armie against him, and to giue him battaile, in the which Leylahe was vanqui∣shed, after which victorie his souldiers seeing themselues vnfortunat in armes, they be∣gan to watch the highwayes, and to rob the passengers: Whereupon, Naceres subiects gathered together, and cut them in peeces, taking from them what they had stolne: they also seised vpon Leylahe, and cut off his head. At the same time there was another rebell in the towne of Rey, against whom Nacere went and recouered the towne, leauing there∣in a captaine called Syntur, with a strong garrison, and then went to Maurenahar: This was in the yeare of our Redemption 926, and of the Egyra 313, whenas one called Az∣far Ben Scyruyhe made a new combustion in Persia vpon this occasion. [ C]

A Persian called Abusuia being verie poore, yet of a great and noble familie, as one that was descended from the auncient kings of Persia, had three sonnes, the one was cal∣led Emaududualeh Aly, Acem, and Akmet: This man dreamt vpon a time, that there came fire out of his priuie parts that did inflame a great part of the countrie, then diui∣ding it selfe into three parts, it continued so verie long. Being then full of amazement, he went to impart his dreame to an Astrologer, who told him that it did signifie he should commaund great prouinces, in the which his three sonnes should afterwards suc∣ceed him. At that time Makon Ben Kakt was lord of Tabarstan, into whose seruice Abus∣uia put himselfe, with his three sonnes, vnder the commaund of Azfar Ben Scyruyhe, and Mardauuege Benzad, with Vuasmaguir his brother. It fell out in the end, that Azfar re∣belled [ D] against Makon, making warre against him for the space of a whole yeare together, at the end whereof Makon died. After whose death, Azfar seised vpon Rostandade, Rey, Casuin, Habar, Zenion, Taromin, and Amedon; committing great spoyles in all those parts, so as Nacera was forced to march against him with a great armie, where, af∣ter many and variable encounters, they agreed, vpon condition, that Azfar should en∣ioy a good part of that which he had conquered. During the absence of Nicera, there fell out some combustions within his countrie, but all things were presently paci∣fied by his presence, yet there was still warre in some one of these prouinces during his raigne.

During these proceedings in Persia, there did rise great troupes in Arabia, who entred [ E] into Mecca Medina, the which they spoyled of great riches, which the superstitious deuo∣tions of the Moores had offered in that place, taking away a stone which was held by them all in great reuerence, carrying it to Cufa, of which stone the Moores tell strange tales, among others, that Adam had brought it out of the earthly Paradise, whenas he was expelled, and that afterwards it came into the power of Ismael, the first sonne of Abraham, and in succession of time was brought to Mecca or Medina. They say also, that by nature it is exceeding white, but if it be handled by sinners, it grows verie blacke, so as it was like vnto a touchstone for sinnes: but all this being ridiculous, we will returne to the Calife Iafor, who hauing raigned twentie yeres, died in the yere of Grace 933, and of the Egyra 320, hauing beene much respected by his souldiers during his raigne. [ F]

[ A] ¶ Kaherbila Mahamet, the fortieth Calife.

I Afer being dead, the souldiers gaue the empire to his brother Kaherbila Mahamet Ben Mathazed; but they did not suffer him to enioy it long, for at the end of eighteene moneths, they put out his eyes, in the yeare of Grace 935, and of the Egyra 322, giuing the gouernement to Razibila.

[ B] THe Razibila Mahamed, the one and fortieth Calife.

THe souldiers hauing thus chosen Razibila Mahamed, sonne to the Calife Moktader, he made Eben Mokale his Vuazir, whose hand within few moneth after he caused to be cut off, and to be hung vpon a gibet, for that he had written a letter in his name of small importance without his priuitie. It was the custome in those times for the Ca∣lifes themselues to preach the law vnto the people, but he ordayned that the Vuazirs should doe it. Razibila raigned foure yeares, and died in the yeare of Grace 939, and of the Egyra 326.

[ C] Mouktafy Byla Ebrahem, the two and fortieth Calife.

MOuktafy Byla Ebrahem, sonne to Moctader, was created Calife after the death of his brother Razy, in whose time there was a great famine in Bagadet, the which was followed by a great plague, whereby a great part of that countrie was vnpeopled, and as for Mouktafy, the souldiers put out his eyes, in the yeare of our Redemption 943, and of the Eygra 330, hauing raigned but foure yeares, yet he liued two and fortie yeares af∣ter he was blind, but he enioyed not the empire, the which they had giuen ••nto his sonne.

¶ Mostachfy Abdela, the two and fortieth king of Persia, and the three [ D] and fortieth Calife.

IN the place of Mouktafy Byla, the souldiers aduanced his sonne Mostachfy Abdela, vn∣der whose raigne Macera, hauing made an accord with Azf••r, fell sicke of a Tisike, which the Persians call Cel. This prince (as hath beene said) had great wars during his raigne, being eight and thirtie yeares, and died in the yeare of Grace 944, and of the Egyra 331. He was a verie affable and bountiful prince; during his life he had caused his eldest sonne Ismael to be declared prince, and his presumptiue heire, but he dying before his father, the younger brother, called Nueben, succeeded in his place.

As for Abus••ia, and his sonnes, who fought for Azfar, this was their successe; Azfar [ E] hauing made an accord with Nacere, he sent Emaudu Daulè Aly, the eldest of Abusutas sons, with his two brethren, and a great number of souldiers, against Hisphaon the chiefe citie of Hierak, where, at that time, Mozafar Ben Yacut was Gouernour, who finding himself•• vnable to encounter them, left the place, and fled to Scyras, where his father Yacut gouer∣ned, then joyning together, they went to fight with the enemie, but vpon the way they encountred Mardauuege, whom they vanquished, so as he was forced to flie, & to cal vnto his succour Emaudu Daulè Aly, and his two brethren, being at Lorestam, against whom Ya∣cut aduanced with his armie, causing his footmen to march before with this stratagem; he had giuen them certaine pots or bottles full of wild-fire, and matches light in them, the which they should cast against their enemies, as they did; but the wind being contrary, the [ F] fire did not annoy the enemie, but burnt themselues, and Yacuts horsemen aduancing, it did so terrifie there horses, as they ran away: Emaudu Daulè pursued them, who in this rout tooke many rich spoyles, with store of gold and siluer, the which encreased the courage and power of Aly and his followers, with whom he entred into Persia, the which he made

subiect without any great effusion of bloud, going afterwards to lay siege to Scyras the [ A] chiefe citie, the sacke whereof, by reason of the nobilitie and reputation of that towne, he redeemed from the souldiers with his owne money.

Emaudu Daulè, hauing rested sometimes in the house of Yacut, he began to be carefull for the payment of the souldiers, being without money, and seeing their insolencie to be great, and that they would mutine if they were delayed, being verie pensiue, he layed him downe vpon a bed, studying what course to take, where, lifting vp his eyes, he espyed an vglie snake at a hole, the which did often put forth her head, and drew it backe againe, Aly being amazed thereat, commaunded that they should presently breake vp the top of the house, which was fla••, (as they be all in Persia) and kill this snake, the which was pre∣sently [ B] done, and the snake killed, with some others that were with her: but in doing this, they discouered a great treasure which Yacut had hidden there, the which was sufficient to pay the souldiers. Soone after, there happened another accident to Emaudu Daulè, the which was both pleasant and profitable; hauing an intent to make some apparell, he caused a taylor to be brought vnto him, who being before him, in stead of a measure he called for a cudgell, the taylor (who had serued Yacut) thinking it had beene to beat him, besought him to pardon him, and that without any force he would confesse the truth, which was, that he had seuenteene coffers in his house, the which Yacut had giuen him in guard; Aly was verie joyfull of this good encounter, and hauing sent for the coffers, they were found ••ul of cloth of gold, and all sorts of silke of great value, whereof the taylor had his share. [ C]

Matte••s passing thus in Persia, Nue, the sonne of Nacera, by the death of his father had succeeded in the gouernement of Maurenahar, Rarason, Nichabur; and other neighbour countries. Hamuyhe, that famous captaine, (of whom mention hath beene made) had some discontentment against Nue, and seeing him now seated in the royall throne, and seeking to reuenge the iniurie he had receiued, had retired himselfe secretly out of his countrie: but Nue writ such gracious letters vnto him, and gaue him such assurance, as Hamuyhe returned, to whom Nue gaue the gouernement of Samerkand. After this, Nue made warre in many places by his captaines, yet alwayes with vnfortunat successe: but his fortune meant to make triall of himselfe; for hauing made one called Aboaly Gouer∣nour [ D] of the towne of Rey, and hauing some subiect of discontent against him, he sent Abraham Ben Siniur to be his successour: whereas Aboaly being discontent, he rebelled against Nue, who went in person to suppresse him, but he was twice vanquished, and the other came to Bokara, where he entred, and would haue burnt and rased the towne, if he had not beene entreated to spare it. But Nue hauing recouered what he had lost, tooke a cruell and exemplarie punishment of such as had reuolted; so as many left him and went vnto his enemie. Emaudu Daulè was then in the towne of Scyras, to whom news came that Mardauuege (vnder whom he serued) had beene slayne by his slaues being in a bath. Vpon this aduice, he sent with all speed his brother Rokna Daulè Acem, to Hierach, and Rey, whereof he seised, conferring with Aboaly, who was verie much discontented [ E] with Nue. This man obtayned from the Calife of Persia the inuestiture of Karason, the which being once graunted, Aboaly delayed no time, but went immediatly to take pos∣session. Within few dayes after, Nue died of melancholie, (as they say) leauing one sonne called Abdul Malek.

Emaudu Daulè hauing sent his brother Rokna Daulè Acem, as hath beene said, to con∣quer Hierach; he also sent his other brother Mohayze Daulè Achmet against Kermon, the which he subdued, where hauing put good garrisons, he went against Bagadet, the which yeelded by force, where he tooke the Calife Mostachfy Abdala, whose eyes he caused to be pulled out, hauing raigned foure yeares, and foure moneths, the which happened in the yeare of our Redemption 947, and of the Egyra 334. [ F]

[ A] ¶ Motyah Byla Fazele, the foure and fortieth Calife.

MOayze Daulè Achmet hauing thus put out the eyes of the Calife Mostachfy, he seated in his place Motyah Byla Fazele, the sonne of Moktader: At this time, they found the stone whereof mention hath beene made, which the Arabians had carried to Cufa, but it was brought backe againe ••o Mecque, giuing as much gold for it as it weighed: This was in the yeare of Grace 949, and of the Egyra 337, whenas Emaudu Daulè Aly fell sicke, he called for his nephew Azudu Daulè, sonne to his brother Rokna Daulè Acem, whom he left [ B] At his place, for he died presently after.

At the same time there died also many princes, as Vuax Maguir going a hunting, for a boare running betwixt his horse leggs, he fell vpon him and slew him. Mohayze Dau∣lè Achmet died also in Bagadet, Acem Ben Feruzan in Taberstan, Kafur Hach••dy in Caire, and the emperour in Constantinople, Aboaly Ben Mahamed Aly in Bokara, and in Damas, Seyf Daulè in the yeare of our Redemption nine hundred fiftie seuen, and of the Egyra three hundred fortie fiue.

Throughout all Karason, Koestam, and many other prouinces of Persia, there was a great and generall plague: And moreouer, there was the greatest confusion that had [ C] neither seene before that day, for that euerie man was offended, and euerie man feared, neither was any man in safetie during this generall combustion which continued some yeares. In the yeare of Grace 962, and of the Egyra 350, Abdul Malek, the sonne of Nue, running at tilt (the which is verie vsuall among the Persians) fell from his horse, and died, hauing raigned seuen yeares, and six moneths, in whose place succeeded Mansur his brother: in his life time he had for Vuazir one called Albataquin, who opposed himselfe with all his meanes against the election of Mansur, but Mansur preuayled, and Albata∣quin, being accompanied with three thousand souldiers, fled to Gazmin, after whom Mansur sent fifteene thousand souldiers, who fought with him vpon the confines of Balk, and were defeated: he sent also the second time, but they were no more fortunat [ D] than the rest; so as Mansur seeing his good successe, turned his armes against Hy••rah, and the towne of Rey: Rokna Daulè Acem, who enioyed it, went presently to field, sen∣ding his sonne with goodly troupes to make incursion into the countrie of Karason to diuert Mansur the Generall of the armie. Rokna Daulè Acem was called Chamguir, who being dead of sicknesse, they gaue his charge to Abul Ocem. This man seeing ei∣ther prince disposed to peace, a treatie was begun, and in the end concluded, vpon con∣dition, that Rokna Daulè should pay a yearely tribute of 50000 deniers of gold, which make two and twentie hundred thousand duckats; and for the better assurance of this accord, Mansur tooke to wife the niece of Rokna Daulè, daughter to one of his brethren: the which happened in the yeare of our Saluation 975, and of the Egyra 363, at what [ E] time the Calife Motyah Byla died of a palsie, hauing raigned nine and twentie yeares, and left the gouernement two moneths before to his sonne Tahaya Abdel Charim. As for Mansur, he died two yeares after, in the yeare of Grace 977, and of the Egyra 395, hauing raigned fifteene yeares, leauing his sonne Nue to succeed him.

¶ Tayaha Abdel Carim, the fiue and fortieth Calife.

TAyaha Abdel Carim, the sonne of Motyah, came thus to be Calife by the death of his father (as hath beene said;) during whose raigne, or rather shadow of his royaltie, (for the Califes began then to be lords in name onely) many memorable things happe∣ned in Persia. Two yeares after his being Calife, Rokna Daulè died, declaring his sonne [ F] Azu du Daulè, king of Hyerak, who much augmented his dominion. As for Nue Ben Mansur, who had succeeded his father in that of Maurenahar: he found worke enough to exercise himselfe; for notwithstanding that Albataquin (whom he had cause to feare) were dead; yet Kabus, the sonne of Camguir, (a captaine to his father Mansur) reuolted, and tooke the prouinces of Geryon and Tabarstan.

At the same time also, there were great controuersies betwixt Azudu Daulè and Fako••o [ A] Daulè, against whom Azudu Daulè leuied an armie, and forced Fakoro to flie into the pro∣uince of Kabus, who entertained him with much courtesie and respect, offering him his person, and whatsoeuer he had else to serue him. Azudu Daulè, being sorie of this acquaintance, marched against them, vanquished them, and recouered Gerion and Ta∣barstan; so as Kabus and Fakor•• Daulè were forced to haue recourse to Nue Ben Mansur, who giuing them succou••s, they returned against Azudu Daulè, and recouering Gerion, they forced him to retire into a fort, the which they besieged, but the siege hauing conti∣nued two moneths, the besieged finding their munition to fayle, got intelligence with one of their captaines, to whom they gaue a good summe of money, so as he would be at [ B] their deuotion, and hauing concluded what to doe, they tooke a time whenas the besie∣gers least expected them, and made a sallie vpon this treacherous captaines quarter, who presently fled with such troupes as were vnder his commaund, the which amazed the rest of the armie which fled, by which meanes the place was freed from siege. Nue, who was then in Nichabur, hearing of the disgrace of his allies, gaue charge to Abul Ocem his Va∣zir, to leuie an armie, and to march against Azudu Daulè; but he finding himselfe too weake, forbare to fight, and Fakoro Daulè dying afterwards, his brother came to be lord of all his countries.

At that time died Abul Ocem, Vazir to Nue, whose death is remarkable: for seeking to haue the companie of a slaue of his whom he loued exceedingly; being with her, he died [ C] sodenly, the which bred a generall amazement, by reason of the strangenesse of the acci∣dent. He left two sonnes, the one called Boaly, who succeeded him in the gouernement of Karason and Nichabur, the other Faech, whom Nue made Vazir of Hyerak: these two brethren, through enuie and jealousie, fell to armes, and made warre one against ano∣ther. But Boaly, hauing beene more diligent than his brother, marched first against him to Bokara, who fled to Marno, where he gathered all his forces together: the which Nue vnderstanding, he sent Innabac and Bakturun, two of his captaines, to force Boaly to come to reason. These, according to his commaundement, pursued him, and defeated him, forcing him to flie to Balk, and from thence to Tremed, from whence he writ to Bokrak∣ham, king of Turquestan, persuading him to make warre against Nue. [ D]

During these dissentions, Aboaly Ben Ocem writ to Nue, demaunding, in recompence of his famous seruice done vnto him and his auncestors, the supreame gouernement of all the countries of Maurenahar, and Karason, the which Nue graunted without any dif∣ficultie, vpon condition, that he should hold them as his vassall: but Aboaly seeing him∣selfe in possession of these countries, carried himselfe as a tyran, and being often per∣suaded to be more temperat, he not onely made them no answer to that which was pro∣pounded, but prepared himselfe secretly to rebell, and writing letters to Bokrakhan king of Turquestan, he persuaded him that they two together might inuade the countries of Nue, and diuide what they should get betwixt them. The king of Turquestan liked so well of this proposition, as he presently went with an armie to field; and Aboaly did the [ E] like, so they began both to make great spoyles in the countrie of Nue, who was also in armes, giuing the charge of his armie to Innabak, who had vanquished Faech, and pre∣sented battaile to the rest, wherein hee was vanquished, and sent prisoner into Tur∣questan.

Nue hearing of this losse, and seeing himselfe reduced to extremitie, seeking to make friends of his enemies, reconciled himselfe to Faech, drawing him to his deuotion with all the courtesie and complements he could deuise; so as he sent him for the defence of Samarkand, where being arriued, he vnderstood that Bokrakhan came against him: so as he abandoned the place, and wen to Bokara in despigh: of Nue, protesting that he had done him much wrong. This treason made Nue to faint, who finding no meanes to make [ F] head against so powerfull an enemie, abandoned his realme. Bokrakham, in the meane time seised vpon Samarkand, and from thence went to Bokara, whereas Faech ioined with him, whom Bokrakham sent with an armie against Balk, and the countries depending thereon. In the meane time Nue passed the riuer of Gehun as secretly as he could, and

[ A] lay about Hamulchet, whither many of his subiects that sought him came vnto him by diuers waies; so as the number increasing dayly, they began to make the bodie of an ar∣mie, and Nue was in some hope of better successe: and to trie all meanes he writ to Abo∣aly, laying before him the fauours and preferments he had receiued from him, promising him greater if he would returne to his seruice: but Aboaly fed him with counterfeit and dissembling hopes, seeking by what meanes he might kill him.

In the meane time Bokra••ham fell sicke, and finding no amendment, by the aduice of his physitians, he returned into Turquestan, hoping to recouer his health better in his owne countrie, but his infirmitie encreasing dayly, he died by the way; the which they of Bokara vnderstanding, they sallied forth vpon his armie, the which being without a [ B] head, was defeated, of whom their enemies made a great slaughter, and a rich bootie of their spoiles. Nue embracing this occasion returned into his realme, where he was recei∣ued with a generall consent.

Aboaly seeing the king of Turquestan to be dead, he resolued to reuenge himselfe by the power of Nue, the which Faech his brother vnderstanding, although he were his ca∣pitall enemie, he sought to diuert him from this resolution, as he did: they two conclu∣ded together to make warre against Nue, who before all these broyles, had sent a captaine of his called Sabutaquin, into India to make new conquests, and was then returned rich, and victorious, hauing purchased the reputation of a rare man, and of great experience [ C] in armes. Nue gaue the charge of this war to him, and hauing made the greatest leuie of souldiers he could, with such as he had vnder his commaund, he sent him to Gaznehen a famous countrie in Karason. Aboaly knowing the preparation they made against him, and desiring to preuent his enemies by some good successe, he sought the friendship of Fa∣koro Daulè, whom he woon with rich presents which he sent him. In the meanetime, Nue and Sabutaquin went out of Nichabur, seeking Aboaly, being accompanied by the gouer∣nors of Balk, Gerion, and Guergestam. As for Aboaly, he had receiued certaine compa∣nies of old souldiers which Fakoro Daulè had sent him, to whom Darab Kabus had ioined with a mightie armie, and so going out of Hyerak, both armies camped one against another, where they stayed not long before they came to battaile. Aboaly disposed of his [ D] armie after this manner: He gaue the right wing to Faech, and to a brother of his called Abalkacem Ben Samur the left, putting himselfe in the middest.

As for that of Nue, the points of his battaile were giuen to his best captaines, but Amir Sabutaquin, and Seyfa Daulè were in the middest: the two armies being thus fronted, euery man shewed his valour, but Nues souldiers behaued themselues in such sort, as they forced the wings of Aboalys battaile to turne their bakes, the which gaue such courage vnto their enemies, as they charged the rest with the whole bodie of their armie so furi∣ously, as they made them to breake their rankes, and in the end to flie.

In this conflict, Darab Kabus quiting the partie of Aboaly, ioined with Nue, the which was a great helpe for the defeating of this armie, whereof part was cut in peeces, and the [ E] rest retired as they could by Nichabur. The victorie thus gotten, and the spoiles which were very great diuided, Nue made Mahamud the sonne of Amir Sabutaquin his generall at his fathers request. As for Nue he went to Bokara, Sabutaquin to Gaznehem, and Maha∣mud to Nichabur: and as for the brothers of Aboaly and Faech, they went to Gerion, which was vnder the commaund of Fakoro Daulè, who entertained them with much kind∣nesse: but they carried themselues so ill in all things, as they continued not long in sa∣uour, which Aboaly perceiuing, forgetting the benefits he had receiued from Fakoro, he ••ought meanes to kill him: whereunto Faech would not consent, but dissuaded him all he could from this desseigne, aduising him rather to fall vpon Nichabur, and to surprise it before that the other had discouered their desseigne; whereof notwithstanding being [ F] suspitious, he sent to demaund succours of the king, and of his father: but before they came, these two had sought with him, vanquished him, and chased him out of the pro∣uince: the which Sabutaquin vnderstanding, he leuied troupes with all speed possible, and went from Siston to come to Nichabur, where he encountred Aboaly at Thus, and fought with him; being in the heat of the fight, Mahamud arriued with with a fresh armie, who

charging the enemie behind, made a terrible slaughter, taking in a manner all that were [ A] left aliue prisoners. As for the two brethren, they got with great difficultie into Ca∣la••, a place wonderfull strong, and being accompanied from thence with some of the re∣mainders of their defeat, they past to Marauo, where being, they sought to get a pardon from Nue, who graunted it to Aboaly, vpon condition that he should not depart out of Geriana without his expresse leaue; whereunto he agreed, contrarie to the will of Faech who retired himselfe to ••echkan king of Turquestan, who ha•• ••ucceded Bokrakham.

There was one called Abu Abdula gouernour of Koarrazm, who was enemie to Abo∣aly: he giuing a sodaine assault to Geriana, carried him away prisoner. The gouernour of Geriana, who had him in guard by the commaundement of king Nue gathered his for∣ces [ B] together, and went to Kat, whereas he of Koarrazm remained, tooke him prisoner, and freed Aboaly; and being returned into his prouince, he put the gouernour of Koa••∣razm in prison. As for Aboaly he entreated him very courteously, feasting him dayly. One day among the rest, hauing drunke freely, Mahamud who was gouernour of Geriana, cau∣sed the gouernour of Koarrazm to be taken out of prison, and his head to be cut off: which done, he writ the whole discourse to Nue, crauing pardon for Aboaly; who made aunswere that he had long since pardoned him, charging him to send him, for that he had some matters of importance to impart vnto him: Mahamud sent him, but at his comming to Bokara, Nue committed him close prisoner, where he died. As for Faech his brother, who was retired to Ilechkam, he persuaded him to make warre against Nue, who being [ C] aduertised of all their desseignes, sent to Sabutaquin to aduance with his troupes betwixt Rehx and Necaf, commaunding also his sonne Mahamud who was at Nichabur, to ioine with his father with all the forces he could raise; so as both being together, they made a mightie armie: the which the king of Turquestan vnderstanding, fearing the danger, he treated an accord, the which Nue did not refuse, by whose meanes they gaue the go∣uernment of Sama••kand to Faech. By meanes of this peace, all troubles were pacified, in the yere of Grace 996, and of the Egira 385; Nue remaining in the peace vntil his death, which happened two yeres after, hauing raigned two and twentie yeres, and leauing for successor his sonne Abul Here Mansur.

Matters passing thus in Vsbek, Maurenahar, and Karason; the base countrie of Persia [ D] was not without combustions, for that the Daules, of whom mention hath beene made, (whom we haue purposely omitted to auoid confusion by the multiplicitie of affaires, and the better to explane this narration) continuing their broyles, afflicted it much, for that Azuda Daulè succeeding in the realme, sent Abul Fauares his sonne to Ker, to keepe a gouernour of his who had reuolted, in awe, whom he vanquished. At that time Moeze∣du Daulè king of Bagadet, and brother to Azudu, died, whom Baktear his sonne succee∣ded, to whom the father gaue charge before his death in all things to follow the counsell of his vnckle, and of those prudent Wazirs which he left him: but he did otherwise than he had charge, for he gaue occasion to Sabutaquin and Albutaquin to enter into his coun∣trie with great troupes of Turkes, who being come to Wacet, did much perplex him. [ E] Baktear demaunded succours of Azudu, who came with all speed, fought with the Turks, and put them to rout, pursuing them to Bagadet, where they were besieged by Baktear. Hauing done wonders for their defence, being forced by n••cessitie, they left the citie, and went with the C••life to Tecrit, a towne in Diarbek vpon the bankes of the riuer of Tygris: so as the citie fell into the hands of Baktear, who caused the Calife to returne and consigned it vnto him. Azudu Daulè was much troubled thereat; so as he seised vpon his nephew, and put him in prison, yet he set him soone after at libertie.

Matters being thus ended, Azudu Daulè caused his armie to march against Hierak in Arabia, and Baktear seeing him absent, entred presently into his countrie, and committed great spoyles: the which his vnckle vnderstanding at his returne, Baktear was forced to [ F] retire himselfe to Mosul, a great citie in Diarbek (which many hold to be Nineue) the which was then gouerned by one called Abusaleb, who came and joyned with Ba••t••••r, with an armie of twentie thousand men, and encountring Azudu Daulè at Te••rit, he van∣quished them. Abusaleb fled, and Baktear was taken, whose head his vnckle caused to be

[ A] cut off, being six and thirtie yeares old, hauing held the realme eleuen yeares, and cer∣taine moneths. After this, the countrie of Mosul seeming verie pleasant to Azudu Daulè, he stayed there, adding diuers other lands vnto it, in the yeare of Grace 980, and of the Egyra 368, sending to reedi••ie Bagadet, the which was in a manner ruinated by the for∣mer wars. He discharged the people of diuers tributes which they had formerly payed, and caused many pits to be opened vpon the high waies, and shewed himselfe fauoura∣ble to the Sages of his Sect, to Phylosophers, to Physitians, and Poets whom he knew to excell others, and giuing leaue vnto the Christians that were in his countries, to build Churches, bearing part of the charge. In the yeare of Grace 982, and of the Egyra 371, [ B] he caused a goodly hospital to be built at Badaget, the which he endowed with great re∣uenues; and another at Scyras nothing inferiour to the other: then hauing done many things worthie the memorie of a good prince, he fell sicke of a kind of lunacie, which they call Sara, and died in the yeare of Grace 983, and of the Egyra 372, hauing raigned foure and thirtie yeares: he left three sonnes, Scerfa Daulè, Scams Daulè, otherwise called Abul Ganiar Marsabane, and the third, Bahao Daulè. The two first diuided the lands be∣twixt them, yet were not content. Scerfa Daulè went into Persia, and Scams Daulè, to Ba∣daget, whom Scerfa tooke in an enteruiew they had together; but he died soone after in the yeare of Grace 990, and of the Egyra 379. Hereupon they drew his brother Scams Daule or Abul Ganiar Marsabane out of prison, and set him in his place. This man did [ C] associat his younger brother Bahao Daule in the gouernment; but hauing some iars they fell to armes, and Scams Daule made warre against him with one Boaly Ben Hostad Hormoz, pursuing him with all rigour: but whenas he had least hope of any succours, newes came vnto him that the souldiers hauing demaunded a pay of Scams Daule, and being refused, they mutined; so as hauing taken a fort by Scaladoe, in the which were foure sonnes, and certaine kinsfolkes of Baktear, they drew them from thence, and hauing ioined with certaine other troupes, they gaue an assault to Scyras, whereas Scams Daule remained, who presently fled; but they followed him, and tooke him at Dudmon, two leagues from the citie, whither they brought him backe, and put him to death with his mother, hauing beene king nine yeares, and eight moneths; in the yeare of Grace 991, and of [ D] the Egira 380: Bahao Daule succeeded without any opposition. At that time Fakoro Daule (as hath beene said) was king of Gerion, who made war against one called Saha••d Hebad, being richer in money than men, whom he vanquished, and became lord of all his trea∣sure: then hauing ended this warre, and many others which were of no small continu∣ance; going (in the yeare of Grace 989, and of the Egyra 378) to Tabarak a fort of his; being one a day at diner, he fed so freely of salt beefe, and did presently eat such aboun∣dance of grapes, as it caused him to haue a great paine in his stomach, whereof he died within few houres after, being little lamented, by reason of the tyrannies he vsed in his lifetime.

At the newes of this death, there was such a confusion and mutinie in the towne, as [ E] they had no time to burie him, vntill the extreme stench of this dead bodie, forced them to enter••e it. He had three sonnes, of the eldest whereof, and his mother Suyda, mention shall be hereafter made. Bahao Daule hauing succeeded in the realme, he tooke Boaly for his generall and leader of his armies, hauing made warre for his brother. He gaue him charge to chase the sonnes of Baktear out of Persia; the eldest of which called A••u Na∣cere, went to Kermon with certaine troupes, surprising the gouernour in such sort, as he forced him to abandon the countrie, whereon he seised. Bahao Daule sent Mousek against him, who defeated him; and as he fled, a seruant of his stept before him, and thrust him through the bodie with his sword, of which death he had beene foretold. Moufek put tru∣stie gouernours into all places; and being well pleased with his victorie, he returned to [ F] the king, who receiued him with much honour: but being slaundred by his enemies, he was taken the same day, and soone after put to death. Bahao Daule, the first yeare of his raigne, deposed the Calife Tayha Abdelcarim Ben Mutia, hauing enioied the dignitie se∣uenteene yeres, and two moneths. Such was then the Estate of this principalitie, which being accustomed to commaund others, was then commaunded by all men. Boaly d••ed

also in Badaget in the yeare of Grace 1012, and of the Egyra 401. Bahao Daule died a [ A] yeare after, hauing liued two and fortie yeares, nine moneths, and raigned foure and twentie.

¶ Kader Bila Hamed, the six and fortieth Cal••fe.

ALthough the Califes affaires were then reduced to that Estate, as these princes had nothing left but the name, and that their commaund was rather after their man∣ner of spirituall things, they hauing no authoritie, but what the princes which then raigned gaue them, hauing euen lost that shadow of temporall jurisdiction which they [ B] had preserued vnto the time of the Daules, of whom we haue made mention: yet for that all began by them, and that Mirkond and Teix••eres do still put them in the ranke of princes, this personall succession seruing alwaies as a more certaine rule to auoid confu∣sion: we haue followed the same order, considering the great confusions and alterations which haue beene in Persia during this age, whereby the trace of their Chronologie is often lost; yet of these Califes we stil find the name B••hao Daule hauing deposed the Calife Tayha Abdelcarim, he gaue his place to Kader Bila Hamed, the sonne of Ezach, the sonne of Moktader: vnder whose name matters past after this manner,

Fakoro Daule king of Gerion, being dead by his excesse & surfer, his sonne Maiudu Daule succeeded him, who was proclaimed king although he were but three yeares old. His [ C] mother Sayda gouerned for him, being a woman of great vnderstanding and judgement, to maintaine this realme in peace and prosperitie, du••ing the minoritie of her sonne. But being growne great, he would dispose of the realme after his owne fantasie, and place gouernours at his pleasure, without the aduice or councell of his mother, where with be∣ing discontented, she retired herselfe into the fort of Tabarak. Her sonne had made one Aboaly his Vazir, against her will, who fearing that she would go out of the realme, was the cause of great trouble, hauing set guards vpon the way to stay her. ••ut all this could not preuent the princesses departure, who went to Kusest••m, whereof Badre Acem Nuyhe was gouernour, who seeing her, and being informed how matters had past with her sonne, he leuied great forces, which they two led, going to encounter Matudu Daule, [ D] the sonne of Sayda, and his Vazir Aboaly, whom they vanquished, and tooke p••isoners: Matudu Daule being in the towne of Rey; so as the realme was againe vnder the com∣maund of Sayda, who gouerned with great wisdome and judgement.

At that time Mamud Gasney raigned in Karason and Maur••nahar, who hauing made proofe of his victorious armes in all the neighbour countries, sent Embassadours to Say∣da, demaunding that there should be no money currant in her realme, but his, and that whatsoeuer should be coined, should haue his name and armes, giuing her to vnderstand that if she did otherwise, he should haue cause of discontent. She made him aunswere with a manly resolution, that if her husband liued, she would much feare his threats, for that they being both men, they might encounter: but being a widdow, she was cer∣taine [ E] he would not so much imbase his generous courage, as to wrong her: with which aunswere he was at that time pacified. Within few daies after, she pardoned her sonne Maiudu Daule, but she gaue him not the absolute gouernment of the realme, giuing vnto the second, called Scams Daule the gouernment of Amadon, and the third, whose name was Abuiafar, she put into Hisphaon; so as this queene preserued their realme in peace and prosperitie vntill her death, the which happened in the yeare of Grace 1030, and of the Egira 420. After which their followed great troubles, for that the Sultan Mam••d Gozney caused his armie to march against Hierak, and being come to Mazandazon, Ma∣nucher the sonne of Kabus, nephew to Vuax Maguir (of whom mention hath beene made) holding his Estate vncertaine, being in this companie, left the campe, and returned into [ F] his countrie without the leaue of Mamud: but fearing least the other should be offen∣ded, he sought to pacifie him with many great and rich presents which he sent him, much apparrell for his souldiers, and foure hundred thousand deniers of gold coyned, which make about six hundred thousand duckats: but for that we haue long forborne to speake

[ A] any thing of Karason, it shall be fit to returne to that discourse, and to se what hath beene done there, during these alterations in other countries.

As it hath been said, by the death of Nue, his sonne Abul Hares Mansur succeeded him in the realme, who had for his captaine generall, one called Baktuzun, against whom Abul Ilechkan king of Turquestan made warre, as he had done against his father, and being come to Samarkand, Faech who was gouernour thereof, submitted himselfe vnto him, who with sufficient forces for his desseigne, went against Bokara whereas Mansur remai∣ned, who abandoning the citie, fled, and passed to the other side of the riuer of Ammuye, Faech entred the towne, assuring the inhabitants that he came not to wrong the king, [ B] but to do him seruice, and to succour him; so as he made the king to returne, who being assured of Faechs intentions, he gaue him the charge of Baktusun, and to Baktusun he gaue the gouernment of Karason.

At that time Sabutaquin died, which was the subiect of new troubles betwixt Mamud and Imaell his children; so as Ismaell was forced to flie. After this, Mamud seised vpon Ka∣rason, whereof he was gouernour, hauing taken it from Baktusun, to whom the king had giuen it; whereof he complained to his prince by letters, beseeching him to interpose his authoritie, and restore him to his gouernment: the which was effected, and they gaue in recompence to Mamud the gouernment of Balk, Termed, and Herat: where with Mamud being discontented, he leuied men, with whom he marched against Nixabur, [ C] whereas the king remained, who not standing vpon his guards was forced to flie, doubting the strength of that place. But Mamud fearing the name of a rebell, proceeded no farther in this new combustion. There came one of king Mansurs subiects vnto him calle Maktusun; so as this prince seeing himselfe supported, returned from his flight. This man complained to Faech, that the king had not entreated him with the honour he ex∣pected: Faech embracing this occasion opened his heart vnto him, discouering vpon what termes he stood with Mansur, and how ill he was affected vnto him; so as these two agreeing together, they conspired against their king, and they gaue such order for their enterprise, as at a banquet they put out his eyes, making king in his place a young brother of his called Abdel Malek; he hauing raigned but a yere and 7 moneths. Mamud [ D] hearing of this accident, leuied all his forces, to go against the traitors, who being sur∣prised, were forced to flie, Maktusun to Nichabur, the king with Faech towards Bokara, and Abul Kacem Siniur to Keostam; whereby Mamud remained lord of Karason, against whom the rest did arme, who being ioined together, were readie to giue him battaile, but the sodaine death of Faech staied the euent. Ilechkan king of Turon or Turquestan, being aduertised of these broyles, leuied a mightie armie, with the which he marched to Bokara, from whence he sent word to king Abdel Malek, that he desired to succour him, and that he was come to that end; the which the young prince beleeuing lightly, he sent the best of his captaines to thanke him, whom he presently committed to prison: the which did so amase Abbel Malek, as he sought some place where to retire himselfe, and [ E] in the meane time he did hide himselfe as secretly as he could. But Ilechkan being come in∣to towne, he set guards in the high waies, at the ports, and vpon the walls; and then he made a search in the towne, whereas he found Abdel Malek, who was taken thence, and sent to V••kand, whereas he died in prison: his subiects aduanced a young brother of his, who raigned very little. This happened in the yeare of Grace 1000, and of the Egyra 389. Ilechkan seeing himselfe in possession of Bokara, tooke king Abul Hares Mansur and put out his eyes: the like he did to his two brethren Abu Ebrahem Montecer, and Abuya∣cub, all sonnes to Nue, and to his two vnckles Abu Zacharie, and Abu Salechk, with others of the royall bloud, putting them all into seuerall prisons, where he had women slaues to serue them, among the which there was one which did much affect Abu Ebrahem Monte∣cer [ F] and desiring to free him, she couered him with her garment, and being thus disgui∣sed, she drew him from thence into a friends house of hers, where he was hidden for a time, but in the end they let him go, then retiring himselfe from Bokara, he went to Koar∣razm, where he had soone made a leuie of souldiers, the which he sent against Bokara vn∣der the leading of a captaine called Arsalon Balu, who fighting with Taquin a captaine to

Ilechkan, vanquished him, and tooke him prisoner: with many other knights of his com∣panie. [ A]

As for Arsalon Balu, he ruined all the countrie vnto the lesser Cantarey, against whom came Taquin Kham gouernour of Samarkand for Ilechkan who was also defeated. After this Montecer came to Bokara, where he was receiued with much ioy, and being ioined to Arsalon Balu, they past the riuer of Gehun, and came to Nichabur. Amir Nacer the sonne of Mamud, who was gouernor, abandoning the countrie, we••t to Herat, where his father remained, who vnderstanding that they were entred into his countrie, drew his men to field against Montecer, who not daring to attend him, retired to Esf••rahen, in the countrie of Rabus, who sent vnto him presents of inestimable value, if we shall beleeue [ B] Mirkond; for he saith, that he sent him ten horses, with their furniture and caparisons of gold, thirtie with their furniture of siluer, and thirtie which were but of silke, thirtie camels laden with fine Persian tapistrie, with many other peeces of great price, many roabs of rich cloth of gold, with a great summe of money, sending also certaine gifts to all his captaines▪ Cabus was desirous he should ayd him when he came to the towne of Rey, whither he would send him good succours, with his two sonnes Darab and Manu∣cher to helpe him to take it. Yet hauing afterwards changed their minds, being past from Rey to Damion, Darab and Manucher returned to their father Kabus. This happened in the yeare of Grace 1002, and of the Egyra 391.

At the same time Mamud sent a captain called Altuntax, with his sonne Amir Nace••, to [ C] recouer Nichabur, and Montecer sent against them Abul Kacem and Arsalon Balu, who lost the battaile. Nacer was at Nichabur, and Montecer fled to Iburd, whither Nacer followed him; but Montecer tooke his way towards Gerion, the which Kabus vnderstanding, being discontented with the bad proceedings of Montecer towards him, he layd two thousand men vpon the passage to stop his entrie into his countrie▪ ••o as Montecer was forced to take another way, where, vpon a light occasion he caused Arsalon Balu to be slaine, the which did purchase him the hatred of all his people. Afterwards the war continued be∣twixt Nacer and him with variable successe, vntill that Montecer was wholy defeated in battaile, whereas Nacer woon the victorie, and the other lost the best part of his men: then flying with some few that did accompanie him, he fell into the hands of the Turco∣mans: [ D] these are shepheards which feed their flockes in diuers plaines, and make their re∣treats in cabbins, who knowing him, entreated him with much courtesie for the loue they did beare his father. Of these he sodainly gathered together a great number, with the which he past into Maurenahar. Ilechkan came against him; but the Turcomans surprising him sodainely in the night, slue a great number of his souldiers, and put him to flight, ta∣king the best part of the spoile. They returned to their cabbins, and Montecer past the ri∣uer of Gehun; but for that it was in Winter and night (the which are exceeding cold in that countrie) it was impossible for him to passe it without boat or bridge. The Turco∣mans who had assisted him, being sorrie for the spoiles which they had le••t him, prepared themselues to set vpon him, and to take it from him. But comming to the riuer, at the [ E] breake of day, they found it thawed; so as they could not follow Montecer, who found meanes to retire himselfe free from them. All this happened in the yere of Grace 1004, and of the Egyra 393.

At that time there was one called Abuiafar, a man of base condition, who of a r••bber by the high way, was growne to that power, as he commaunded the whole countrie: Montecer demaunded some succours of him, but in steed of gratifying him, he opposed himselfe against his proceedings; so as they were forced to come to battaile, where Mon∣tecer vanquished him, and going to Iburd, he had another encounter with Abu Nacer gouernor of the prouince, which was very bloodie and cruell, for that it was in the night, whereas Abu Nacer was slain during the fight: in the meane time Montecer had no place [ F] of refuge, and going along the riuer to seeke a passage, he met with the Xena or Gouer∣nour of Bokara, where he lost the best part of his men; so as with such as could follow him, he retired to Da••band, where being assisted by the gouernour of Samarkand, and some noblemen Turkes, which liued in the citie, and by some choise troupes, he gaue an

[ A] assault to Bokara, and tooke it: the whith Ilechkan vnderstanding, he went to encounter him, and fought with him; but he was vanquished, with whose spoiles, the souldiers of Montecer grew rich. This happened in the yeare of Grace 1005, and of the Egyra 394: Ilechkan hauing repaired his armie, came againe to charge Montecer, at such time whenas the souldiers which had assisted him, were retired, and that a captaine of his was gone to Ilechkan with fiue thousand souldiers: this was the cause of his rout; for hauing no power to resist his enemie, he fled, and came to the riuer of Gehun, the which not able to wade through, and wanting victualls, he was forced with his companie to stay the night there, and to feed vpon the flesh of beasts that were alreadie dead. After this, he went by vn∣knowne [ B] waies, fearing to encounter his enemie, and came to Koestam, where being pursued, and being hated of all men, for the diuers and variable changes and crosses of fortune, the which he had endured, he came in a manner alone to Bokara, for that his followers which were most discontented, had gone to Soleymon and Safy captaines to Ilechkan. The Gouernour of Bokara promised to assist him, but knowing that these two lay in ambush, he put him out of the towne. Mamud who was then lord of Karason, had rented certaine lands to one called Ebenbayg an Arabian captaine, into whose ju∣risdiction Montecer retired, & hid himselfe in a poore cottage, but another called Maruyh hearing it, he came in the night with certain Arabians, found him out, and slew him. Thus Montecer ended his troublesome life, in the yeare of Grace 1006, and of the Egyra 395: [ C] for whose death Mamud or Mahamud (although he were his enemie) was much grieued, causing Maruyh to be put to death with cruell torments.

Kabus Ben Vuax Maquir had enioied certaine lands in the countrie of Karason quiet∣ly eighteene yeares. He was descended from the auncient kings of Persia, and had not beene an actour in the aboue mentioned confusions: for being very wise and rich, he so managed his affaires, as he did bind them vnto him who for their ambition and power would not spare any man. As for Amir Sabutaquin, hauing gotten the victorie of Aboaly in Karason, he came to Bokara, where he made a strict league of friendship with Kabus, and desired to do him some seruice. At that time Fakoro Daule was lord of Gerion, as hath beene said, whom Sabutaquin sought to oppresse, and to bring Kabus into that go∣uernment: [ D] for the effecting whereof, he demaunded ten thousand souldiers of Ilechkan, the which being ioined to his owne troupes, made a great armie, the Rendezuous where∣of was at Balk, whereas, whilest Sabutaquin attended his troupes, death surprised him: Fakoro Daule died also, in whose place succeeded Maiudu Daule his sonne, vnder the go∣uernment of Sayda his mother, as hath beene said: Abul Kacem remained at Kumes, who after the death of Sabutaquin went to Kabus, with whom he made an accord that they should inuade the lands of the deceased Fakoro Daule, and enioy them both together, and so they brought their armies vnto the field, making entrie into this countrie by diuers waies: Kabus put himselfe into Nichabur, from whence he sent a captaine called Sfabed Charear, who being met by Marzabah vnckle to the deceased, hauing an armie in the pro∣uince [ E] of Gerion, for the defence thereof, he fought with him, and put him to rout: by the meanes of this victorie, he brought a great part of this prouince vnder the obedience of Kabus: and in that of Tabarstam, they held Amal a place of importance, for the recoue∣rie wherof Aken Feruzan comming with a good armie, they within the towne went out against him with Sfabed Charear, and gaue him battaile, the which he lost, being taken pri∣soner with aboue twentie of his captains.

This good successe gaue still more hope to Kabus, and made him aspire to greater mat∣ters: who to loose no time, came to Gerion, where he was proclaimed king, in the yeare 1011, and of the Egyra 400. He had afterwards some encounters with his enemies, but all succeeded fortunatly for him, so as in the end, he commaunded ouer all Gueylon, [ F] which are prouinces of a great extent, of the which he made his sonne Manucher gouer∣nour, sending great presents to Mam••d, to the end he might fortifie himselfe in his new Estate by this acknowledgement.

Kabus had a great respect to justice, & did administer it with such rigour, that wheras be∣fore he was much honoured of his people, he was now hated of them, imputing it to his

crueltie; so as not able to endure him any longer, being one day in his campe, they entred [ A] his tent to kill him, but he escaped their hands, yet not without great difficultie, and got to Bostam: but they conuerted their rage against his tent, spoiling all that was within it, being of no small value; seeking to set Manucher his sonne in his place; vpon condition that he should not reuenge that which they had done, nor ayd his father against them. But he refused the realme, vnlesse his father would consent thereunto, preferring the respect of a father, before a royal crowne; so as some of them went vnto the father, who much commending the obedience of his sonne, would not suffer him to remaine in his seruice, as he desired, but made him returne, giuing him the realme freely, and all that did belong vnto him, wherof Manucher tooke possession, with the general applause of all men, [ B] and Kabus retired himselfe into the fort of Kakek, there to spend the residue of his daies, whereas they of Gerion, fearing that whilest he liued he would be offensiue vnto them, found meanes to kill him, Manucher not knowing who were the actors therof: but wh••n he vnderstood it, he punished them seuerely.

Manucher the sonne of Kabus otherwise called Malech Almaly, seeing himselfe king of those countries, which his father had gotten in Gerion and Gueylon (in the which Ma∣iudu Daule held a good part) he sent his Embassadours to the Sultan Mamud, to dec••are himselfe his vassall, and to offer him a tribute of 50000 deniers of gold, which are about 60000 duckats, and Mamud gaue him a daughter of his to wife, but within few daies af∣ter his marriage Manucher died, his brother Darab remaining in his place. [ C]

Darab the sonne of Kabus, and brother to Manucher, was a great actor (as hath bin said) in the controuersies betwixt Nue and Boaly, whose partie he followed, & afterwards that of Nue, by whose death his father inuading the realm of Gerion, he serued him, whom he sent with troupes to Tarbarstam, for the guard of those lands which he held in that pro∣uince, but hauing beene accused of some crimes in his gouernment, he purged himselfe before his father: yet this accusation did so discontent him, as he resolued to retire him∣selfe to Mamud, who entertained him honorably; yet by his own bad carriage, in the end he fell into disgrace, which he finding, he left him, and went to Schachar king of Gurge∣stam, who at the entreatie of Mamud, dismist him: in the end, he succeeded his brother, but his time was short. [ D]

Mirkond reports in this place the valiant exploits of Sabutaquin in India, which were too long to relate. There had beene many controuersies, as hath bin said, betwixt Mamud and Ismaell his brother, after the death of their father, the which were ended by armes, to the preiudice of Ismaell, who had bin forced to flie: and Mamud seeing himselfe at rest, in re∣gard thereof, had made a peace, and contracted friendship with Ilechkan, for the desire which he had to go to the conquest of India, as his father had done, where he obtained great and famous victories, and brought away rich spoiles. Ilechkan enuying his good for∣tune, and without any respect to the faith which he had giuen him, entred into his coun∣trie, and sent Iafar Taquin his kinsman against Balk.

Arsalon Balu held then the gouernment of Herat for Mamud, and of all the Gaznehen, [ E] which are very great prouinces: this man opposed himselfe against the attempts of Il••ch∣kan and Iafar Taquin. Mamud was soone aduertised of the trecherie of his allie; so as lea∣uing his conquests of India, h•• returned speedily for the defence of his owne countrie, giuing such order for his affaires, by the meanes of Arsalon Balu a captaine of very great experience, as he first defeated Ebu Abdala an Arabian captaine, who led Taquins armie, which in the end was wholy ouerthrowne and put to flight: he cut in peeces the greatest part of his souldiers, the rest escaped by the riuer of Gehun, which they past with their generall, who lost in this battaile many of his kinsmen, and left a brother of his prisoner.

This defeat toucht Ilechkan very neere, for he saw it impossible for him to resist the force and good fortune of his enemie: this caused him to make a league with Kaderkham [ F] king of Ketao Kotan, which we call Catay, to the end he should succour him in this war, and stop the course of Mamuds victories, who made a great leuie as well in Catay, as in Turquestan and Maurenahar, and ioining with the forces of Ilechkan, they past the riuer of Gehun together.

[ A] The newes of this great preparation was soone brought to Mamud, being at Ta∣barstam, who went speedily to Balk, where he gathered together a great armie of Turks, Calanges, Gazneys, and Aueganys, and marching against his enemies, he gaue them bat∣taile, in which, they of Ilechkans side in the beginning had the aduantage, which Mamud seeing, despairing in a manner of the victorie, he mounted vpon an elephant, which he thrust with great furie into the middest of his enemies, of whom he ouerthrew many, notwithstanding any resistance they could make, the elephant being in choler: this gaue great courage to Mamuds souldiers; for seeing their prince in such danger, they did what they could to free him, and so got the victorie, putting their enemies to flight. They hold [ B] that this was one of the most bloodie battailes which had beene giuen in that age, which happened in the yeare of Grace 1008, and of the Egyra 397.

This victorie did purchase such peace to Mamud, as no man could hinder his desseigne, which was yerely either by himselfe or his captaines, to make a voiage to the Indies, to conuert those people to his sect: which the king of the countrie perceiuing, especially one called Bal, he found means, as wel by his own forces, as by his allies, to leuie a mightie ar∣mie, and came to encounter Mamud, with whom he did fight a whole day, but Mamud got the victorie of the Indians, where he had a rich spoile, taking fortie elephants for the war: the rest retired to a fort which was held impregnable, for that it stood in the middest of a [ C] great lake, into which they had drawn all their treasure, and the riches of their Pagodes, or houses of their Idolls, which was inestimable: but the building being weake, Mamud found meanes to enter it. There was in this fort (as Mirkond writes) seuen millions of dragmes of gold, 700 ingots of gold, waighing 2800 markes, with store of pealre and pretious stones, and many other rich peeces of great value, putting all into a house where they kept this treasure. Mamud hauing taken this great prize, returned to Gaznehen, lea∣uing that which he had conquered to confident persons. This happened in the yeare of Grace 1011, and of the Egyra 400. He had another battaile against the Gaores, which be they of Guzarate, and whereas one called Mahamed Ben Sury a captaine of the Vaneanes would haue taken their quarrell in hand, he was defeated, and a sonne of his taken priso∣ner, [ D] who died vpon the way, hauing poisoned himselfe.

At that time there was a great famine in the countrie of Karason, so as men and women did eat on another, without any respect of sexe, age, or condition.

After the great battaile aboue mentioned, Ilechkan had retired himselfe to Maurena∣har, where hearing that Togan Kam his brother, who had beene with him in that battaile, would fall to Mamud, he tooke armes against him; but Mamud arriuing, they agreed. These troubles thus pacified, Mamud went against Bagadet, which he besieged; so as the Calife Kader Bila being within it, was forced to yeeld himselfe, and to content him with fiue millions of dragmes, euery dragma being six pence of our money, by meanes of which summe, he left him in peace, and retired into Persia.

[ E] In the time of Nue the sonne of Mansur, Chachar Abu Nacer, sonne to Abu Mahamed had his fathers gouernment, which he had giuen him, comming to f••ll age, and had retired himselfe to a priuat life, whenas Aboal•• a rebel to Nue, armed against Chachar, & dispossest him of his countrie, whom Amir Sabutaquin father to Mamud, tooke into his seruice: and his lands comming afterwards to his hands, he restored them againe. Abu Nacer came af∣terwards to serue Mamud, who recompenced him with a confirmation of the realm, and other rich presents. Yet Mamud desiring to returne into India, & hauing a will to lead him with him, he excused himselfe from this iourney: which Mamud then dissembled, but be∣ing returned, he sent Altuntax against him; & Abu Mahamed the father of Nacer, he sent to Bagadet, but he depriued his sonne of the realme, who (flying into a fort) was taken, and put to the racke, to make him confesse where he had hidden the great treasure whi•••• ••e [ F] had: and being afterwards carried before Mamud, he caused him to be whipt, & com••it∣to close prison: then calling the father from Bagadet, he gaue him the price of all th••t which he had formerly held in Gurges••am and Gaznehen, giuing him many other pre∣ferments, to the end he might haue meanes to liue honourably about him, ••nto the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 1016, and of the Egyra 406, when he died.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hings thus pacified, Mamud returned againe into India, where he woon many [ A] 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ and brought home rich spoiles. At that time Mamun gouerned the countrie of 〈…〉〈…〉, who died soone 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ leauing his sonne Aboaly to succeed him: he married a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to Mamud, who loued him much; so as he past the small time he liued in peace, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 whose ••eath his 〈…〉〈…〉 called Mamun Ben Mamun came to the succession of the realme, who 〈…〉〈…〉 within few daies after, not without suspition of poison, which one Neala•••• 〈…〉〈…〉 of his, was suspected to haue giuen him. One of his sonnes was 〈…〉〈…〉. But Mamud being much grieued for the death of Mamun, resol∣ued 〈…〉〈…〉; wherefore he leuied an armie, causing it to march to Koarrazm: 〈…〉〈…〉 ••harged him sodenly one morning, striking a great amasement into the [ B] 〈…〉〈…〉 so as the victorie was verie doubtfull, yet in the end it turned to Mamud, 〈…〉〈…〉 being forced to flie, seeking to passe a riuer, he fell in quarrell with the 〈…〉〈…〉 th•• boat 〈◊〉〈◊〉 knowing him, dissembled it, vntill that hauing giuen a watchword 〈…〉〈…〉 they bound ••is hands, and carried him to Mamud, who in the 〈…〉〈…〉 to pardon him: but he talked with him so boldly, and with such little 〈…〉〈…〉 as he caused him to be hanged, giuing the gouernment of Koarrazm to 〈…〉〈…〉 we••t againe into India, where he had a famous victorie against Gulkand a 〈…〉〈…〉 who▪ ••eeing himselfe vanquished with the losse of fiutie thousand men, fearing 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a wife which he loued deerely for her great beautie, should fall into his enemies 〈◊〉〈◊〉 he flew her, and himselfe presently after.

After this Mamud made another voiage into India, where he vanquished two kings, [ C] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and Iand••bal, from whence he brought rich spoiles: then returning to Gaznehen, because a stately Mosque or Temple to be built, as a thanks giuing for his victories: and from thence he entred into Persia, where he tooke the towne of Rey, and that of Hispha∣on in Hie••a••▪ the which did belong to Maiudu Daule, the gouernment of which he gaue to M••sud his sonne▪ then hauing beene sicke two yeres, he died in the yere 1031, and of the Egyra 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Two daies before his death, he caused his chiefest treasure to be brought before him, which seeing, he poured forth many teares without speaking any word; so as it is not known vpon what consideration: but for that he commanded they should keepe it carefully, it was conceiued that his heauinesse grew for that he might no longer enioy [ D] it. Being readie to die, he caused the youngest of his sons to be brought to him, thinking that he would proue very factious, whom he entreated to passe his word, that after his death he would liue louingly with his brethren, and would respect and obey the elder as reason required: the other answered, that he should not trouble himselfe in that regard, and that he would gouerne himselfe with them, as he had done with his.

Matters passing thus in Karason, Maurenahar, and Vsbek, the affaires of Persia were in no lesse cofusion: for Magidu Daule being king of Gerion, he gouerned himselfe carelesly, and without judgement. Mamud, a most ambitious prince, being loath to loose so good an occasion, sent a mightie armie against him, led by one of his best captaines, to whom Ma∣gidu Daule yeelded without blowes, imagining that hauing not offended Mamud, he [ E] would not depriue him of his realme: but he was deceiued; for being a prisoner with his sonne Abuzef, Mamud had no sooner intelligence that he was in the town of Rey, but he caused the treasure of Magidu to be brought to him, where there was a million of deniers of gold, which do almost make a million & a halfe of crowns, 15000 deniers of gold in iewells, and great store of plate both of gold and siluer, with other peeces of great price, and then he caused Magidu Daule to be brought before him, of whom he demanded if he had euer read Chanoma, which is the Chronicle of their kings, to whom he aunswered 〈◊〉〈◊〉; then he asked him if he could play at chesse, the other answered yea. Haue you neuer ••ead then, said Mamud, that two kings did hold one realme together, or haue you not ••••ene at chesse two kings in one place? whereunto Magidu Daule aunswered no: Mamud [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hen blame him sharply for his ignorance and carelesnesse, and then he sent him with 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and a Wazir to Gaznehen, where Mamud had a goodly librarie, which he cau∣se•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 brought to Karason, where he had left his sonne Masud for king.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 were also great broiles among the Daules, as well in Persia, as in Kermon, especi∣ally

betwixt Albufauares and Gelala, brethren to Sulton Daule, who had succeeded his fa∣••her Baodaule; but in the end they agreed in the yeare 1019, and of the Egyra 309. In Di∣••rb••k raigned Acen Ben Baoda••le, therwise called Mocharaf Daule, who had intelligence ••ith one of the chiefe captaines of Sulton Daule the which being discouered, it was hard ••o preuent, but by armes: after many encounters, they agreed, vpon condition that Mo∣••haraf Daule should gouerne the prouince of Hierak of Arabia, and Sulton Daule should ••aue Auuaz and Persia: but Sulton Daule being returned home, leuied a greater armie ••han before, vnder the commaund of Eben Salak, whom he sent against Mocharaf, but he was vanquished, and besieged in a fort, whither he had retired himselfe, and in the end ••orced by necessitie to yeeld to his enemie, to haue his life saued; the which did so puffe 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Mocharaf, as he caused himselfe to be called king of kings. This was in the yere 1021, ••nd of the Egyra 411: and in the yere after, he put out the eyes of Eben Salak. The same ••eare Gelala Daule was made king of Bagadet, who had for Wazir Abugaleb, whom the ••ouldiers murthered, for that he paied them with words. There was afterwards a new ac∣••ord made betwixt Mocharaf Daule and Sulton Daule, by the meanes of Sultons sonne, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 condition that Mocharaf should enioy Hierak of Arabia, and Persia, and Sulton, Kir∣••on, who died two yeares after, in the yeare of Grace 1023, and of the Egyra 413. After his death Abu Mokarram one of his chiefe Captaines sent his sonne Abulganiar with forces to Auuaz: but the Turkes or Turcomans the which remained in Persia, called Abulfauares brother to Sulton who was in Kirmon, and brought him into Scy∣••as, before he began to march; the which Abulganiar vnderstanding, he raised a new ar∣••ie which he sent against Scyras; which made his competitor to retire to Kirmon: but ••he countrie was nothing more quiet, for some demaunded peace, others would haue ••ar made against Abulfauares, and the king hauing no money, was forced to go to Noa∣••••ndian, wanting experience (by reason of his youth) to auoid so many crosses; where∣••••on they that were of Abulfauares faction made him returne to Scyras, and proclaimed 〈◊〉〈◊〉 king; and they of the partie of Abul Ganiar did so animate him, as he did arme against 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vnckle, where after variable euents, in the end he forced him to abandon Scyras the se∣••••nd time, where the other entred, and was againe declared king.

In the yeare 1026, and of the Egyra 416, Mocharaf Daule died at Bagadet, aged three 〈◊〉〈◊〉 twentie yeares, and three monethes, hauing raigned fiue yeares, and fiue and twentie 〈◊〉〈◊〉: after his death they sent for Basora Gelala Daule to succeed him, who comming not 〈◊〉〈◊〉 such speed as is required in the like affaires, they gaue the gouernment to another; ••••ereof Gelala seeking reuenge, he came against Bagadet, whom the Calife Kader sought 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••acifie with reasons and entreaties; but all this could not keepe him from fighting, to ••••lala•• losse, who was defeated and forced to flie to Basora, hauing lost the best part of his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and a rich bootie. The yeare following, the Turkes came in great troupes to Baga∣•••••• which they tooke, spoiled, and fired, the which they did assure themselues against the ••••bians which remained in that countrie: this made the inhabitants to call Gelala to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 succours, whom they proclaimed king of Bagadet, where entring, he went to the ••••••ifes house to kisse his foot, who receiued him courteously, in the yeare of Grace 1029, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the Egyra 419: but in the meane time, the Turkes which he had brought with 〈◊〉〈◊〉 demaunded their pay, and Gelala hauing no money, they committed great insolen∣•••• ••specially in the house of Aboaly Ben Mekula Wazir to Gelala, which they spoiled, car∣•••••• away all that was within it, which was of no small value, and they did shut Gelala 〈◊〉〈◊〉 house, not suffering him to come forth, vnlesse the Calife would be come aunswe∣••••ble that they should be paied, as he did; for the effecting whereof, he sold many peeces 〈◊〉〈◊〉 great value. It was at the same time whenas Mamud Gaznay sought to seise vpon Per∣•••••• whereof Abul Ganiar aduertised his vnckle Gelala Daule, that they might ioine toge∣••••••••, and resist their common enemie; but the other, in steed of marching against Ma∣•••••• went and spoiled Auuaz which did belong vnto his cousin, from whence he drew a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 summe of money.

••he dissentions were as great at Basora betwixt the Turkes, and them of Dialema, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 one fauouring Malek Azir sonne to Abu Mansur, and nephew to Gelala Daule, whom

they of Dialema would not receiue, but during their discords Abul Ganiar imbracing [ A] th•• ••••casion to his aduantage, seised vpon Basora, and from thence he went to Wacet; so 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••is kinsmens goods came into his power, the which Gelala sought to hinder by all meanes possible: but the souldiers would not march for him before they had their pay; so as for want of money, he demaunded some as it were by way of loane, of the richest men in Bagadet, the which did purchase him the hatred of all men. In the meane time, Abulfau••r••e•• who raigned in Kermon, seeing the affaires thus confused in Persia, leuied an armie to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his profit thereby: but he died vpon the way; so as the great men of Ker∣mon 〈◊〉〈◊〉 one common consent called in Abul Ganiar, to whom they gaue the gouern∣me••••▪ and so he was declared king of Persia and Kermon: then without losse of any [ B] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 he came with a good armie against Bagadet; but Gelala Daule met him and gaue him 〈◊〉〈◊〉, ••he which Abul Ganiar lost, and was forced to retire to Auuaz, and Gelala leauing 〈◊〉〈◊〉 garrisons at Wacet for the guard thereof, he returned to Bagadet in the yeare 103••, and of the Egyra 422, in which yeare the Calife Kader died, hauing held the seat one and fortie yeares, and foure moneths, in whose place they did set Kahem or Alkahem Bea••••••yla Abuiafar Abdula his sonne.

¶ Kahem or Alkahem Beamaryla Abuiafar Abdula, the seuen and fortieth Calife.

THe time of Kahem or Alkahem the sonne of Kader was not more peaceable than the [ C] rest: and beginning with Karason, we haue formerly spoken of the death of Mamud, whom Mahamed his sonne succeeded. He had a brother to whom his father in his life time had giuen the gouernment of Hisphaon; who no sooner heard of his fathers death, but he armed against his brother: he commaunded ouer his subiects with such rigour, as all hated him, and seeing him absent, they reuolted; but Mamud returned speedily, and inuested the towne, the which he tooke, and punished the rebells: after w••ich he con∣tinued his enterprise against Karason; but before he came there, he writ to his brother Mahamed, assuring him that his comming was onely to serue him, for that the countries which he enioied were more than sufficient to make him liue happily. Mahamed who was not well pleased with this visit, sent him word that he desired to be excused, and that he [ D] should returne, the which did much discontent Masud; so as he declared himselfe an open enemie to Mahamed, whom they did aduise to reconcile himselfe, the which he would not harken to, but sent against his brother a captaine called Issuf Sabutaquin, and he himselfe followed with the greatest forces he could raise; but he stayed a moneth at Tanganabat, where he past the Ramedon of Mahometan Len••in the end Masud enui∣roned ••im, and by the treason of Issuf, and the villanie of Amir Aly (one of Mahameds chiefe men) he was taken and deliuered to Masud, who rewarded the traitors as they had deserued: for he cast Issuf laden with yrons into a dungeon, and caused Amir Aly to be hanged, and as for his brother Mahamed, he put out his eyes, remaining after this manner mai••te•• of the realmes of Karason and Gazneken, besides the prouince of Hierak, which [ E] his father had giuen him, the which happened in the yeare of Grace 1032, and of the Egyra 422. After this he sent Altuntax gouernour of Koarrazm against Aly Taquin, who held Samarkand and Bokara, betwixt whom there was a battaile, where Altuntax had the worst in the beginning, by reason of a stratagem which Taquin vsed; yet in end he had the victorie, but it cost him deere: for he lost many of his men, and his owne life, who seeing his end draw neere, caused his people to make an accord with the enemie, least they should fall into some daunger, being without a head.

In the yeare of Grace 1034, and of the Egyra 424, the countrie of Gibal, and the 〈…〉〈…〉 w••••e of Rey, reuolted against Masud, the like did the garrisons which his father had l••••t in India; but in recompence therof, he subdued Gerion and Tabarstan: And where∣•••••••• [ F] his absence two captaines (Turkes) the one called Togotel or Togozelbek, and Ia∣k•••••••••• ••alinquis, did rise against him, at his returne he subdued them, and then he made a 〈…〉〈…〉 India; but the Turkes being but scattered, and not defeated, they made ••••ad ag••••ne by reason of his absence, and subdued many townes in Karason, forcing

[] ••l••on Daulè Ben Kakuya, and Abusale, to go out of their gouernements, for which cause M••sud came presently to Gerion, and hearing in his passage that a robber by high wayes ••ad retired himselfe into a fort, with a hundred of his companions, he caused them to ••ome vnto him, vpon his safe conduct and assurance: but when they were before him, he ••••nt them to be hanged, saying, That such people should be punished in any sort what∣••oeuer, and so continuing his way, they made many complaints vnto him of Nur Taquin, ••ouernour of Balk, but he could hardly satisfie their demaund, for that it was W••ter, and there had fallen aboundance of raine; yet going on his way, he had news that Daud 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Turkish Captaine brought great forces to succour Balk, in fauour of Nur Taquin; so as Masud fearing to be compassed in, went to encounter Daud, the which Nur Taquin vn∣••erstanding, he pursued him, and charged his men in the rere, whereas he slew many, and carried away a great bootie. Masud being thus ill entreated, continued his course ••gainst Daud, who vanquished him, and forced him to flie to Gazneken, where he put ••••ny Turkes to death which were his souldiers, hauing fought but faintly in the bat∣••••le which he had against Daud Sailuk; then, hauing sent his sonne Maod••d to Balk, with ••••••cer Hamed his V••azir, and a good number of souldiers, he went towards India, carry∣••••g his blind brother, and his children, with him: comming to a passage of the riuer of ••••nd, (which the Persians call Pang, the which is that of Indus) he went ouer with his troupes, leauing his blind brother, with his treasure, on the other side, in the guard of a captaine called Nustaquin, who embracing this occasion, diuided the treasure among his ••••••ldiers, and proclaymed the blind man king, who refused it: but in the end he yeel∣••••d, for that they had otherwise threatned to kill him; after which, they past the riuer with 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and fell vpon Masuds men, who made no great resistance, expecting no such charge; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Masud was taken, of whom they demaunded no other satisfaction, but that he ••••uld content himselfe to liue in peace in some conuenient place; the which he accep∣••••d, and demaunded the fort of Kobrakebir, the which was graunted, with a good guard. ••••sud, at his departure, entreated his brother to send him some money to defray his ••••rney, but Mahamed (who was verie couetous) commanded they should giue him fiue ••••••dred Dragmes, which make about twelue pounds ten shillings starling, whereat Ma∣•••••• was much grieued; but he that brought the money, gaue him of his owne one thou∣••••••d fiue hundred deniers of gold, which are about two thousand duckats, the which was ••••••••rwards well payed.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 for the blind king, seeing himselfe vnfit to gouerne, by reason of his blindnesse, he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his realme to his sonne Hamed, who by the counsell of a sonne of Issuf, and of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Aly Kachoand (whose fathers Masud had put to death, to reuenge the blind king) 〈◊〉〈◊〉 secretly to Kobrakebir, and s••ue Masud, hauing beene king ten yeares. He was very 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and bountifull; who hauing (as hath beene said) sent his sonne Maodud to Balk: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••earing of his fathers disgrace, and of the returne of Mahamed from India, attended 〈◊〉〈◊〉 at the passage of Gazneken, where he tooke them at such an aduantage, as he van∣••••••ed them, and tooke prisoners Mahamed, his sonne Hamed, and others that were there; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to death Nustaquin, and the two councellors of the death of Masud, with many 〈◊〉〈◊〉 bloud royall, except one Abderrhayn, sonne to the blind king, whose life he saued 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his occasion: Masud being a prisoner, Abderramon found him with a crowne vpon 〈◊〉〈◊〉, the which in contempt he cast to the ground; Abder Rhayn finding this deed 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••range, and taking it vp, set it vpon his vnckles head, with words of great comfort, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 act of pietie comming to the knowledge of Maodud, in this occasion he requited 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with his life.

Mao••ud hauing obtayned this victorie, he caused a sumptuous building to be made, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 they call Fall Habad, and in the language of Karason, the place of Adoganè. The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Masud bred great combustions in Persia and India, from whence Maodud feared 〈◊〉〈◊〉 that his brother Maiudud should returne and trouble him: but he died vpon the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 as Maurenahar, and the lands in India, came into the possession of Maodud: yet 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••urkes Salinguis, which were at Maurenahar and Karason, would not acknowledge 〈◊〉〈◊〉 against whom he sent his armie, in the yeare of our Redemption 1045, and of the

Egyra 435, against the which Olob Arsalon, the sonne of Iakarbek, opposed himselfe with [ A] goodly troupes, fought with them, and had the victorie: on the other side, great multi∣tudes of Turkes going out of Turquestan, spoyled the countries of Garmeer and Kan∣dachar; but the garrisons of Maodud attended them at the passage, and made a great slaughter.

At that time, the kings of India which were vassalls to Maodud, rebelled, and hauing made a league among themselues, they came to besiege Lahor, which Maodud sent spee∣dily to relieue: but the dissentions of these kings among themselues, was the cause that Maodud pacified all things easily, and m••de the rest returne to their former obedience. Hauing ••nded this quarrell, he caused his armie to march against the Turkes Salinquis, [ B] wh•• ••eld Karason, but he died vpon the way of the chollicke, in the yeare of our Salua∣••••on 1050, and of the Egyra 441. Although he had two sonnes, yet the souldiers would haue Aly Ben Masud his brother succeed him, but he did not long enioy his royaltie; for a Wazir of Maoduds set Abd Rachid at libertie, and proclaymed him king, supporting him in such sort, as the other was forced to quit the place.

As for Bagadet, matters were still in confusion: for the people reuolted againe against G••••••••a Daulè, in contempt of whom they proclaymed Abulganiar king of Bagadet, and sent for him, but he excused himselfe, wherein he was happie: for the Turkes agreed soone af∣ter with Gelala Daule: yet this reconciliation was not lasting; for they made a new spoyle within the towne, the which they fired to haue more meanes to spoyle, seeking [ C] to chase away Gelala, so as these broyles continued all the yeare of Christ 1037, and of the Egyra 427, and th•• next yeare after, when the cold was so extreame, as the riuer of Degile, which is Tygris, was frosen twelue dayes together, and there fell such aboun∣dance of snow about Bagadet, as it lay three spans deepe, the which is worthie of admira∣tion, considering the climat.

Gelala continued for a time in good tearmes with the Turkes, but in the yeare of Grace 1044, and of the Egyra 434, one of their captaines called Ebrahem Nealy Salinqui, en∣tred ••••to Persia, in the prouince of Hyerak, and tooke Amedon.

T••••zelbek, another captaine, tooke the towne of Rey, and hereupon Gelala Daulè di∣ed, hauing raigned seuenteene yeares. His sonne Abu Mansur was at Wacet, whom they [ D] sent ••••r, but the troubles were such, as he durst not abandon the countrie; so as they gaue gouernement to Abul Ganiar. Tokzelbek, in the meane time, spoyled all Persia with a victorious armie: whereupon, Abul Ganiar made an alliance with him, and married his sonne to the daughter of Daud Salinqui, cousin to Tokzelbek, and in the yeare following, which was in the yeare of our Redemption 1049, and of the Egyra 440, he died in Kermon, leauing fiue sonnes; Abu Mansurfulad Sotun, Kozrrao Feruz, Abu Taher, Abu∣sayd Aboaly, and Kay Kozrrao. Sotun, as the eldest, thought to succeed, but Kozrrao Fe∣ruz seised vpon the realme, who changing his name, was called Malek Rhaym; so as there was great warres betwixt these two brethren, with variable successe; in the end, Rhaym, with the helpe of Tokzelbek, tooke Scyras, and the better part of Persia, all being in com∣bustion, [ E] and then he returned to Wacet.

The troubles continued also in Bagadet, the which had lasted since the death of Gela∣la, by the meanes of the Calife of Damas, who was of the familie of Ismael, and sought to expell the Calife Kahem or Alkahem, out of Bagadet, whom he forced to quit the seat, and to flie to Tokzelbek, with whom he had some friendship: he entred into Bagadet, and put all to ••••re and sword, sparing neither quicke nor dead; for he opened the sepulchres to see if there were not some thing hidden in them, and so restored him to his Calife∣ship. In the meane time, Malek Rhaym came to Bagadet, who notwithstanding all his al∣legations, and that he was retired into the Califes house, yet he fell into the hands of Tokzelbek, who put him in prison, where he died: but this peace did not reconcile his [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 brethren, Mansur, and Abusayd, so as in the end, the last, after many variable 〈◊〉〈◊〉, was taken by Mansur, who put him to death: the like he did to a Wazir of his, 〈…〉〈…〉 serued his deceased father, setting in his place Facel Ben Acen, who seeing 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••••led in his charge, in requitall tooke king Mansur, and put him prisoner in a

[] Tower, where he ended his dayes.

In Kermon there was a Turkish captaine called Saliuquy, and otherwise Malek Kaoerd, ••ho hearing what Pazel had done against Mansur, leuyed a great armie against him; so ••s the other was forced to flie, and to retire to Olob Arselom, with whom he got great ••ches, yet he was not in such safetie, but was taken prisoner, with a sonne of his at Na∣••om of Molk, and they were put into the sort of Stahhar, where they died, in the yeare of our Redemption 1057, and of the Egyra 448. As for Aboaly Kay Kozrrao, the sonne ••••to Abul Ganiar, to whom the father had left his gouernement, he did willingly resigne it 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the hands of Olob Arsalom, who gaue him the lands of Naoband, Iun, and Aktak, ••••ere he spent the remainder of his dayes; Arsalom entreating him still with much cour∣••••••••••. He liued fortie yeares after his brethren, and died in the yeare of our Saluation ••••••5, and of the Egyra 487, which was in the end of the Daulès gouernement in 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

As for Togotel or Tokzelbek, he pursued Abd Rachid, who had retired himselfe into a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of that strength, as seeing he could not win it by force, he wrought so by gifts, as he ••••••rupted the guards, so as Abd Rachid was deliuered vnto him, with many of his kins∣••••n, whom he caused to be murthered, and then he declared himselfe king, marrying a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the deceased: but within few dayes after, being in a publique place to receiue the salutations which they are accustomed to make in those quarters, ten of the chiefe 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the countrie, combyning together, came to doe it, who being round about him, ••••••w their swords, and slew him. Soone after, Charkir, a captaine which came from the ••••••dies, freed Ferrogozad out of prison, who was the sonne of Masud, and brother to Abd ••••••hid, and made him king. Daud Saliuqui, of whom Ferrogozad had gotten the victorie, ••••yed an armie to go against Karason, against whom Saliuqui, king of Turquestan, sent ••••ny of his captaines, who were vanquished: in the end, Olob Arsalom did fight with 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and defeated him, taking many Gazneys prisoners, who were afterwards reuenged ••he Turkes that were prisoners in Gaznehen. Ferrogozad hauing gouerned six mo∣••••••••s, died, leauing to succeed him his brother Kobrahem Ben Masud, at that time also di∣•••••• ••ahem or Alkahem the Calife, in the yeare of our Lord God 1074, and of the Egyra 〈◊〉〈◊〉, hauing held the place foure and fortie yeares, and foure moneths.

¶ Almoktady Byla, the eight and fortieth Calife.

••Fter the death of Kahem, Almoktady Byla was set in his place, in whose time there 〈◊〉〈◊〉 were many broyles in Persia, but of small importance: and as for Karason, and the ••••••••trie of Maurenahar, Hebrahem, brother to Ferrogozad, who had succeeded him after ••eath, made an accord with the Turkes, and hauing setled his realme in peace, he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 voyage into India, where he got great conquests, and tooke great spoyles: but 〈◊〉〈◊〉, king of Turquestan, seeing Persia to enioy a secure peace, thought the time fit 〈…〉〈…〉 his profit, for the effecting whereof, he leuied a great armie, whereof Ebrahem 〈◊〉〈◊〉 aduertised, he sent Embassadours vnto him, by whose meanes he was diuerted 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his dessigne, and for the better confirmation of their friendship, Ebrahem marryed 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Masud to the daughter of Malekcha, and then Ebrahem died, in the yeare of our 〈◊〉〈◊〉 1089, and of the Egyra 481. Six yeares after, the Calife Almoktady Byla died, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 yeare of our Lord God 1095, and of the Egyra 487, hauing gouerned nineteene 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and fiue moneths.

¶ Almostazer Byla, the nine and fortieth Calife.

[] ••••••ostazer, the sonne of Almoktady, succeeded his father; in whose time Bagadet ha∣••••ng beene ruined by the ouerflowing of the riuer of Tygris, the scituation was 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and it was new built on the other side of the riuer towards the East, where it 〈◊〉〈◊〉, in a more commodious scituation than the first, hauing had fiue and twentie 〈◊〉〈◊〉 since the first foundation layed by Abuiafar, and yet not one of them died in it,

the which is worthie of consideration. As for Almostazer Byla, he liued in peace in a [ A] manner the whole time of his gouernement, which was fiue and twentie yeares, and six moneths, at the end whereof he died, in the yeare of our Lord God 1129, and of the Egyra 512.

¶ Almostarched Byla Fazele, the fiftieth Calife.

TO this ••••••able Calife succeeded his sonne Almostarched, who was verie couragi∣ous, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 inclined to warre, the which he made against some princes of Persia, and ha∣uing se••••ed vpon some of the prouinces of Masud Saliuqui king of Karason, they fought [ B] with variable successe, but in the end Masud had the victorie neere vnto Tabris, whereas Almostarched was defeated, and escaped by flight, yet he was presently after taken, and pre∣sented to Masud, who caused him to be slayne, in the yeare of Grace 1136, and of the Egyra 529, hauing gouerned seuenteene yeares, and two moneths.

¶ Rached Byla, the one and fiftieth Calife.

RAched Byla, sonne to Almostarched, came to be Calife after the death of his father, whereof desiring to be reuenged, he leuyed all the forces he could, and went against Masud into Persia, whereof he conquered a great part, but being encountred by [ C] his enemie who gaue him battaile, he was vanquished, and fled to Isfaon, the chiefe towne of Hierak in Persia, whereas Masud caused him to be slayne, in the yeare of Grace 1139, and of the Egyra 532, after whose death Masud came to Bagadet, where he en∣tred without any resistance.

¶ Almoktafy Byla, the two and fiftieth Calife.

MAsud being maister of Bagadet in the place of Rached, he seated Almoktafy Byla, vnckle to the deceased, and soone after Masud died in Persia, his captaines conten∣ting themselues with what they had in gouernement: the which encouraged Almoktafy [ D] to leuie a goodly armie, & to go into Persia, where he recouered without any great resi∣stance, that which Masud had vsurped, the which hauing enioyed the space of two and fortie yeares, without any notable innouation, he died in the yeare of our Redemption 1161, and of the Egyra 555.

¶ Almostanget Byla Issuf, the three and fiftieth Calife.

TO the Calife Almoktafy succeeded his sonne Almostanget Byla Issuf, Masud dying in Persia (as hath beene said) in his fathers life time; Arsalon Chason, his eldest sonne, had succeeded him in Gaznehen, who being come vnto the crowne, caused all his bre∣thren (which were many in number) to be taken, onely one called Baharoncha escaped. [ E] They had two kinsmen, the one was Gouernour of Karason, called Saniar, and the other of Hierak in Persia, whose name was Mahamed: these two were brethren: Baharoncha retired himselfe to Saniar, who sought to reconcile him to Arsalon; but he refusing it, Sa∣niar made warre against him, and entred into Gaznehen, so as in the end Arsalon was van∣quished: an aunt of his sought to reconcile them, but Saniar by the persuasion of Ba∣roncha, returned to armes, and hauing gotten a second victorie of Arsalon, he entred a∣gaine into Gaznehen, whereas he had a verie rich spoyle: then hauing setled Baharoncha in possession of this countrie, he returned home. Arsalon seing him absent, returned again into Gaznehen, forcing Baharoncha to flie, whom Saniar restored afterwards; and Arsa∣lon [ F] flying away, he was taken and brought vnto his brother, who caused him to be slaine, hauing raigned three yeares, in the yeare 1119, and of the Egyra 512, Baharon remay∣ning in quiet possession. He was a verie good prince, courteous, and bountifull, louing learned men, himselfe being verie learned; so as he writ some workes in phylosophie:

[ A] yet his studie made him not to loose his warlike disposition, so as he made some enter∣prises in India and Persia, where he died, in the yeare of Christ 1153, and of the Egyra 547, hauing raigned fiue and thirtie yeares.

Kozrrao his sonne succeeded him, but there falling out many combustions in this new royaltie, and not holding himselfe satisfied in his countrie, he went into India to the pro∣uince of Lahor, returning afterwards to Gaznehen: but finding his realme made sub∣iect to Saniar king of Karason, and that he was not able to oppose himselfe against his power, he returned to Lahor, where he died, in the yeare of our Redemption 1161, and for the Egyra 555, hauing raigned nine yeares. His sonne Kozrrao Malek succeeded him in Lahor, the chiefe of the realme of Molton in India: for as for Persia, all his realmes were held by others; and to recouer them it required a more warlike spirit & lesse vitious than his, which made him hatefull to all men, and especially to souldiers. A part of the coun∣trie of Gaznehen was held by one Sultan Guaya Cadin Mahamed Gaury, who made some incursions into India towards Lahor, the which he tooke, so as Kozrrao Malek returned into Gaznehen, where he died, in the yeare of our Saluation 1169, and of the Egyra 563, and in him the Sabutaquis ended. Three yeares after, the Calife Almostanger died, in the yeare of our Lord God 1172, and of the Egyra 566, hauing gouerned eleuen yeares.

¶ Almostanzy Benur Elah Acen, the foure and fiftieth Calife.

ALmostanzy Benur Elah was Calife after the death of his father: he was a good prince, bountifull, and beloued of his subiects: he gouerned nine yeares, and eight mo∣neths, and died in the yeare of Grace 1180, and of the Egyra 575, there happening no∣thing memorable during his raigne.

¶ Nacer, or Nacere Ladin, the fiue and fiftieth Calife.

ALmostanzy being dead, his sonne Nacer, or Nacere Ladin, came to be Calife, who held it seuen and fortie yeares, vnder whom Bagadet did greatly flourish. During 〈◊〉〈◊〉 gouernement, they of Koarrazm came against the Saluiquis, vanquished them, and ••••de them subiect, and the Tartarians, vnder the leading of Chinguis Kam, seised vpon 〈◊〉〈◊〉 countries of Turon, and Agem, putting all to fire and sword, at what time the Calife 〈◊〉〈◊〉 died, in the yeare of Christ 1226, and of the Egyra 622.

¶ Alzaher or Altaher Byla Mahamed, the six and fiftieth Calife.

THe sonne of Nacer called Alzaher or Altaher Byla Mahamed was made Calife in his fathers place, the which he enioyed but nine moneths, for he died in the yeare of our ••••••uation 1227, and of the Egyra 623.

Almostancer Byla, the seuen and fiftieth Calife.

ALmostancer Byla Mansur succeeded his father Alzaher: he did so much esteeme libe∣ralitie, as hauing giuen away prodigally, he became poore. In his time Persia en∣••yed a profound peace: but the Mogoles or Tartarians hauing made their first entrie, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 maisters of some of the prouinces, against whom the Calife Almostancer oppo∣•••• himselfe, forcing them to quit the best part of that which they had gotten, and ha∣••••••g defeated them diuers times, he died the seuenteenth yeare of his gouernement, in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 yeare of Grace 1244, and of the Egyra 640.

¶ Almostacem Byla Abdula, the eight and fiftieth and last Ca∣life [ A] of Bagadet.

THe Tartarians hauing beene vanquished (as you haue heard) by Almostancer Byla, they had their reuenge vnder the gouernement of his sonne Almostacem, for Ol••ku∣kan vanquished him, and slew him, hauing beene Calife fifteene yeares, and six mo∣neths: Th•••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Califes of Bagadet ended in him, which towne we call Babylon or Baldak, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Tartarians seising thereon, and on all Persia, there hauing beene seuen and thi•••••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 this familie, who commaunded about fiue hundred twentie and three yeares, [ B] of ••••om they had entreated particularly, for that in the Chronicle of Persia they are ac∣••••••nted for kings thereof, as well by Tauarich, as Mirkond. Almostacem died in the yeare o•• our Redemption 1258, and of the Egyry 655.

❧OF THE MOGOLES OR TAR∣TARIANS WHICH HAVE COMMAVN∣DED IN PERSIA. [ C]

¶ Chinguis Kan, first king of Persia of the Tartarians.

CHinguis Kan, who was the first of the Tartarians that shewed his armes in Per∣sia, was sonne to Sukih Badur, that is to say, the valiant, of whom this is the Genealogie: Badur was sonne to Partan Badur, sonne to Filkam, sonne to Thomanahkan, sonne to Baysongorkan, sonne to Kaduhkan, sonne to Tominkan, sonne to Bukahkan, sonne to Buza••••ar, who was the ninth in degree from Chinguis Kan, [ D] who was borne in the yeare of Grace 1152, and of the Egyra 546. He lost his father whenas he was but thirteene yeares old, in whose youth there happened many enterpri∣ses and combustions, the which continued vnto the yeare of our Redemption 1166, and of the Egyra 560, in which yeare Chinguis Kan vanquished all lets, and them that conten∣ded with him for the realme, enioying in the end whatsoeuer his father and ancestors had held. Before they called him Tamachin, but when he was setled in the realme (which was in the yeare of Christ 1207, and of the Egyra 602) he was called Chinguis Kan, that is to say in their language, King of Kings: he was a mightie prince, reducing vnder his empire and obedience all the Hordes or families of the Tartarians, with the realmes of Ketaoko∣tan, Helan, Tangar, and others, the which hauing subdued in the yere of Grace 1219, and [ E] of the Egyra 615, he went out of his confines with a verie powerfull armie, and inuaded the country of Maurenahar; against whom Mahomet Koarrazmcha opposed himselfe, but seeing his attempts to be of small force against so powerfull and terrible an enemie, he abandoned the countries, and fled to Karason.

Chinguis Kan entred into Maurenahar, in the yeare of our Lord 1224, and of the Egy∣ra 620, putting all to the sword that he found liuing in that countrie; the like he did at Balk, from whence he sent thirtie thousand men to pursue Mahomet Koarramzcha, who fled alwaies before him, but in the end he was ouertaken at Abyskon, or in Gueylon, where they slew him, putting all his countrie to fire and sword; from thence he went against the towne of Rey, in the which, and therebouts, they write that the Mogoles or [ F] Tartarians slew six hundred thousand persons, yea some say 1600000, and in the prouin∣ces of Nichabur, besides women and young children, 1150000 men, yea some say 1600000, committing the like spoyles during a whole yeare throughout all the prouin∣ces

[ A] of Persia. Almostancher Byla Mansur Alzaher, at that time Calife of Bagadet, leuied what forces he could to oppose against this storme, and to keepe them out of his coun∣trie, who being diuided into diuers prouinces, he tooke them at such an aduantage, as he forced them to leaue Persia, and to retire into Maurenahar, in the yeare of Grace 1227, of the Egyra 623.

By the death of Mahamet king of Koarrazm, his sonne seeing himselfe vnable to resist the Tartarians, fled into India; he was called Sultan Gelaladin, whom the Mogoles pursu∣ed, and finding him neere vnto the riuer of Indus, they gaue him battaile, in the which he was vanquished, and forced to retire to Multon, a countrie scituated in the inmost part of India. As for Chinguis Kan, hauing thus made his way, and giuen the first entrie in∣to Persia, he returned to Ketao-Kotan, where he died, in the yeare of our Saluation 1228, and of the Egyra 624, being seuentie eight yeares old: and being in peaceable possession of his realme, at the age of fiue and twentie yeares, he had fiue sonnes, whereof the eldest was called Tuchikhon, to whom the father gaue the gouernement of the realmes of Dast, Kapechah Ross; Albugar, who died six moneths before his father; Chagataykon, who ha∣uing the gouernment of Maurenahar, Aygor, and Koarrazm, hauing possest these realms ••nto the yeare 1241, and of the Egyra 638; the fourth was Oktaykahon, who succeeded his father; and the fift was Tulikhan, to whom the father gaue certaine prouinces, with all his treasure: he died also, in the yeare of Christ 1232, and of the Egyra 628; so as of the [ C] fiue sonnes of Chingui Kan, Oktaykahon onely suruiued to enioy this great succession: yet the other had some children, of whose succession we shall make mention hereafter. That which Mirkond reports, should not be past ouer with silence, which is, That it was held for certaine, that whenas Chinguis Kan was borne, he had both his hands open, and in ei∣ther of them a little bloud, a certaine prediction of his verie great crueltie.

¶ Oktaykahon, the second king of Persia of the Mogoles or Tartarians.

OKtaykahon, the fourth sonne of Chinguis Kan, succeeded him in the empire, in the yeare of our Redemption 1230, and of the Egyra 626: This prince was as good as [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 father had beene bad; and among his other good parts, he was verie bountifull. Mir∣••••••d reports, That in gifts, and extraordinarie recompences in his life time, he spent six ••••ndred sixtie six bolses (to speake after the Persian phrase) of thousands of Tomanis, ••••erie Toman being worth sixteene duckats; which amount in all to the summe of ten ••••llions, six hundred fiftie six thousand duckats. He had for Vuazir one called Gerbahhon ••••••yn, a great souldier, and verie wise, whom he sent against Gelaladin, who had retired to ••••lton, who hauing gathered his forces together, went to encounter him, and to fight ••••th him, but he was vanquished, & slayne in the battaile, the familie of them of Koarrazm •••• ending in him. After this, he turned his forces against Persia, and reduced it all vnder •••••• obedience, except Bagadet: Then, hauing raigned thirteene yeares, he died, being all [ E] ••••nt within, through his immoderat drinking of wine, in the yeare of our Lord God ••42, and of the Egyra 646. He left one sonne called Gayuk Khan, who, by reason of his ••••••age, was vnder the gouernement of his mother, who gouerned this empire foure ••••res.

¶ Gayuk Khan, the third king of Persia of the Tartarians.

GAyuk Khan, sonne to Oktaykahon, began to raigne in the yeare of our Lord God 1246, and of the Egyra 643. He gaue great hope that he would be a good prince, being a ••••eat friend to justice, liberal, and no enemie to Christians, which purchased him the loue [ F] •••• all men, but he raigned but one yeare, at the end whereof he died, in the yeare of our ••••luation 1247, and of the Egyra 644.

¶ Manchukahon, the fourth king of Persia of the Tartarians. [ A]

MAnchukahon, eldest sonne to Tuly Khan, fift sonne to Chinguis Khan, came vnto the crowne, his cousin hauing left no children; he was a good prince, valiant, liberall, and courteous. He much fauoured the Moores, and yet was not opposit to the Christians, but he detested the Iewes, and persecuted them. He gaue to Kablay Kahon his brother the lands of Ketao Kotan, who encreased them much (:this prince built the famous citie of Cambalu, at this day the court of the great Tartar:) and to his other brother Vlah Kukhan he gaue the lands of Persia; then hauing raigned thirtie yeares, he died, in the yeare of [ B] Christ 1260, and of the Egyra 657.

¶ Vlah Kukhan, the fift king of Persia of the Tartarians.

VLah Kukhan, hauing had (as hath beene said) the prouinces of Persia in gouerne∣ment, during his brothers life time, he presently set hand to worke, and besieged Is∣maelya, a place of importance, the which he carried, leauing not any one liuing that he found within it: from thence he went to Hyerak, the which he subdued, and the yere fol∣lowing, he led his armie against Bagadet, against whom there sallied forth Almostacem the Calife, who was vanquished and slayne with his foure sonnes, cutting all in peeces that he found, as well in Bagadet as thereabouts, so as (they say) he slew at the least a million and [ C] six hundred thousand persons: then, in the yeare of Christ 1261, and of the Egyra 658, he went to besiege Alep, and Damas, the which he subdued, leauing Kaptukahon for Go∣uernour of those parts of Suria: then he returned into Persia, into the prouince of Ader∣bajon, to a place called Meragah neere to Tabris, where he died, in the yere of our Salua∣tion 1266, and of the Egyra 663. Before his death, he diuided his lands to his three sons; to the eldest, called Habkaikahon, he gaue the realmes of Hierak, Mazandaron, and Kara∣son; to the second, whose name was Hyachemet, he gaue Aron, which is Armenia, and Aderbajon; to Taudon, which was the third, he left the countrie of Dyarbek, & Rabyah, which is Mesopotamia: Moreouer, he gaue Bagadet to Atalmok Iauuiny, to repaire it, as he did; and to another, called Mahynedin Paroaney, certaine lands in Rumeston. At that [ D] time, there flourished in Persia a verie excellent Astrologer, called Nacyradin Tuffy, who hath composed a booke called Zych-el-Kony, of judgements and figures, verie famous among the Persians.

Besides these three sonnes aboue mentioned, Vlah Kukhan had two other sonnes, the one called Nycudar Oglan, and the other Targahekhan, to whom the father had left no por∣tions, as being the youngest, but yet they had their parts, and the children of the other had also their shares.

¶ Haybkaykhan, the sixt king of Persia of the Tartarians.

HAybkaykhan, the sonne of Vlah Kukhan, succeeded his father in the seigneurie of Per∣sia. [ E] He had warre with Borakhan, who drew a great armie out of Chagatay, in the yere of Christ 1271, and of the Egyra 668, against whom Haybkaykhan did fight, and van∣quished him, forcing him to retire to Maurenahar. He was king seuenteene yeares, at the end whereof he died in Amedon, in the yeare of Grace 1282, and of the Egyra 680, for that he had no children, they set his brother Nicudar Oglan in his place, who caused himselfe to be called Hamed Khan.

¶ Hamed Khan, before Nicudar Oglan, the seuenth king of Persia of the Tartarians.

HAmed Khan, who was before called Nicudar Oglan, made himselfe a Moore, and chan∣ged [ F] his first name. He raigned onely two yeares, and two moneths, at the end where∣of he died, in the yeare of our Saluation 1383, and of the Egyra 683, so as the realme re∣turned to the children of Haybkaykhan.

[ A] ¶ Argon-Khon, the eight king of Persia of the Tartarians.

ARgon-Khon, eldest sonne to Haybkaykhan, came to the realme by his vnckles death, the which he enioyed seuen yeares, and then died, in the yeare of Grace 1292, and of the Egyra 690, leauing the gouernement to his brother Ganiatukhon.

¶ Ganiatukhon, the ninth king of Persia of the Tartarians.

FIue moneths after the death of Argon, Ganiatukhon was aduaunced vnto the crowne. This prince was verie liberall, & had many excellent parts, all which were blemished by his sensualitie. Being verie needie, he thought to bring the vse of paper money into Persia, & into the prouinces of Ketaokotan, but no man would yeeld vnto it; and he that d•••• most oppose himselfe was an vnckle of his called Baydu Kon, who vpon this subiect ••ade warre against him, and slew him in battaile, hauing beene king three yeares, in the ••••are of Christ 1295, and of the Egyra 693.

¶ Badu Khan, the tenth king of Persia of the Tartarians.

[ C] BAdu Khan, sonne to Turgahe, the sonne of Vlah Kukhan, vnckle to the last king, hauing thus forcibly seised vpon the realme, Gazun, the sonne of Argon Khon, came against him with a goodly armie, consisting all of Moores, and they met at Badukhem, and at Nakchoan, where he was vanquished, and forced to flie; but he was taken by a Vuazir to Gazun, who brought him to Tabris, where he put him to death, in the yeare of Grace ••296, and of the Egyra 694, hauing held the realme but one yeare.

¶ Gazun, the eleuenth king of Persia of the Tartarians.

GAzun, the sonne of Argon, the sonne of Haybkaykhon, the sonne of Vlah Kukhan, made himselfe king of Persia by the death of Badu, he was a great Iusticer: in the yeare of ••••rist 1298, and of the Egyra 696, they of Damas, & of some other places of Surya, ma∣••••••g a league with Bendokdar king of Aegypt, reuolted against him: but hauing led an ••••••ie against them, he vanquished them, and reduced them vnder his obedience, retur∣••••ng thus victorious to Kasuin in Persia, which was afterwards the court of kings: he died ••••••e, in the yeare of our Saluation 1305, and of the Egyra 703, hauing raigned eight or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 yeares: he was buried at Tabris in Zambgazun, in a sumptuous Temple which he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 caused to be built in his life time; and of all those of this line, there is only this tombe ••••nding at this day, the which hath beene preserued from the iniurie of time.

[ E] ¶ Alyaptu, the twelfth king of Persia of the Tartarians.

THe gouernment of the realme fell into the hands of Alyaptu, brother to the deceased king, who hauing made himselfe a Moore, caused himselfe to be called Sulton Maha∣•••••• Ben Argon: he was but three and twentie yeares old when he began to gouerne, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his court at Tabris: he was verie seuere in the execution of justice, by means where∣•••• he kept his people in rest and content. He was the first that brought in a custome to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a tribute of the children of Christians and Iewes, to frame them after his owne fa∣••o••s, and to vse their seruice, in the yeare of Grace 1306, and of the Egyra 705. He built •••••• towne of Sultania, and in the yeare following, he seised vpon Gueylon, and Racht. [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 armed against Cham, or Damas, which had reuolted the second time, in the yeare of ••••••ce 1313, and of the Egyra 712, but hauing reduced them to reason, he returned into ••••••ia, and died in the towne of Sultania, in the yeare of Christ 1317, and of the Egyra 〈◊〉〈◊〉, hauing beene king twelue yeares, and nine moneths.

¶ Abuzayd Bahederkon, the thirteenth king of Persia of the Tartarians. [ A]

SVltan Abuzayd Bahederkon, the sonne of Alyaptu, inherited his fathers realme at the age of twelue yeres: he had for his Vayzir one called Amir Chupon, who had a daugh∣ter exceeding faire that was married, of whom the king grew passionatly in loue; so as he demaunded her of her father, who excused himselfe, and would not giue her, saying, That her husband onely had power ouer her: but Abuzayd full of choler, and transported with affection, tooke her by force, putting both father and husband (who sought to hin∣der him) to death, and he gaue her the name of Kondekar, which is a royall title; she got such power ouer him, as in a short time he got the whole gouernement of the realme in∣to her hands, wherein she carried her selfe wisely and discreetly, and he in the meane time [ B] spent his life vertuously, giuing himselfe to the reading of bookes, to the which he was much affected. He was of an actiue disposition and good vnderstanding: most common∣ly he spent the Sommer in Sultania, and the Winter in Bagadet, and hauing raigned nine∣teene yeares, he died in the yeare of Grace 1337, and of the Egyra 736, by his death the power of the Tartarians was diuided in Persia, euery man terming himselfe king of what he had in his gouernement, and so it continued vnto the comming of Teymurlang, which was about sixtie three yeares.

¶ TARTARIANS WHICH COM∣MAVNDED [ C] IN PERSIA OF THE DESCEN∣DANTS OF TEYMVRLANG.

¶ Teymurlang, the first king of Persia of this line.

TEymurlang, whom they commonly called Tamberlan, that is to say, Teymur the ••••••ping, was sonne to Buiankan, and the fourteenth successor to Chinguis Kan, from whom he was descended: for he was not as some haue affirmed, a [ D] theefe, a moyle keeper, or a shepheard, but a valiant souldier as his actions doe shew. He was borne in Samarkand, and followed armes as his predecessors had done: his fift grandfather, called Carachar Nuyon, went out of Tartaria with Chinguis Kan, at such time as the same king sent Chagatayhkhon, his second sonne, to gouerne the realmes of Maurenahar, Ayg••r, and Koarrazm, where he was made his first Vuazir, in which digni∣tie he and his continued vnto Teymur, with other charges fit for his qualitie and his great extra••••ion. In the time of Teymur, there raigned in Chagaty Soyorgat Mechkhom, vnder whom Teymur did serue, with the title of Vuazir and captaine generall; and Soyorgat dy∣ing, in the yeare of Grace 1370, and of the Egyra 7••1. Teymurlang was proclaymed king with the generall consent of all men, then seeing himselfe setled in the realme, he went [ E] forth with an innumerable armie, attempting nothing but it succeeded happily: so as in the ••pace of six and thirtie yeares that he raigned, besides the realmes which he pos∣ses••; he conquered those of Maurenahar, Turquestan, Koarrazm, Karason, Sistom, Indu∣••••••m, Hyera••••en, Pa••••, Kermon, Mazandaron, Aderbajon, and Kusistam, all which, and others; his children and captaines, diuided among them after his death. In the yeare of Grace 1388, and of the Egyra 789, Teymur being aduertised of a certain rebellion which was made 〈…〉〈…〉, the ch••efe citie of the prouince of Hierak in Persia, he went thither in person to suppresse it, as he did, putting 60000 persons to the sword: Toktamechkhon was king of Kapechak by ••he fauour of Teymur, who fought to rebell as others had done: but he got nothing but blows, for Teymur sent an armie against him, the which forced him [ F] ••o abandon the realme, and to flie into Gurgestam. In the yeare of Grace 1402, and of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Egyra 803, Teymur led a mightie armie into Surya, tooke and ruined Alep and Da∣mas, & defeated Sultan Farache king of Aegypt in battaile: from thence he returned against Bagadet, the which he also tooke, and from thence he went to Kabka neere vnto Tabris,

[ A] where he wintred. The yeare following, hauing gathered together a greater armie than before, he went into the plaine of Angory, against the great Turke Baiazet, whom he fought with and vanquished, carrying him away prisoner, conquering an spoyling many of his countries: As for Baiazet he died a prisoner the yeare after. Whilest that Teymur was thus busied against the Turkes, one called Kara Issuff gaue a sodaine assault to Baga∣det, and forced Weyshelkony (to whom Teymur had giuen it) to abandon it: but being re∣turned out of Rumestan, he sent his nephew Abubakar against Kara Issuf, who recoue∣red the citie, and restored it to Sulton Weys, as shall be said hereafter. Teymur passed af∣terwards to Ardiuil, where he continued certaine dayes, and in fauour of Cheque Safy, released a great number of captiues (as you shall heare hereafter;) then leauing Persia, he returned into Karason, from whence he went afterwards to Samarkand his owne countrie, where he spent some moneths in feasts and great joy, contracting many marri∣ages amongst the citisens. In the end, he went to Anzar, a countrie which depends of Catay, where he ended the remainder of his dayes, in the yeare of our Lord God 1405, and of the Egyra 807.

Teymurlang had foure sonnes, the eldest was called Ioon Guyr, who dyed a yeare be∣fore his father, leauing two sonnes, Mahamed Sulton, and Pyr Mahamed, whom Teymur ordayned in his will that he should succeed him in his realmes of Gaznehen and India, but Pyr Aly slew him. The second sonne of Teymur, called Hamar Cheque, was in his fa∣thers [ C] life time gouernour of Persia, but he died in the fort of Chormatu, which they call Kormauuat in Lorestan; and the third sonne, called Miruncha, succeeded in the go∣uernement of those lands which Vlah Kukhan held in Hyerakhen, and Aderbajon, vnto Damas. He died, in the yeare of our Saluation 1408, and of the Egyra 810, by the hand of Kara Issuf Turcoman. The fourth sonne of Teymur, called Mirzahcharok, who had al∣wayes accompanied the father, succeeded him in the empire.

¶ Mirzahcharok, who was the second King of the descendants of Teymurlang.

[ D] MIrzahcharok, the youngest of the foure sonnes of Teymurlang, was in Karason when his father died at Anzar. Being come vnto the empire, he found not his realme so ••eaceable as he expected: for they of Hyron and Turon would not acknowledge him ••or king, then hauing pacified all these broyles, he led his armie against Kara Issuf in Ader∣••ajon, who being armed with an intent to defend himselfe, died vpon the way, leauing ••wo sonnes, the one called Mirzah Scandar, and the other Mirzah Iooncha, who came to ••••ght with Charok, but they were vanquished: yet afterwards he receiued Mirzah Ioon∣•••••• into his seruice, and restored him to the realme of Aderbajon. After this Charok built •• towne in Maurenahar, which they called by his name Charokya: Then, hauing raig∣•••••• [ E] three and fortie yeares, he died, in the yeare of Grace 1447, and of the Egyra 850. He ••ad fiue sonnes, to the eldest, called Mirzah Oleghbek, he gaue the countries of Turque∣••••••n and Maurenahar: The second, Ebrahem Sultan, died before the father, in the yeare of ••race 1435, and of the Egyra 838, hauing gouerned Persia twentie yeares, and built ••••ny edefices worthie of memorie. A yeare before the fathers death, Baesfangor his ••••••••d sonne died: the fourth, called Mirzah Soyorgat Mechkhon, who gouerned the pro∣••inces of Gazna or Gaznehen, and of India, died in his fathers life time: and the fift, cal∣led Mirzah Mahamed Iuguy, died also before Charok. Whenas Teymurlang died, they of Samarkand saluted a kinsman of his called Sulton Kalil for king, against whom there re∣••olted a vassal of his called Kodahdad Hosceny, and tooke him, then he called to his succors ••••ama Ioon king of Magolstam or Tartaria, and gaue him entrie into this prouince: but [ F] •••• being in possession, put Kodahdad Hosceny to death, rewarding him in that manner for •••••• treason, and gaue another realme in exchange to Kalil, where he liued the remainder of his dayes content.

¶ Mirzah Ologhbek, the third king of the descendants of Teymurlang. [ A]

OLoghbek, who in the life of his father Charok was Gouernor of the countries of Tur∣questan and Maurenahar, came to Balk in the yeare of Grace 1448, and of the Egy∣••a 851, where he was aduertised that in Herat, and Karason, Mirzah Alahdaolet his kins∣man entitled himselfe king, he armed against him, and met him at Morgab, where he fought with him, and defeated him: the other being forced to flie to a brother of his cal∣led Mirzah Baber, in whose companie he returned against Ologhbek, who leauing Herat, went to draw his forces together at Balk: but he found that a sonne of his called Mirzah [ B] Abdelatife had reuolted against him, so as he was forced to giue him battaile, the which Ologhbek lost, with his life, and a sons of his that was with him called Mirzah Abd Razis, hauing commaunded one and fortie yeares in those countries, and two yeres onely after the death of his father, hauing the whole succession, being in the yeare of Christ 1450, and of the Egyra 853.

¶ Mirzach Abdelatife, the fourth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.

MIrzach Abdelitife being thus rid of his father and brother, got to himselfe the quiet [ C] possession of the realme of Persia: but he held it not long, for at the end of six mo∣neths the souldiers flew him.

¶ Mirzach Abdula, who was the fift King of the descendants of Teymurlang.

MIrzach Abdelatife being justly rewarded for his particide, his brother Mirzach Ab∣dula had the realme after his death, the which hauing enioyed one yeare, Mirzah Sulton Abusayd, king of Karason, came and spoiled his countrie: against whom Abdula went, but he lost the battaile, and his life, in the yeare of of our Saluation 1452, and of [ D] the Egyra 855.

¶ Mirzach Sulton Abusayd, the sixt king of the descendants of Teymurlang.

MIrzach Sulton Abusayd, the sonne of Mahamed, the sonne of Miromcha, the sonne of Teymur, hauing thus slaine Abdula, seised vpon the realme. There grew new warres betwixt Mirzach Ebrahem, and Mirzahcha Mahamud, against whom Mirzah Iooncha went, from whom these two fled, and he tooke their countries: whereupon, they both armed against him, but they came not to fight, for they were reconciled, making a diui∣sion [ E] of their gouernements. Presently after this accord, Mirzah Saniar, with Mirzah Aladaolet, and his sonne Mirzah Ebrahem, priuat princes, came to fight with Abusayd at Saraks, but he vanquished them, in which battaile Saniar was slaine, and the other two fled. At that time Abusayd held the realme of Badachon, Gaznehen, Kabul, Sistom, and Koarrazm. In the yeare of our Redemption 1468, and of the Egyra 872, Mirzach Asem∣hek Ben Alybek Ben Kara Otman flew Mirzah Iooncha, by reason of whose death they cal∣led Abusayd to the gouernement of Kermon, Hierak, and Aderbajon, Acembek being hidden, craned a peace of him by an Embassadour, but he would not yeeld vnto it. Here∣upon Acembek retired to Karabag (these are mountaines about Tabris, and vpon the way) seising vpon all the passages, distressing Abusayd in such sort for victualls, as despay∣ring [ F] of all succours, he fled; but he was taken, and brought to Mirzah Yadigar Mahamed, who went in the companie of Acembek, whom he flew, in the yeare of our Redemption 1469, and of the Egyra 873.

[ A] ¶ Mirzah Sulton Hamed, the seuen king of the discendants of Teymurlang.

ABusayd being thus slaine, MirZah Sulton Hamed his sonne succeeded him in the realme of Maurenahar, the which he enioied eight and twentie yeres: at the end whereof he died, in the yere of Grace 1495, and of the Egyra 899.

¶ Mirzah Babor, the eight king of the descendants of Teymurlang.

[ B] MIrzah Babor cousin to Hamed, and grandchild to Abusayd, succeeded in the realme of Maurenahar, by the death of his vnckle, in the yere of Grace 1500, and of the Egy∣ra 904: but Ichaybekan came from Vsbek, and dispossest him of his realme, where there was no more any king of the blood of Teymurlang: Mirzah Babor flying out of Maure∣nahar, went into Gaznehen, and from thence into India, where he made his aboad: and hauing raigned in the one and in the other countie eight and thirtie yeares, he died, in the yere of Grace 1532, and of the Egyra 937, leauing two sonnes, Homayon Mirzah, and Kamoran Mirzah, who were kings after the father: Homayon had the best prouinces of In∣dia. He had a Wazir called Chyrkan, who reuolted against him, forcing him to abandon his realmes, and to flie into Persia, whereas then Chatamas raigned, who assisted him with [ C] twelue thousand choise men, vnder the commaund of a captaine of his called Beyram∣kan, who leading Homayon with him, restored him to his realmes, reducing all vnder his obedience, with the death of the rebell Chyrkan. Gelaladin Akbar the great Mogol was the sonne of this Homayon, who liued in the yeare 1609.

¶ Mirzah Hiadigar, the ninth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.

Mirzah Hiadigar the sonne of Mirzah Sulton Mahamed, the sonne of Mirzah Baesfan∣gor or Baysangor, the sonne of Mirzah Charrok, the sonne of Teymurlang. Hauing in the yere of the Egyra 873 (being accompanied by Acembek) slaine Abusayd, as hath beene [ D] spoken, he succored him with an armie, with the which he marcht against Strabat. At that ••••ne there raigned in Karason Ocem Mirzah the sonne of Mansur, the sonne of Bahekara, the sonne of Hamar Cheque, who was the sonne of Teymur; who hearing of the desseigne of Hiadigar, came in great hast to succour Strabat, and vanquished him, in the yeare of Grace 1470, and of the Egyra 874, who being thus defeated, returned to Acembek be∣ing at Tabris, who supplied him againe with a great armie, with the which he charged ••eem Mirzah, and put him to flight, forcing him to abandon the realme, and to go to∣wards Faryab and Mayman neere Balk. Hiadigar hauing thus gotten the gouernment of the countrie, gaue himselfe to pleasure, and to all sorts of vices; so as his negligence and illlenesse gaue courage to Ocem to come and assaile him by night, hauing with him but a [ E] thousand resolute souldiers, with the which he did so manage his enterprise, as he seised ••n his enemie, whom hauing in his power, he put to death; and in this manner recoue∣••ed againe the possession of his realme: this happened in the yeare of Grace 1471, and of the Egyra 875. In Hiadigar ended the race of Mir Charrok. And for that heretofore we haue counted the yeare 1532, and yet the things which happened vnder this prince were done in the yeare 1571, as hath beene said, and although we haue set Hiadigar after Mirzah Babor; yet the reader shall be aduertised that the prouinces of Persia were then di∣uided, and commaunded by many kings at one time. And for that they haue sometimes in their turnes commanded the whole realm, they are not therefore all accounted kings, but of the whole countrie of Persia, at the least of the prouinces which depend there∣••on, [ F] one after another, and yet there is no confusion in the Chronologie, as you may easi∣ly obserue.

Mirzah Sultan Ocem, the tenth king of the descendants of Teymurlang. [ A]

MIrzah Sultan Ocens the sonne of Mansur, the sonne of Bahekara, the sonne of Hamer Cheque, the sonne of Teymur, hauing thus recouered the realme which Hadigar had taken from him, he gouerned his people long in peace, the which he affected the more, for that he was a louer of justice. He beautified his realme with many stately buildings, among the which (and the most famous) was a Madrese, or Hospital to receiue poore Pil∣grime strangers; a worke worthie of a great prince.

In his time the Vsbekes came into Maurenahar, whereas they tooke some lands from [ B] the descendants of Teymurlang, who had inioied them vnto that day, against whom Ocem meaning to oppose himselfe, leuied an armie to march against them, who being vpon the way, died at Vuadekis, in the yeare of Grace 1506, and of the Egyra 911, hauing raigned foure and thirtie yeares, and beene king of all Karason foure moneths: he liued seuentie yeres, whereof he was twentie continually sicke of a palsie, and could not go to horse∣backe. He had fourteene sonnes, of which two succeeded him.

¶ Bahady, or Pedy Amazon, and Musafar Mirzach, the eleuenth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.

BAhady or Pedy Amazon, and Mansafar Mirzach, brethren, and sonnes to the deceased [ C] Ocem, raigned together after their father, against whom came Chaybek Vsbek: but they finding themselues vnable to resist him, abandoned the countrie: Bahady Amazon went to Truchis, where hauing leuied a small armie, he went against Vsbek, by whom he was defeated, and forced to flie into Persia, to Cha Ismaell who raigned at that time, by whom he was courteously entertained, giuing him the lands of Chambe Gazon in Tabris, whereof he liued, and moreouer ten Serafs of gold by the day, for his diet; euery Seraf of gold in Persia is worth eight Larines, and euery Larine is twelue pence sterling, little more or lesse. Bahady remained in Tabris seuen yeares, vnto the yeare 1515, and of the Egyra 920, that Selim the Emperour of the Turkes tooke the towne of Tabris, and carri∣ed [ D] him with him to Constantinople, where he died of the plague, in the yeare of Grace 1518, and of the Egyra 923.

¶ Mirzach Homar, the twelfth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.

MIromcha, the third sonne of Teymurlang, had two sonnes, the one called Mirzach Ho∣mar, who succeeded him in the gouernment of Aderbajon, and Abubakar in Baga∣det: after the death of Teymur Homar declared himselfe king, and seising vpon his bro∣thers countrie, tooke him in the towne of Sultania: but this imprisoned prince hauing found meanes to corrupt some of his guards, he flew the rest that thought to hinder his [ E] passage out of prison; then he began to spoile Persia, from whence he drew good troups of souldiers, with which he came to charge his brother, whom he vanquished, and for∣ced to flie into Karason, to his vnckle Mirzach Charrok, who gaue him Strabat and Ma∣sandaron, whereof he liued: but being of a turbulent and restlesse spirit, he made war against Charrok himselfe, who vanquished him; so as the other hauing no place of retreat, he fled to Morgab, and seeking to go from thence to Samarkand, he died vpon the way, in the yeare 1406, and of the Egyra 809.

¶ Mirzach Abubakar, the thirteenth king of the descendants of Teymurlang.

Mirzach Abubakar sonne to Homar, brother to Mironcha, and grandchild to Teymur, [ F] remained by the death of his brother peaceable king in Tabris. He was a valiant cap∣taine; but vnfortunate, for Karayssuf Turkimon, who had fled into Mecere in Aegypt, fought with him twice neere to the riuer of Euphrates; in the first he was defeated, and

[ A] his brother slaine, in the yere of Grace 1407, and of the Egyra 810: after which, he went to Kernon, and from thence to Siston, where the yeare following, meaning to returne against his enemie with a mightie armie, he died vpon the way: and in him ended the ••ace and successorus of Chinguis Khan, and of Teymur, Tartarians, who commanded in Persia, whereof▪ we shall speake more particularly heareafter.

[ B] ¶ OF THE DESCENDANTS OF KARA∣KVYONLV, THAT IS TO SAY, BLACKE SHEEPE, WHO COMMANDED IN PERSIA.

Karayssuf, the first king of this familie.

KArayssuf Ben Kara Mahamet Turkimon went to serue Weys Helkony Sultan of Badaget, who for the good seruices which he had done him, made him captain of the Turkimans, of that band which they call Karaquionla, that is to say, the Blacke sheepe, to distinguish them from others whom they [ C] called White sheepe, as shall be said hereafter. And this is to be obserued that at the same time the factions of White and Blacke raigned in Italie, who as they were like in name, so did they worke the same effects to them of Persia. Kara Mahamet father to Karayssuf, had beene captaine of that faction whilest he liued: which charge was deuolued to his sonne after his death, who in requitall of the fauours which Sultan Weys had done him, gaue an assault to his towne of Bagader, and tooke it from him, the which had beene giuen to Weys by Teymur, who as hath beene said, was then in Rumestan against Baiazet: but being returned from his expedition, seeing the treason of Karayssuf, •••• sent his nephew Abubakar, who recouered that which he had taken, and restored Ba∣••••det to Sulton Weys Helcony: but he enioied it little, for Mironcha forced him to leaue it, [ D] ••••ling therein the same Abubakar his sonne. ••••arayssuf being thus defeated, not knowing where to find safe retreat, fled into Aegypt, whereas the king caused him to be taken, and put in prison, in the which he continued vntill that newes came of the death of Teymur, whereof Karayssuf being aduertised, he sought meanes to escape, as he did, and taking his way towards Persia, he wrought so by his industrie, that he gathered together an armie, with the which he bouldly went to en∣counter Abubakar. Helcony, in the meane time, who had beene possessed of Bagadet, and who was watchfull to encounter some good occasion, let not this slip; for whilest that ••bubakar went against Karayssuf, he seised vpon Bagadet, at the same time whenas Abu∣bakar and Karayssuf met at Nakchoan, whereas Abubakar was vanquished; so as Tabris 〈◊〉〈◊〉 into the hands of Karayssuf, and leauing it furnished with all things necessarie to make ••••••lence, he marched against Kara Osman Bayandury, who held the countrie of Dyarbek, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which he abandoned, and fled. Yssuf placed good garrisons therein, and so returned ••••••abris, where leauying a new armie, he marched against Helcony, whom he vanquished ••••••••taile, and hauing slaine him, he seised vpon the citie in the yeare 1413, and of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 1815. From thence he passed into Scyrnan, or Seruan, entring by the countrie of ••••gestam. He slew the king thereof (called Constantine) in battaile, taking Cheque 〈◊〉〈◊〉 king of Seruan, whom he led prisoner to Tabris, but afterwards he redeemed 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with a great summe of money. Karayssuf did also winne the townes of Sultania; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and Taron: and in the yeare 1420, and of the Egyra 822, he went against Anteb 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Surya, neere to Alep: but Mirzach Charrok comming from Karason, he desisted [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his enterprise, and went to meet with his enemie: but before they encountred, Ka∣••••ssuf died in Oyon about Tabris, and hauing neither sonne, kinsman, nor any true friend 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him, (for tyrants haue neuer any) the souldiers hauing spoiled his tent, left him without buriall, hauing taken from him his shirt, and cut off his cares to haue certaine

iewells that were hanged thereat; and thus he lay certaine daies in the open field, vn∣till [ A] being found by some that knew him, and pittying his miserie, they tooke him from thence and buryed him at Ergis, hauing raigned fourteene yeares: he died in the yere of Grace 1421, and of the Egyra 823. He had six sonnes, the eldest was called Pyr Budah Khan, who died before his father, the second Amir Scandar, the third Myrzach Iooncha, the fourth Cha Mahamed (who had the gouernment of Park, and held it three and twentie yeres, vnto the yeare 1431, and of the Egyra 833, whenas Hamed Hamadany flew him,) the fift Amyr Apsal, who died in his fathers life time, the sixt Abuzayd, who his bro∣ther Amyr Scandar had slaine, as you shall presently heare.

¶ Amyr Scandar, sonne to Karayssuf. [ B]

AMyr Scandar, the second sonne to Karayssuf, succeeded his father, in the yeare of Grace 1422, and of the Egyra 822: who being come vnto the crowne, continued the warre against Myrzah Charrok, by whom he was vanquished in Mesopotamia; so as he was forced to retire towards the riuer of Euphrates, and Charrok marcht to Tabris, where they would not receiue him, for the loue and respect they bare to Scandar; so as Charrok holding his stay there fruitlesse, returned to Karason, and Scandar to Tabris, in the yeare 1426, and of the Egyra 828: whereas depriuing Amyr Chamcadin king of Ka∣la, both of life and kingdome, in the yere 1428, and of the Egyra 830: he did the like to Sultan Hamed Curd gouernour of the prouince of Curdestam. In the yeare 1430, and of [ C] the Egyra 832, he tooke Sultania, chasing away the garrisons of Myrzah Charrok, who hearing these bad newes, came with his armie against Scandar, and Iooncha his brother, who encountred at Salmas neere to Tabris, whereas Scandar lost the bataile, & retired in∣to Rumestam; yet Tabris fell not into the hands of Charrok, who being returned to Ka∣rason, and hauing repaired his armie, he marcht against the towne of Key, the which he tooke: then being reconciled to Iooncha the brother of Scandar, he gaue him Tabris. He by vertue of this donation (the which the other neuer held) tooke armes against his bro∣ther, fought with him, and got the victorie, forcing Scandar to retire into Kala Aleniak, whither Iooncha pursued him, and sought to enuiron him: but a sonne of Scandars called [ D] Cha Kobad (who was then in disgrace with his father) flew him, in the yeare of Grace 1438, and of the Egyra 841. Scandar a little before his death had slaine his brother Abusayd, for some iealousies he had of him.

¶ Io••ncha, the third of them of Kara Kionlu which commanded in Persia.

THe brother of Iooncha being dead, he presently seised vpon the realme, where seeing himselfe setled, he leuied an armie to go against the gouernour of Gurgestam, from whom he tooke that prouince: then making many enterprises vpon the countrie of Per∣sia, he reduced all vnder his obedience, chasing away some garrisons which Myrzah Ma∣mud [ E] sonne to Baysanger had placed there, he being at that time dead: this happened in the yeare 1433, and of the Egyra 856: and in the yeare 1458 he led his armie to Karason, to make warre against Myrzah Ebrahem soone to Aladaolet, whom he vanquished, in which bataile AmyrZudaba Zagatay died. Sultan Abucayd raigned then at Balk, who went against Iooncha, but he made an accord soone with him, being aduertised that a sonne of his had reuolted in Tabris, whither he returned speedily, and tooke him, causing him to be com∣mitted to close prison. This trouble was scarce ended, when he was aduertised that another sonne of his called Pyr Budak, who gouerned Bagader, had rebelled; so as Ioon∣cha was forced to turne his armes against him, besieging him a whole yeare in Baga∣det, which was in the yeare of Grace 1466, and of the Egyra 869: yet by the meanes of [ F] some men that were mediators, they were reconciled; which businesse being thus con∣cluded, a brother of the rebells called Mahamedy flew him, without the fathers priuitie, who returned to Tabris, where he commaunded soueraignly, and in all Aderbajon, Hye∣rakhen of Parc, Kirmon, and a great part of Suria.

[ A] In the yere 1468, and of the Egyra 872, he had an intent to go against the gouernour of Diarbek, called Ozun Acembek, and caused his armie to dislodge; but the Winter was so sharp, as he was forced to returne, and to giue ouer this expedition vntill the Spring, at what time he drew his armie to field.

It was the manner of Iooncha (whether it were to make him sleep, or to diuert him from other cares, or for that he was giuen to wine) to be drunkeeuerie night, and to sleepe long in the morning: and they knowing his custome, the armie did still march, and he followed, hauing a guard of a thousand horse. This came to the knowledge of Ozun Acembek, who taking with him fiue thousand choise men, charged him at such a time, as [ B] he could not be relieued; so as his men being cut in peeces, himselfe was slaine vpon the place, and two of his sonnes taken prisoners; the eldest was called Mahamed Myrzah, whom Ozun caused to be slaine, putting out the others eyes, whose name was Issuf Mir∣zah. Thus Iooncha died, hauing raigned three and thirtie yeares, and liued seuentie. He was a bad prince, and the most voluptuous that raigned in those countries in his time.

¶ Acen Haly, the fourth of them of Karakionlu, which commaunded in Persia.

ACen Aly, sonne to Iooncha, inherited his fathers realme after his death, and all his treasure which came into his hands, the which being verie great, and he verie indis∣creet, [ C] he made a l••uie of two hundred thousand men, horse and foot, to whom he ad∣uanced a yeares pay, the which they hauing receiued, the greatest part of them went to Abusayd king of Karason, who marcht presently against him, and put him to flight, and his misfortune was such, as he fell into the hands of Ozun Acembek, against whom he fought, but he was defeated, and slaine: the line of the Karakyonlu ending thus in him, hauing commaunded ouer Persia; the which happened in the yere 1469, and of the Egyra 873.

[ D] ❧ THE FAMILIE OF AKVYONLV, OR WHITE SHEEPE, OTHERWISE CAL∣LED BAYONDVRYAH, WHICH HAVE COMMAVNDED IN PERSIA.

¶ Ozun Acembek, the first of the line of the Akuyonlu.

[ E] THe faction of the Karakuyonlu hauing thus taken end by the death of Acem Aly, the partie of Akuyonlu got presently to the royaltie, by the meanes of Ozun Acembek: he was sonne to Osmonbek the sonne of Cotoluk Bek, a Turkoman: and he was so valiant and generous, as he conquered in a maner the best part of Persia: they do commonly call him Vsun Casan. Osman or Otmonbek, grandfather to Acembek, held (as hath beene said) the countries of Diarbek, the which Karayssuf had left him by his death, who after the second succession, came into Persia, in the the time of Iooncha, whom ha∣uing slaine, as hath beene said, he recouered his lands, and seised vpon Tabris, and Ader∣••••jon; he slew Mirzah Sulton Abuzayd, who went from Karason to fight with him. ••••ncha hauing left two sonnes, as we haue said, Acembek flew one of them, and put 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the others eyes, who retired himselfe to Scyras, where he was acknowledged by them [ F] ••ll, as their king or soueraigne lord: but Acembek hauing led his armie against the towne, ••••oke it by force, putting blind Issuf to death: and from thence he passed into Kermen, the which he conquered with Bagadet; and hauing reduced vnder his obedience Hyera∣••••, Aderbajon, Park, Kermon, and other prouinces of Persia, in the yeare 1472, and of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Egyra 876, he went to fight with Sultan Mahamet king of Ruines, or of Turkes, by

whom Ozun Acembek was defeated in Arzenion, with the death of Zeynel B••k his sonne, [ A] who was gouernour of Casuin. Acembek being defeated, fled to Tabris, and the Tures returned to Constantinople. Soone after Ozun Acembek died in the yeare 1478, and of the Egyra 882; and at the same time died Ogorlu Mahamed the eldest of his seuen sonnes: Sultan Calil was the second; Yacub Myrzah was the third: the fourth Mactah Myrzah: the fift Issuf Mirzah: the sixt Maksuk Bek, who slew Sultan Calil his brother: and the seuenth Zeynel Bek, who died in the Turkish warres.

¶ Sultan Calil, or Hhalil, the second king of Persia, of the familie of the Akuyonlu.

SVltan Calil or Hhalil was in possession of the realme, by reason of the death of his fa∣ther [ B] Acembek, he sent his brother Yacub Bek to be gouernor of the countrie of Diarbek, and tooke ar mes against Calil, or Morad Bek, against whom he fought, and put to flight, forcing him to retire into the fort of Feruz Kuh, in the which, there was a captaine of Ocem Beks called Gelohy, who hauing receiued Morad Bek louingly into his fort, sent him afterwards prisoner to Calil, who caused him to be slaine in Karason, where he then was. At that time Yacub Bek brother to Calil, and gouernour of Diarbek, reuolted, leading an armie against Tabris, being accompanied by Maksud Bek his brother, who taking him on the sodaine, defeated him, and Maksud slew him with his owne hands, hauing raigned but six moneths.

¶ Yacub Bek, the third king of Persia, of the familie of the Akuyonlu. [ C]

YAcub Bek, sonne to Ozun Acembek (hauing dispossest and slaine his brother) came vnto the crowne: but in the yeare 1482, and of the Egyra 886, a captaine of his called Bayandur Bek made warre against him, whom Yacub Bek vanquished, and slew in Sauah neere to Kom. The same yeare Sultan Mahamet the sonne of Sultan Murat, died at Con∣stantinople, and there succeeded in the Empire, Sultan Barazet his sonne. At that time al∣so Sultan Aydar of Ardouel, made war against them of Gurgestam, and taking the way to Scyruan, with an intent to seise vpon that realme; Farrok Tacar king of Scyruan pre∣uented him, and fortified himselfe by Yacub Bek, from whom he demaunded succours, [ D] who sent him a good number of souldiers, vnder the leading of Soleymon Bek B••gen, a very famous captaine, who encountring Aydar in Tabasaron, vanquished him, and slew him vpon the field; taking two of his sonnes which were very young, whereof the eldest was called Aly Myrah, and the second Cha Ismaell, the which were put into the fort of Sterk∣fac, of whom mention shall be made hereafter. As for Yacub Bek, hauing raigned twelue yeares, he died in Rarabage, neere to Tabris, in the yeare 1492, and of the Egyra 896.

¶ Baysangor Mirzah, the fourth king of Persia, of the familie of the Akuyonlu.

BAsangor Myrzah sonne to Yacub Bek, came vnto the crowne by the death of his fa∣ther; [ E] but for that he was but yet young, they gaue him a captaine (for gouernour) of his, called Zufy Calil Masulu: at his comming to the crowne, there grew great facti∣ons, for that they of the part of Bayonduriah, pretended to make Mactah Myrzah vnckle to the young king, and brother to his father king, and ioining with him, they made warre against Zufy Calil, who going to field, woon a battaile of them, in the which, Maciah was slaine vpon the place, and his nephew Kostan Bek, the sonne of Maksud his brother, was taken prisoner, and carried into the fort of Aleniak. At that time Soleymon Bigen came out of Dyarbek, who (as we haue said) had vanquished and slaine Cheque or Sultan Aydar, in fauour of Farrok Yacar king of Sciruan, of whom Calil had the victorie, and slew him at [ F] Woam.

During these combustions, Sultan Bayondur taking some captaines with him, gaue an assault to Aleniak, whereas Rostan Bek was a prisoner, and ••etting him at libertie, proclai∣med him king: these, with others which reuolted, tooke presently their way to Tabris, to

[ A] surprise Baysangor, who was forced to abandon the countrie with Calil, and to go to Di∣arbek, whither they were pursued by Rostan, sending his armie against Calil, who was de∣feated and slaine. As for Baysangor, he escaped, the realm remaining then in the possession of Rostan Bek. This happened in the yeare 1493, and of the Egyra 897.

¶ Rostan Bek, the fift king of Persia, of the familie of the Akuyonlu.

BAysangor being thus put to flight, Rostan Bek the sonne of Madsud Bek began to enioy the realme, who as soone as they entred into Tabris, he set at libertie Aly Myrzah or [ B] Aly Patcha, and Cha Ismaell the sonnes of Aydar, and putting an armie to field, he tooke with him Aly Myrzah to pursue Basangor, who came to encounter them in Guania and Bardah, wheras he gaue them battaile, in which he was vanquished and slaine fighting.

After this victorie Rostan returned to Tabris, and Aly Mirzah with his permission reti∣red to Ardiuel his countrie, and the ancient aboad of his father. Rostan Bek repented him∣selfe soone to haue let him go, fearing that his presence, and the remembrance of his de∣ceased father, would breed some innouations in that countrie: without any further con∣••ideration, he caused him to be followed, who neglecting his own safetie, was soone ouer∣taken & slaine: his brother Cha Ismaell escaped as he could, and fled to Gueylon, where at that time Karkya Myrzah Aly raigned, to whom Rostan Bek sent his Embassadors to en∣treat him to deliuer Ismael into his hands, but he would not do it: it was then in the yere [ C] 1498, and of the Egyra 902, whenas Hagmet Bek the sonne of Ogorlu Mahamet & grand∣child to Ozun Acembek, came with a goodly armie which he leuied in Diarbek, to fight with Kostan; the battaile was giuen neere to Tabris, in which Hagmet Bek had the victorie, forcing Rostan to flie into Gurgestam, where he died the same yeare, hauing raigned fiue yeres, and six moneths.

¶ Hegmet Bek, the sixth king of Persia, of the familie of the Akuyonlu.

THe death of Rostan Bek gaue the realme peaceably to Hagmet Bek grandchild, as hath [ D] bin said, to Ozun Acembek: he made Haybe Sulton gouernor of the realme of Kermon; ••nd to Kacem Bek Pernaque he gaue the gouernment of Persia: these 2 conspired against him, and made war, where, after some encounters, he lost a battaile neere to Hisphaon in ••yerak, in which he died; so as there raigned no more of the house of Ozun Acembek but three young grandchildren, that is to say, Sultan Morat the sonne of Yacub in Scyruan, Alu∣••••n Bek the sonne of Yssuf Bek in Aderbajon, and his brother Mahamed Mirzah in Yazd: these three diuided betwixt them all the lands which they of the Akuyonlu held in Persia.

¶ Aluuan Bek, the seuenth king of Persia, of the familie of the Akuyonlu.

DErnaque hauing thus dispossessed his benefactor, he caused Aluuan Bek the sonne of Ys∣suf [ E] Bek, and grandchild to Ozun Acembek to be declared king, who with the helpe of ••••zybek Bayondur, and other his captaines & kinsmen, came to Tabris, to ioine with Haybe ••••ton. Mahamed Mirzah brother to Aluuan which was in Yazd, called himselfe king of His∣••haon or Hyerak, against whom Aluuan caused his armie to march, who without any lon∣ger stay, retired himselfe into the fort of Stha, wherof Ocem Quyah Gelohy was captaine, who ioining with Mahamed, they went against Aluuan, who was then returned, who en∣countring them, there was a cruell battaile giuen, which Aluuan lost, and retired to Ta∣••••is, whither Mahamed followed him: Aluuan went the second time against him; but he ••••s againe put to rout. In this battaile Haybe Sultan died, and as for Aluuan he fled to Di∣••••••bek. During all these reuolts, two brethren of Haybe Sultan did rise against Sultan Morad, [ F] ••ho was in Scyruan, whither leading great troupes of souldiers, they went against Maha∣med Myrzah, and met neere to Hisphaon, whereas a battaile was giuen, which Mahamed 〈◊〉〈◊〉, with his life, in the yere of Grace 1500, and of the Egyra 905, hauing raigned but the yeare.

¶ Sultan Morat, the eight king of Persia, of the familie of the Akuyonlu. [ A]

SVltan Morat the sonne of Y••c••b Bek had by the death of Mahamed Myrzah the realms of Parc and Hyerak, and Alu••an enioied the seigneurie of Tabris and Aderbajon, but in the yeare 1501, and of the Egyra 906, they both leuied souldiers, to vsurpe their com∣panions right; so as drawing their men to field, they met at Cazuin, but they fought not by meanes of certaine men, who made an accord, that either of them should hold that which he had. At that time Persia was ful of robbing, violence, hunger, dea••h, and mor∣talitie, with a generall resolution. In the yere 1502, and of the Egyra 907, Cha Ismaell the [ B] sonne of Cheque Aydar going out of Nakchoan, leuied an armie, & came against Tabris, whereas Aluuan remained, who soone abandoned the countrie, and sled to Bagadet, and from thence passed to Diarbek, where he died soone after, in the yere 1505, & of the Egi∣ra 910, so as Tabris came into the power of Cha Ismaell, who in the yere 1513, and of the Egyra 918, tooke armes against Sultan Morat, who went out of Scyras, & came to fight with him in Amadon, but Morat lost the battaile, and retired to Scyras, and from thence to Bagadet, wherof Barbiek was gouernour, who entertained him & tooke him to his pro∣tection: the yere following, Ismael came against them, who were forced to quit the coun∣trie, and retired to Karamania, from thence Morat returned to Diarbek, where Kazelbach or Casselbas slew him, in the yeare 1515, and of the Egyra 920; so as in him ended the gouernment of the Akuyonlu in Persia. [ C]

¶ OF THE DESCENDANTS OF CHIN∣GVIS KAN WHICH COMMANDED IN VSBEK AND MAVRENAHAR

¶ Chaybek Khon, king of Maurenahar.

WHilest that matters were managed in Persia, as hath beene said, the descen∣dants [ D] of Tuchykon the sonne of Chinguis Kan commaunded in Vsbek, and held all those lands, which are of a very great extent. In the yeare 1496, and of the Egyra 900, Chabek Khon the sonne of Budak Sulton parted from Vsbek with great forces, and came and spoiled the countries of Maurenahar and Karason, all which in a manner he held foure yeares, vnto the yeare 1500, and of the Egyra 904, when he was forced to quit them to the descendants of Teymurlang, and in the yere 1508, and of the Egyra 913, Sultan Ocem Myrzah hauing met with Chaybek Khon towards He∣rat in Maurenahar, where he raigned; and being slaine in the field, he gaue his place to his sonne Pady Azamon Myrzah, who not able to make resistance, fled to Kandar, where [ E] hauing recouered some forces, he came to fight with Chayhek, who got the victorie, forcing Pady to flie into Persia, and to make vse of the fauour of Cha Ismaell Sufy, who entreated him honourably: then in the yere 1511, and of the Egyra 916, Cha Ismaell went against Chaybek, and they both met at Maruuo, where they fought; but Chaybek Khon was vanqui∣shed, and died fighting, hauing held his seigneurie twelue yeres.

¶ Kuchengy Khon, king of Maurenahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Kan.

KVchengy Khon remained in Maurenahar, in the place of Chabek, in the yere 1513, and of the Egyra 918, Cha Ismaell sent a mightie armie into Maurenahar, vnder the com∣maund [ F] of Nagemy Sony, who ioined with Babor king of India, and then they came toge∣ther to fight with the Vsbekes in Gagydaon; but they were vanquished, Nagemy Sony being slaine vpon the place; and as for Babor being wholy defeated, he was forced to re∣tire into India: Kuchengy Khon meaning afterwards to haue his reuenge in the yere 1530,

[ A] and of the Egyra 935, entred with his armie into Persia, in which Cha Thamas the sonne of Cha Ismaell then raigned, who opposed himselfe against his forces, fought with him, and woon the victorie; so as he of Vsbek retired vanquished into Maurenahar, from whence he came the second time into Maruuo, with an intent to enter into Persia: but a peace was concluded betwixt them which staied the passage of Kuchengy, and made him returne into Maurenahar, where he died the same yere, hauing raigned twentie yeres.

¶ Abuzayd Khon, king of Maurenahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Kan.

[ B] ABuzayd Khon, the sonne of Kuchengy by the death of his father came vnto the crowne the which he held foure yeares, at the end whereof he died, hauing done nothing memorable, in the yeare 1533, and of the Egyra 939.

¶ Obeyd Khon king of Mau••enahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Kan.

OBeyd Khon, eldest brother to the deceased Abuzaid, sonne to Kuchengy Khon, brother to Cheybek, as soone as he was declared king, sent a mightie armie into Karason, mea∣ning to enter into Persia: but he was staied by Cha Thamas, who forced him to quit the lands of Karason, and Cha Thamas being retired, he returned the second time, and spoi∣led them with his armie; vnto the yeare 1540, and of the Egyra 946, whenas he died, ha∣uing [ C] raigned six yeares.

¶ Abdula Khon, king of Maurenahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Kan.

ABdula Khon, the sonne of Kuchengy Khon, had the realme of Maurenahar, by the death of Obeyd Khon, where he continued but six moneths, at the end whereof, he di∣ed, in the yeare 1541, and of the Egyra 947.

¶ Adelatife Khon, king of Maurenahar, of the descendants of Chinguis Kan.

[ D] A Delatise Khon, the sonne of Abdula Khon, succeeded in the realme, the which he held vnto the end of the yere 1542, and of the Egyra 948, the gouernment of the descen∣dants of Chinguis Kan in Maurenahar ending in him.

❧ THE BEGINNING OF SACHACH [ E] ISMAEL SOPHY, AND OF THOSE WHICH ARE DESCENDED FROM HIM, AND HAVE COM∣MANDED IN PERSIA VNTILL THIS DAY.

COntinuing now with the kings of Persia, it shall be fit before we speake of the actions of Ismaell Sophy to treat of his beginning as briefely as we may: he was sonne to Cheque Aydar, the sonne of Sultan Iuneyd, the sonne of Cheque Ebra∣hem the sonne of Cheque Aly, the sonne of Cheque Mucha, the sonne of Cheque ••afy; and in the end, the thirteenth grandchild of the descendants of Morts Aly, cousin [] ••••d sonne in law to Mahomet. When Teymurlang returned into Persia after the defeat of Baiazet, he carried with him a great number of slaues, as wel of Caramania, as of other ••ations, whom he had resolued to put to death, and with this resolution, he entred into ••••deuel, where he staied some daies: there was in this towne one Cheque Safy, who was

held by all men to be a holie man; so as he was generally honoured and respected: the [ A] fame of the vertue and good life of this man, came to the eares of Teymurlang, who was d••••••••ous to know him, & to haue his friendship; so as he himselfe went often to his house to visit him, and meaning to go from Ardeuell, he offered him whatsoeuer he would demaund; Cheque Safy knowing the intention of Teymur, in regard of his prisoners, ta∣king hold of the offer which this prince had made him, entreated him to pardon them: Teymur who desired to gratifie him, did not onely pardon them, but deliuered them into his hands, to dispose at his pleasure. Cheque Safy receiued them, and furnished them all, as well as he could, with garments, and other things necessarie, sending them free home to their houses, for the which not onely the captiues, but also the nati∣ons [ B] of whence they were, held themselues much bound to Safy, and in signe of requi∣tall of so great a fauour, there past few daies but he was visited with many gifts and pre∣sents, continuing still this acknowledgement to the descendants of Safy, euen vnto Sultan Iuneyd his thirteenth grandchild, or some of his sonnes, who liued in the time of Iooncha the sonne of Chara Issuf, of whom there hath beene mention made. This prince seeing the continuall visitations which were made to Iuneyà, and the great number of men, both of foot and horse-backe, the which were commonly at his gate, with the great authoritie which he had; all which things together gaue him subiect to be iealous of him; so as he told him that he would not haue him any more visited by so many men: wherewith Iuneyd holding himselfe to be very much wronged, went presently out of [ C] Ardeuell, being accompanied by such as were deuoted vnto him, and tooke the way to Diarbek: Ozun Acembek, who was then king of this prouince, receiued him very courteously, and giuing him to wife a sister of his the which was called Kadija Katun, by whom he had one sonne called Aydar. This Iuneyd had commonly about him cer∣taine light horsemen, the which did infest all the countrie of Gurgestam vnder the title of zealous of his sect, forcing all such as they tooke to receiue it; and continuing their courses, it happened that entring into the realme of Trebrisonde, they slew the king, and seised vpon the countrie, placing Aydar his sonne there who was with him. It chanced af∣terwards, that Acenibek s••ew Iooncha, as hath beane said, whereupon Aydar went to Arde∣uel, where he married with a daughter to Acembek called Alemcha, who brought him Aly [ D] Patcha, and Ch•• Ismaell, who was borne in the yere 1488, and of the Egyra 892: he was called Sofy, for the reason that hath beene spoken.

The yere following, Aydar being entred into the realme of Scyruan, Farrok Yassur king of that prouince, with the ayd of Yacub Bek defeated his armie, Aydar being slaine vpon the place, and his two sonnes Aly Patcha and Cha Ismaell taken prisoners, whom Sultan Rostan Bek did set at libertie: yet hauing afterwards caused Aly Patcha the eldest brother to be put to death, Cha Ismaell retired to Gueylon, where he continued for the space of six yeares, in the end, Persia being in combustion by the reuolts of the Akuyonlu, he went to Arzenion, where hauing gathered together seuen thousand men Carama∣nes, all Sophyens, of the families of Estayalu, Caml••••, Takaluh, Versaltu, Romlu, Zulka∣durlu, Auchur, Kayar, Sufiah, Karayadak, and many others which followed him, in the [ E] yeare of Grace 1501, and of the Egyra 966, being yet but fourteene yeares old: he came into Scyruan, where he had a battaile against Farrok Yassur, who had slaine his father, got the victorie of him, and made him loose his life; so as he put himselfe into the possession of this realme, and the yeare following he made warre against Aluuan in Nachoan, and forcing him to flie, Ismaell tooke Tabris: hauing obtained this victo∣rie, he instituted the Tage, the which is a Turban or red Hood, with twelue bands abou•• it, the which he caused his followers to weare, in rem••mbrance of the twelue sonnes of Oc••••, the sonne of Aly, held among them for Saints, and from whom he brag∣ged he was descended, calling this new institution Cazel Back, that is to say, a Redhead. [ F] T•••••• being done, he went to Arzenion, where he drew his forces together, to conquer the realme of Zulkadar: but in his absence Aluuan came against Tabris, to the succour whereof, Ismaell went presently, and forced the other to flie to Bagadet, and from

[ A] thence to Dyarbek, where he died two yeares after, in the yeare 1503, and of the Egyra 908. After his death, Ismaell hauing rested some time at Tabris, he led his armie into Per∣sia against Morad Bek, who was defeated by him, with the l••sse of ten thousand souldi∣ers, in the yeare 1504, and of the Egyra 909, to whom he abandoned Persia and Kermon, which became subiect to Ismaell, who went to spend the Winter at Kom, from whence he sent Eliasbek with an armie against the towne of Rey, whereas Ocembek Gelohay cap∣taine of Kalat Ferus Kuh (lying in ambush vpon the way) presented him battaile, which the other lost, with his life. Ismaell hearing of this defeat, went against Ocembek Gelohay, who retired to Feruz Kuh a fort, strong as well by nature as art, the which Ismaell vn∣derstanding and seeing no meanes to take it, he cut off their water; so as the souldiers [ B] were forced to yeeld within a moneth after the beginning of the seige: which, although it were not long, yet there died in this war aboue thirtie thousand men. This being pacifi∣ed, Ismaell tooke his way towards Karason; but being gone, a king called Mahamed Kar∣rahy hauing certain troupes with him, entred into the country of Yazd, and became mia∣ster thereof: Ismaell came against him, who defended himselfe valiantly; yet in the end, he entred the towne, and tooke Karrahy, whom Ismaell caused to be burnt, in the yeare 1506, and of the Egyra 911.

From thence Ismaell went to Scyras, where he made an edict in forme of prescription, by the which he comaunded that all such as had carried armes in the battaile where his [ C] father Aydar was slain, should die; so as this was the death of aboue thirtie or fortie thou∣sand men. And whilest the Wintered at Taron, he was aduertised that Sultan Ocem Myr∣zad king of Karason was dead, on whose countrie Chaybek Khon Vsbek seised, and the sonnes of the deceased retired to Ismaell, who presently went with his armie, whereas he gaue him battaile, the which Chaybek Khon lost, with his life, and by this meanes Karason came i••to the power of Ismaell.

In this yeare Ba••azet king of Rumy or Turky died, and Sultan his sonne succeeded him at the Empire, and in the yeare 1514, Cha Thamas the sonne of Ismaell Sophy was borne. The yeare following Selim came with a powerfull armie to Arzenion, causing Ismaell to ••bandon Hisphaon, who came and encountred his enemie at Chalderon, where there [] ••as a great battaile fought, the which Ismaell lost, and retired to Tabris, and from thence 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Gazin. Sultan Selim entred into Tabris, where he remained fifteene daies; after which ••e went into Amasiah. This yeare the Caselbas slew Sultan Morad in Diarb••k, and sent his head to Sophy: and the yeare following, Selim tooke Kemak, a place of great impor∣••a••ce in Saladulia, and Zulkadel, and Alep in Suria; then in the yeare 1517, and of the ••gyra 922, he subdued Damas and Aegypt, and in the yere following, Diarbek, and Me∣sopotamia: in the end he died in the yeare 1521, and of the Egyra 626, to whom succee∣ded his sonne Soleymon. As for Ismaell Sophy, hauing commaunded ouer all Persia for the space of twentie yeares, he died in the yeare 1525, and of the Egyra 930, being eight and thirtie yeares old. He was terrible in war, resolute, and without feare, more cruell and se∣••e••e [] than mild and courteous: he was wont to say, that as there was but one God in ••eauen, so there should be but one king vpon the earth; whereunto he aspired with an ••••••a••iable ambition: he was so much esteemed, and respected of his people, as they held ••im▪ for a holie & religious man, and they which followed him, did sometimes attribute to him honours due to diuinitie, the which he seemed to reiect; but it was but a fained s••ew, for on a time, hauing obtained a famous victorie, and of great importance, for the ••hich some called him Prophet, others Angel, and some God: he did not dissuade them, ••ut hauing made a great and deepe pit, he cast his shooe into it, saying, that he that loued ••im best, would fetch it: he had scarce spoken the word, but many thousands cast them∣••••lues into it, whereas presently the earth fell vpon them, and buryed them all quicke, suf∣••••••ing the punishment which their impietie had deserued. He had foure sonnes, that is to 〈◊〉〈◊〉, Cha Thamas, Aleas or Elias Myrzah, the third Son Myrzah, and the fourth Bathon ••••rzah.

¶ Cha Thamas, the second king of Persia, of the race of the Sophians. [ A]

CHa Thamas succeeded Ismaell Sophy his father: he had much war during his raigne, which continued three and fiftie yeres: the most important were against the Turkes. He died in the yeare 1576, and of the Egyra 983, leauing two sonnes, Cha Ismaell, and Ma∣••amed the Blind.

¶ Cha Ismaell, the third king of Persia, of the Sophyes race.

CHa Ismaell, eldest sonne to Cha Thamas, was king of Persia but a yeare, and ten mo∣neths: [ B] at the end whereof, he died, leauing the realme to his brother Mahamed the Blind, in the yeare 1578, and of the Egyra 985.

¶ Cha Mahamed, the fourth king of Persia, of the Sophyes race.

ISmaell leauing no-children, his brother Mahamed second sonne to Cha Thamas succee∣ded him, who, although he were blind, yet he gouerned seuen yeres: at the end where∣of he died, in the yeare of Grace 1585, and of the Egyra 992, leauing Cha Abas his sonne for successor. [ C]

¶ Cha Abas, the fift king of Persia.

BY the death of Mahamed the Blind, Cha Abas took possession of the realme of Per∣sia, the which he holds at this day: during his raigne, he had much war, in the which he hath giuen many battailes, the most famous wherof, were those of Gueylon, which had rebelled, reducing it vnder his obedience, not without manifest daunger to him and his. He besieged Balk in Vsbek, the which he continued certaine moneths; but in the end was forced to rise. He ruined the realme of Lar or Lara in Persia, and tooke the king, whom he put to death, by reason of the thefts and spoiles which he did to the Carauanes [ D] of merchants which past that way: be lef•• Tabris to the Turkes, the which they held since the time of Cha Thamas his great grandfather. Many memorable things haue past during the raigne of this prince, especially, against the Turkes, who haue since lost Tau∣ris, and most of the places which they held of the Persian: but the shortnesse of this abridgement will not allow of a mo••e ample narration: moreouer, in so remote a coun∣trie, matters cannot be discouered but with time, whereby the trueth will appeare.

Kings which haue commaunded in Persia, vntill that th•• Arabians entred the countrie, ac∣cording to Mirkond: the generall suppu••a••ion is in the margent. Where the letter G is ad∣ded, it shewes that they haue beene Gouernours; and yet some put them in the number of [ E] kings. The marke number, it shewes includes the king vnder whom they haue gouerned. Where there is no they doubt of the time of their raigne: on the side we haue set the yeares of Grace, and of the Egyra, wherein they haue gouerned, as writers haue obserued.

	The yeares.	Moneths.
Kay••m••rras	40.	0
Syamek.	0.	0
Ou••hangh.	50.	0
Thamur••s Diuband.	30.	0
Iambched.	0.	0 [ F]
Zo••hk.	0.	0
Fraydhun.	0.	0
Manucher.	120.	0
Naudar.	7.	0

Afraciab.	12.	0
Zaab or B••zad.	5.	0
Kay Kobad.	100.	0
Kay Kaus.	150.	0
Kay Kozrao.	60.	0
Lorasph or Loraseph.	120.	0
Gustasph or Gustaseph.	120.	0
Bahaman Darast Dast or Ardchir.	112.	0
Aomay, a Queene.	30.	0
Darab.	12.	0
Darab.	14.	0
Schander or Aschander.	14.	0
An inter••egne or vacancie.	72.	0
Chapur.	60.	0
Ardchir Babakhon.	50.	0
Chapur Zabel Ketaf. G.	0.	0
Ardchir Furzand Hormoz.	0.	0
Chapur.	60.	0
Baharon Kermon Cha.	15.	0
Yazdgerd.	22.	0
Kesere Kozrrao.	0.	0
Babaron Gur.	0.	0
Narsy or Narsa. G.	0.	0
Baharon Gur.	0.	0
Narsy. G.	0.	0
Baharon Gur.	23.	0
Yazd Gerd.	0.	0
Narsy. G.	0.	0
Yazd Gerd.	18.	0
Yazd Gerd.	21.	0
Hormos Farzand.	1.	0
Feruz.	0.	0
Sufara. G.	0.	0
Feruz.	0.	0
Sufara. G.	0.	0
Feruz.	26.	0
Belax.	5.	0
Iamasp. G.	0.	0
Kobad.	43.	0
Kesere Anuchiron or Nauchiruan.	48.	0
Hormoz.	12:	0
Baharon Chuby.	0.	0
Khozrrao Paruez.	38.	0
Kobad Chyruyhe.	0.	8
Ardchir Chyruyhe.	0.	2
Charear.	1.	0
Ioon Chir.	1.	0
Turon Dokt, a Queene.	1.	4
Iasanceda.	0.	0
Azarmy Dokt, a Queene.	0.	6
Kesere.	1.	0
Ferroghzad.	0.	1
Yazd Gerd.	20.	0

••HE CALIE•••• OF BAGADET, WHICH [ A] COMMAV•••••••• IN PERSIA SINCE THAT THE 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ENTRED INTO IT.

〈◊〉〈◊〉	〈◊〉〈◊〉		The Yeares.	The Moneths.
〈◊〉〈◊〉	〈◊〉〈◊〉	Abubaker.	2.	0 [ B]
••••••	••••••	Homar.	1.	0
••••••	••••••	Osman or Otman.	11.	6
••••••	••••••	Morts Aly.	4.	6
••••••	••••••	Acem.	0.	6
••••••	••••••

OF THE FAMILIE OF BEN HVMIA.

••••••	41.	Mauuya.	20.	0 [ C]
••••••	61.	Yezid.	3.	0
••••••	64.	Mauuya the second.	0.	1. moneth. 2. dayes.
••••••	66.	Maruuan.	1.	0
••••••	67.	Abdel Malek.	21.	1
••••••	86.	Oelid.	9.	8
••••••	96.	Soleyman.	2.	6
••••••	98.	Hamar or Homer.	2.	5
••••••	••••••	Yezid the second.	4.	8
••••••	••••••	Ochon.	19.	8
••••••	124.	Oelid the second.	1.	2 [ D]
••••••	••25.	Yezid the third.	0.	6
••••••	125.	Ebrahem.	0.	2
••••••	12••.	Mar••nan the second.	5.	0

OF THE FAMILIE OF EBEN ABAS.

••••••	13••	Safa.	4.	9
7••••.	136.	Abu Iafar.	23.	0 [ E]
777.	1••9.	Mahady By••a••	10.	0
••••••	169.	Elady Byla M••sa.	1.	3
••••••	17••.	Arachid Bylo Harun.	23.	0
••••••	193.	Mahomed Amin.	4.	7
••••••	1••8.	Maham••n.	12.	7
••••••	••••••	〈◊〉〈◊〉 Ezach Matacon.	8.	0
••••••	••••••	〈◊〉〈◊〉	5.	9
••••••	22••.	〈◊〉〈◊〉 W••k••l Byla Iafar.	12.	6
••••••	234.	Monta••e••.	0.	6
••••••	235.	Abul Ab•••• H••••ed.	5.	9 [ F]

¶ VACANCIE OF CALIFES.

••he yeares 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Grace.	The yeares of the Egy••a.
The Yeares.	The Moneths.
••60.	243.	Mostabhin.	1.	4
••62.	247.	Almatez Byla.	3.	6
••65.	250.	Motady Byla.	0.	11
••66.	251.	Almat Hamed Byla Hamed.	23.	0
••••••.	279.	Matazed Byla Hamed.	9.	9
••••••.	289.	Moktafy Byla.	4.	0
••••••.	293.	Moktader Byla.	7.	0
••••••.	301.	Iafar.	20.	0
••••••.	320.	Kaher Byla Mahamed.	1.	6
••••••.	322.	Razi Byla Mahamed.	4.	0
••••••.	326.	Moktafy Byla Ebrahem 11.	4.	0
••••••.	330.	Mostachfy Abdala.	4.	4
••••••.	334.	Mutya Byla Fazele.	29.	6
••••7.	365.	Tahya Abel Karim.	17.	2
••013.	403.	Kadar Byla Hamed.	21.	4
••032.	422.	Kahem or Alkahem Beamaryla Abu Iafar Abdula.	44.	4
••••74.	467.	Almoktady Byla.	19.	5
••••••5.	487.	Almostazer Byla.	25.	6
••••••9.	512.	Almostacherd Byla Fezele.	17.	2
••••••6.	529.	Rachet Byla.	2.	0
••••••9.	531.	Almoktafy Byla the third.	24	0
••••••1.	555.	Almostanger Byla Issuff.	11.	0
••••••2.	566.	Almostanzy Benur Elah Acen.	9.	8
••••••0.	575.	Nacer or Nacera Ladinla▪	47.	0
••••••6.	622.	Alzaher or Altaher▪ Byla Mahamed.	0.	9
••••••••.	623.	Almostanzer▪ Byla Mansur.	7.	0
••••••••.	640.	Almostacem Byla Abdula.	15.	7

••HE MOGOLES OR TARTAIANS ••ESCENDING FROM CHINGVIS KAN, WHICH COMMANDED IN PERSIA.

〈◊〉〈◊〉	602.	Chinguis Kan.	23.	0
〈◊〉〈◊〉	626.	Otkay Khaon.	13.	0
〈◊〉〈◊〉	643.	Gayuk Khaon.	1.	0
〈◊〉〈◊〉	644.	Manchu Khaon.	13.	0
〈◊〉〈◊〉	657.	Vlachu Khaon.	6.	0
〈◊〉〈◊〉	663.	Haybkay Khaon.	17.	0
〈◊〉〈◊〉	680.	Hamed Khan or Nichudar Oglan.	2.	2
〈◊〉〈◊〉	683.	Argan Khon.	7.	0
〈◊〉〈◊〉	690.	••aniatu Khon.	3.	0

〈◊〉〈◊〉	693.	〈◊〉〈◊〉	1.	0
〈◊〉〈◊〉	694.	〈◊〉〈◊〉 Khan.	8.	0
1305.	703.	〈◊〉〈◊〉 Khan, who was after∣wards called Sultan Hamed.	12.	9
1317.	〈◊〉〈◊〉	Sulton Abuzayd Bahader Khan.	19.	0

••HE MOGOLES OR TARTARIANS [ B] DESCENDING FROM TEYMVRLANG, WHICH COMMANDED IN PERSIA.

••••••••.	789.	Teymurlang.	36.	0
••405.	807.	Mirzah Karrok.	43.	0
••447.	850.	Ologhbek.	2.	0
••450.	853.	Mizah Abdelatife.	0.	6 [ C]
1451.	854.	Mirzah Abdula.	1.	0
In Maurenahar.
1452.	••55.	Mirzah Sulton Abusayd.	18.	0
1469.	873.	Mirzah Sulton Hamad.	28.	4
1532.	91••.	Mirzah Babor.	38.	0
In Karason.
1469.	873.	Mirzah Hyadigar.	2.	0 [ D]
1471.	875.	Mirzah Sultan Ocen.	38.	4
1556.	911.	Bahady or Pedy Azam••n, and Muzafa Mirzah, brethren together.	1.	0
In Aderbajon.
1406.	8••9.	Mironcha.	1.	0
1407.	810.	Mirzah Abubakar.	0.	0 [ E]

TVR KOMANS OF THE FAMI∣LIE OF THE AKVYONLVS WHICH COMMAVNDED IN PERSIA.

1413.	815.	Kara Iss••••.	14.	0 [ F]
••••21.	823.	Amir Scand••.	16.	0
••••••••.	••41.	Iooncha.	32.	0
••••••••.	872.	Acem Aly.	1.	0

TVRKOMANS OF THE FAMI∣LIE OF THE AKVYONLVS WHICH COMMAVNDED IN PERSIA.

••he yeares 〈◊〉〈◊〉.	The yeares of the Egyra.		The Yeares.	The Moneths.
••••••••.	876.	Ozun Acembek.	11:	0
••••••8.	882.	Sulton Kalil.	0.	6
••••82.	886.	Yacub Bek Buysang••r.	12.	10
••••92.	896.	Mirzah.	1.	0
••••93.	897.	Rostam Bek.	5.	6
••••98.	902.	Hagmet Bek.	1.	0
••••99.	903.	Aluuan Bek.	1.	0
1••00.	905.	Morat Bek.	1.	0

THE RACE OF THE SOPHIES DESCENDING FROM ISMAEL SOPHY, WHICH HAVE COMMAVNDED IN PERSIA.

••••••5.	906.	Cha Ismael Sophy.	20.	0
••••••5.	930.	Cha Thamas.	53.	0
••••••6.	983.	Cha Ismael.	1.	10
••••••8.	985.	Cha Mahamed the Blind.	7.	0
••••••••.	992.	Cha Abas.	33.	0